Mi-171Sh HELICOPTER

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Book I

GENERAL
APPROVED Copy
171Sh.0000.00. RE-LU №

Mi-171Sh HELICOPTER
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
171Sh.0000.00.MM

Book I

GENERAL

2011
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

The Maintenance Manual (MM) for helicopter is a composite

document comprising the design description,
recommendations and requirements for ground operation of
the helicopter and its systems. The Maintenance Manual
contains the information necessary for studying the
helicopter design as well as for maintenance and
servicing of the helicopter on the ground. The
instructions on the in-flight procedures to be performed
on the helicopter and its systems are set forth in the
Flight Manual (FM).
The list of operations to be performed during maintenance
and check intervals are given in the Maintenance Schedule
(MS). Technological instructions on maintenance are
contained in the Task Card Collections.
The entire contents of the Maintenance Manual is divided
by the numbering system into sections, subsections and
subjects presenting a breakdown into three elements:
number-point, number-point, number.
In the description of a system as a whole, use is made of
the first element of the numbering system - the section
number followed by zeros (for example, 029.00.00 –
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) in the description of a sub-system, use
is made of the first and second elements - the section
and sub-section numbers followed by zeros (for example,
029.10.00 – MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM); in the description of
an item, all the three elements are used - the section,
sub-section and subject numbers (for example, 029.10.01 –
HYDRAULIC TANK).
All information contained in a section (sub-section,
subject) is broken down into topics arranged on the
following pages (provided the particular topic is
required)

INTRODUCTION
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Page
Description and Operation……………………………………………………….1 to 100
Troubleshooting………………………………………………………………………………….101 to 200
Maintenance Practices (maintenance,
adjustments, tests, inspections and checks)………201 to 300
Maintenance Practices (removal, installation)…401 to 500
Storage regulations…………………………………………………………………….901 to 1000
Transportation………………………………………………………………………………1001 to 1100
The Maintenance Manual presents the types of vendor items
and instruments without indicating their series and
modifications, which are stated in the Certificates of
these items and instruments.
The revisions of the Maintenance Manual should be
performed at the operating agency by replacement, removal
of old sheets or introduction of new sheets (which is
stipulated by the Service Bulletins). All revisions
should be duly registered in the "Record of Revisions" of
the document being revised (document section).
Since 2007 the helicopters receive a sixteen-unit
alphanumerical code (e.g. «171Sh00604105308U»).
In the operation documentation only the last five
digits/letters are used to identify the helicopter rather
the complete serial number (e.g. «5308U»).

INTRODUCTION
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MM CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS COMBINED INTO BOOKS
(COLLECTIONS)

Book 1 GENERAL
000.00.00 Helicopter
005.00.00 Service lives
006.00.00 Dimensions and areas

007.00.00 Lifting and Shoring

008.00.00 Levelling and Weighing
009.00.00 Towing and Taxiing
010.00.00 Parking and Mooring
011.00.00 Required Placards
012.00.00 Servicing (Airfield Servicing, Ground
Servicing Equipment)
020.00.00 Standard Practices

Book2 AIRFRAME
Part1.
051.00.00 Structure
052.00.00 Doors
053.00.00 Fuselage
055.00.00 Stabilizers
056.00.00 Windows
060.00.00 Standard Practices

INTRODUCTION
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Book2 AIRFRAME
Part2.
065.00.00 Rotors

Book3 HELICOPTER SYSTEMS

Part1.
021.00.00 Air Conditioning
025.00.00 Equipment/Furnishings
026.00.00 Fire Protection
028.00.00 Fuel

Book3 HELICOPTER SYSTEMS

Part2.
029.00.00 Hydraulic Power
030.00.00 Ice and Rain Protection
032.00.00 Landing Gear
036.00.00 Pneumatic

INTRODUCTION
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Book 4 POWER PLANT

049.00.00 Airborne Auxiliary Power
071.00.00 POWER PLANT
072.00.00 Engine Tv3-117VM
073.00.00 Engine Fuel
077.00.00 Engine Indicating
078.00.00 Exhaust
079.00.00 Oil
080.00.00 Starting
084.00.00 Helicopter Transmission
148.00.00 Equipment cooling and pressurization

Book 5 ELECTRONICS
023.00.00 Communications
110.00.00 Radio Navigation Equipment
113.00.00 IFF, Warning, Active Response
Equipment

Book 6 AIR DELIVERY MEANS

129.00.00 Pyrotechnics
131.00.00 MEDEVAC Equipment
132.00.00 Air Delivery System
133.00.00 Rescue Equipment

INTRODUCTION
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Book 7 AIRBORNE EQUIPMENT

022.00.00 Auto Flight
024.00.00 Electrical Power
031.00.00 Instruments
033.00.00 Lights
034.00.00 Navigation
035.00.00 Oxygen, High-Altitude Equipment
142.00.00 Flight Data Monitoring and Recording
Equipment

Book 8
121.00.00 Gun armament
122.00.00 Bomb armament
123.00.00 Rocket armament
124.00.00 Sighting devices
127.00.00 Passive jamming aids
129.00.00 Pyro devices
136.00.00 Helicopter armor plates
150.00.00 Bore sighting

INTRODUCTION
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TASK CARD COLLECTIONS

Collection 1 Part 1 Maintenance Practices for Airframe
end Power Plant.
Collection 1 Part 2 Maintenance Practices for Airframe
end Power Plant.
Collection 2 Part 1 Maintenance Practices for Airborne
Equipment
Collection 2 Part 2 Maintenance Practices for Airborne
Equipment
Collection 3 Maintenance Practices for
Electronics
Collection 4 Part 1 Maintenance Practices for aircraft
armament and air-delivery -
transportation Equipment
Collection 4 Part 2 Maintenance Practices for aircraft
armament and air-delivery -
transportation Equipment

INTRODUCTION
Page 7/8
March 31/11
Section 000
HELICOPTER
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

000.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

000.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub-Section, Sub-Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page 000.00.00 5 March 31/11

6 March 31/11

Introduction 1 March 31/11 7 March 31/11

2 March 31/11 8 March 31/11

3 March 31/11 9 March 31/11

4 March 31/11 10 March 31/11

5 March 31/11 11 March 31/11

6 March 31/11 12 March 31/11

7/8 March 31/11 13 March 31/11

Record of 1 March 31/11 14 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11 15 March 31/11

16 March 31/11

List of 1/2 March 31/11 17 March 31/11

Effective 18 March 31/11

Pages 19 March 31/11

20 March 31/11

Table of 1/2 March 31/11

Contents

000.00.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11

3 March 31/11

4 March 31/11

000.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
HELICOPTER 000.00.00
General 1

Short Description 2

000.00.00
CONTENTS
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

HELICOPTER – GENERAL

1 GENERAL
Mi-171Sh military-transport helicopter employs a
single-rotor configuration with the tail rotor. Two
ТВЗ-117ВМ/ TVЗ-117VМ shaft-turbine engines installed on
the helicopter are equipped with the dust-protection
devices (ПЗУ/ PЗU).
The helicopter is equipped with the armament systems
and is intended for the delivering combat with the
armored equipments as “a tank” and “a boat”, for the
firing-post kill as ДОТ/DOT, ДЗОТ/DЗOT, for the kill
hostile in the cover positions, and for the
transportation of the landing forces in number of 34
persons (20 persons on the landing seats, 4 persons on
the seats arranged on the ramp and 10 persons in the
middle line of seats), for the transportation of
military cargo (up to 4 t.) both inside of the cargo
cabin and on the external load.
The armament system includes:
- uncontrolled missile munitions with the units Б8В20-
А/ B8V20-A;
- gun armament:
gun pods УПК-23-250/UPK-23-250 with the gun ГШ-23Л/
GSh-23L and with the allowance of ammunition, each pod
has 250 cartridges;
gun-firing control system ГШ-23Л/ GSh-23L;
collimating sight ПКВ/PKV;
pivot mount;
Helicopter provides opportunity of simultaneous and
individual firing from weapons of following types: ПК/
PK, РПК/ RPK machine guns, AKM/ AKM assault rifle, ПКТ/

000.00.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PKT Kalashnikov tank machine gun from following
positions:
- sliding door opening;
- left blister № 2;
- left blister № 5;
- right blister № 1;
- right blister № 2;
- right blister № 5;
- fuselage nose section;
- escape outlet opening of right cargo door.
collimating sight ПКВ/PKV;
screen-exhaust units ЭВУ/ EVU;
armour plates for protection of crew team and necessary
equipments of the helicopter;
ACO-2B chaff dispenser;
Л166В1А infra-red jammer.
2 SHORT DESCRIPTION
The helicopter employs a single-rotor configuration with
the tail rotor. It is manufactured in a transport
version. Two TB3-117BM/TV3-117BM shaft-turbine engines
installed on the helicopter are equipped with the dust-
protection devices.
The helicopter fuselage is an all-metal semi-monocoque of
a variable section. It consists of a nose and central
parts, a tail boom and a tail boom pylon with a
restrained aerodynamic control surface.
Crew cabin for two pilots and a flight engineer is
arranged in the nose part of the fuselage. The cabin is
equipped with the required instruments, electrical and
radio equipment and controls. The crew cabin has glass
panels made of convex stretched organic glass. Captains’

000.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
and co-pilots’ windshields are provided with electrical
heaters and windshield wipers. The inner sides of walls
and ceiling of the cabin are covered with heat-insulated
material. Made in the ceiling is an engine access hatch.
Cockpit door is located in the web of attachment frame
No. 5H.
Cargo compartment is arranged in the central part of the
fuselage and fitted with hinged and easily detachable
seats and mooring fittings installed on the cabin floor.
Made in the rear of the cargo compartment is a hatch
closed with the cargo door panels that make up the rear
outline of the fuselage. There is an opening with a slide
door, five windows made of organic glass and emergency
hatch at the fuselage port side. There are two emergency
hatches with released covers and three windows also made
of organic glass at the starboard. The sides and the
ceiling of the cargo compartment are fitted with easily
detachable heat-insulated soundproof panels. The ceiling
panel mounts the attachment fittings of the engines,
blower and shock mount on which the gear box is
installed. Arranged under the load-bearing slant panel is
a vessel of the service fuel tank. Loading of equipment
and cargo into the helicopter is performed through the
rear hatch over the ramps with the cargo doors locked in
the open position.
The tail boom is a semi-monologue of a truncated cone
shape. Inside the upper portion of the tail boom, along
frames there are reinforcements for the tail rotor drive
shaft of the transmission. To provide a desired stability
and controllability of the helicopter, a horizontal
stabilizer with variable the angle of setting, which is
selected on the ground, is installed on the tail boom.
The tail boom pylon is a riveted structure consisting of
a tail rotor pylon and a detachable fairing. The
detachable fairing makes a rear contour of the tail rotor

000.00.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
pylon and is an aerodynamic control surface improving the
flight stability of the helicopter.
Common cowling protects engines TB3-117BM, main gear-box,
blower, panel with hydraulic units and auxiliary power
unit (engine АИ-9В). The cowling design allows
maintenance of the engines, main gear- box and all the
accessories arranged in the upper part of the helicopter
in field conditions without using the maintenance stand.
The helicopter landing gear consists of a nose landing
gear, two main landing gear and tail bumper with gas-
liquid shock struts. The landing gear is non-retractable
in flight. It is used for cushioning the impact force
during landing, landing run and takeoff run, as well as
for allowing the helicopter to move on the ground. The
tail bumper is intended to protect the tail rotor against
striking the ground and for reducing the tail boom
overloads in landing with a large pitch-down angle.
Installed on each main landing gear is one wheel with
pneumatic shoe brakes. Installed on the nose landing gear
are two wheels without brake. The nose landing gear is
equipped with a levered castor suspension, which provides
better operating conditions for the shock strut when
taxiing on an uneven surface.
A five-blade main rotor installed on the helicopter
provides for creating the lift and thrust required for
flying. Besides, as the swash plate assembly acts on the
main rotor blades, the control of the helicopter with
respect to the longitudinal and lateral axes is effected.
The presence of hinged joints on the main rotor hub
allows the blades to accomplish flapping motion with
respect to the flapping hinges, oscillatory motion in the
plane of rotation with respect to the drag hinges and to
turn the blades in the feathering hinges. The hub is
provided with hydraulic dampers for cushioning the
oscillations of the blades with respect to the drag

000.00.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
hinges. To improve the blade motion stability and the
helicopter performance, the hub has a flapping
compensator, which provides variation in the blade angle
of setting on flapping. The blades are equipped with the
pneumatic spar failure warning system and anti-icing
device.
For damping the oscillations of the main rotor hub,
installed on the hub in the plane of rotation is a
vibration damper to reduce the helicopter level of
vibration.
For counteracting torque reaction of the main rotor and
for providing the flight stability and directional
control, use is made of a three-blade tail rotor with a
variable pitch. The tail rotor blades are equipped with
the anti-icing device.
The helicopter power plant consists of two TB3-117BM/TV3-
117VM shaft-turbine engines with free turbines which are
connected with one BP-14/VR-14 main gear box and operate
independently which makes it possible, if need be, to
carry out a flight with one operating engine. The engines
are installed on the ceiling of the central part of the
fuselage upstream of the main gear box and are arranged
symmetrically to the helicopter longitudinal axis.
Installed at the engine inlet are dust-proof devices
intended for cleaning the air coming into the engines of
dust and foreign objects in taxiing, taking off and
landing.
Engines TB3-117BM have an independent oil system
comprising oil tanks, oil coolers, oil pumps (on the
engines), pipelines, chip detectors and drain valves. The
oil pump of the engine supplies oil from the tank into
the lines of the internal oil system and transfers used
and heated oil over the pipelines to the air-oil coolers
to be coded and then to be supplied over the pipelines to
the oil tank.

000.00.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The airborne auxiliary power unit comprising AИ-9B/AI-9V
engine serves for:
on-board power supply of the air starting system of
engines TB3-117BM on the ground and in flight;
power supply of the helicopter electrical system with
the DC voltage in checking the equipment on the ground;
power supply of the helicopter electrical system with
the DC voltage in case of failure of main generators.
Engine АИ-9В is installed in the upper part of the
fuselage behind the panel with hydraulic units. It has an
independent lubricating, breathing and starting system,
as well as the control and monitoring system.
At the top, behind the engines ТВ3-117ВМ, between the
exhaust pipes a ventilation set with the drive from the
main gear box is installed. Air coming from the blower
flows through the oil coolers and a part of it gets into
the space of frame № 1К of the cowling, which is a
manifold, wherefrom it is piped to the main gear box
units calling for a forced cooling.
The fuel system of the helicopter is intended for the
accommodation of a required fuel load on the helicopter
board and for e continuous fuel supply of the main
engines, the engine of the auxiliary power unit and the
kerosene combustion heater at all power settings. The
fuel is arranged in three fuel tanks: two external rigid
tanks are arranged outside, on the fuselage sides and one
service flexible tank in the container downstream of the
main gear box. If need be to extend the range and
endurance of flight, an additional rigid tank can be
installed inside the fuselage. The fuel supply from the
external tanks into the service tank is performed by the
fuel pumps installed by one in each tank and from the
service tank to the engines, by the pump installed in the
service tank, to the kerosene combustion heater, by the

000.00.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
pump installed in the heater compartment, from the
additional tank into the external tanks - by gravity.
The helicopter transmission is intended for changing the
rotational speed and for transmission of the torque from
engines TB3-117BM to the main and tail rotors, blower of
the air cooling system and units installed on the main
gear box. The transmission includes main gear box BP-14,
intermediate and tail rotor gear boxes, transmission
shafts, braking system and transmission indicating
instruments.
The main gear box reduces the rotational speed and
transmits the torque from the engines to the main rotor
shaft, tail rotor shaft and ventilation set. Provided in
the structure of the main gear box are the freewheel
clutches disconnecting the engine free turbines from the
gear box as the main rotor goes autorotation or one of
the engines comes to a stop. Installed on the casing of
the gear box at the hatch providing access to the tail
rotor shaft is the main rotor brake. The presence of the
brake minimizes the main rotor rotation stopping time, as
well as provides locking of the transmission at parking.
The oil system of the main gear box is an independent
system. It consists of two air-oil coolers operating in
parallel and pipelines with fittings. In their design,
the coolers are similar to the engines coolers and are
assembled with them in two units mounted on the rear web
of frame No. 1K of the cowling. The gearbox pan serves as
a vessel for oil.
The intermediate gear box installed on the slant frame of
the tail boom pylon is intended for changing the
direction of the tail rotor shaft axis through 45° to
match the bend of the tail boom pylon and to transmit the
torque from the main gear box to the tail rotor gear box
without changing the rotational speed.

000.00.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The tail rotor gear box installed on the flange of the
tail boom pylon is intended for the transmission of
rotation from the intermediate gear box to the tractor
main rotor along with reducing the rotational speed. It
has a mechanism for changing the main rotor blade pitch,
which is connected with the foot control.
Employed in the intermediate and tail rotor gear boxes is
a splash method of lubrication. Installed in the oil
systems of the main, intermediate and tail rotor gear
boxes are magnetic plugs for detecting metal chips in
oil.
Control of the helicopter is effected by changing the
magnitude and direction of the main rotor thrust and
changing the magnitude of the tail rotor thrust. The
longitudinal and lateral control are performed by the
control stick which being deflected by the pilot changes
via the swash plate assembly the direction of the
resultant thrust of the main rotor. The directional
control is effected by the foot control pedals by
changing the tail rotor blade pitch and, hence, its
thrust.
For creating the required forces on the control stick and
pedals, as well as for releasing them in a steady flight
regime, feel spring mechanisms (trim actuators)
controlled by electromagnetic brakes with the use of
buttons on the helicopter control levers are connected
into the longitudinal-lateral and directional control
system.
Variation of the main rotor thrust is performed with the
help of the (ШАГ-ГАЗ) collective pitch and throttle
control lever by changing the collective pitch of the
main rotor and the engine power setting. Along with the
combined control provision is made on the helicopter for
a separate engine control, which makes it possible to

000.00.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
test each engine without changing the main rotor
collective pitch.
Installed in the helicopter control system are КАУ-
30Б/КАU-30B end РА-60Б /RA-60B (КАУ-115АМ/ KAU-115AM)
combination control hydraulic actuators operating
according to an irreversible pattern.
Installed in the longitudinal control linkage are two
balance weights to avoid low-frequency oscillations of
the helicopter and control linkage, as well as a
hydraulic stop to limit the tilt of the swash plate in
the longitudinal direction during helicopter taxiing to
avoid touching of the tail boom by the main rotor blades.
СПУУ-52/SPUU-52 Tail rotor maximum pitch limit system is
installed in the foot control for automatically limiting
the maximum setting angle of the tail rotor blades as the
ambient temperature and pressure characterizing the air
density require.
For improving reliability of hinged joints of the control
system employs double locking (in the actuation portion)
in the points subject to disassembly in operation.
The hydraulic system of the helicopter is designed for
supplying operational fluid АМГ-10/AMG-10 oil to
combination control hydraulic actuators КАУ-30Б/КАU-30B
end РА-60Б /RA-60B (КАУ-115АМ/ KAU-115AM), to the
hydraulic control cylinder of the friction clutch of the
collective pitch control lever and to the hydraulic
cylinder which controls the pitch stop in the helicopter
longitudinal control. The hydraulic system consists of
the main and auxiliary systems.
Employed in the hydraulic system is the principle of
duplication of the units and pipelines of the main
hydraulic system bу units and pipelines of the auxiliary
system but for the units changing over the combination
control hydraulic actuators to the helicopter control

000.00.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
from the autopilot, units engaging the fluid supply to
the (ШАГ-ГАЗ) collective pitch control lever friction
clutch hydraulic cylinder, as well as the hydraulic
cylinder which controls the pitch stop in the
longitudinal control - these units operate only from the
main hydraulic system of the helicopter. The auxiliary
system cut-in is performed automatically as the pressure
in the main hydraulic system drops.
Pumps НШ-39М/NSh-39M of the main and auxiliary systems
are installed on the main gear box drives which provides
the proper operation of the hydraulic system upon failure
of the engines and as the helicopter main rotor goes into
autorotation mode. The hydraulic tank divided into two
isolated spaces supplies the main and auxiliary systems
separately.
For checking the operation of the hydraulic system from
the ground hydraulic rig, installed at the fuselage port
side is an on-board panel with four disconnect valves for
the connection of hoses of the ground hydraulic rig. The
fluid is supplied into the main and auxiliary systems
through the common filler neck of the tank or is pumped
by the ground hydraulic rig through one of the suction
connections on the on-board panel.The fire extinguishing
equipment installed in the helicopter is intended for
detection, warning and suppressing fire in the
compartments of engines TB3-117BM, compartment of the
main gear box and fuel service tank, compartment of
engine АИ-9В and compartment of the kerosene heater. The
detection of fire and warning of the crew are ensured by
electrical fire detection and warning system ССП-ФК.
System ССП-ФК also provides the automatic cut-in of the
fire-fighting facilities of the compartment from which
the fire warning signal comes. The fire detection system
consisting of two bottles of УБШ/UBSh type provides the
storage of the fire-extinguishing agent and its
distribution between the compartments on fire in two

000.00.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
discharges. The actuation of the main discharge fire
extinguisher is performed automatically or manually
whereas of the alternate discharge fire extinguisher -
only manually by pressing the button. The hand fire
extinguishers are installed on helicopter: one - in the
flight compartment to the left from pilot in command and
the second one - on the cargo (passenger) compartment
(near entrance door) or on the right cargo door.
To provide flight safety under icing conditions, the
helicopter has an anti-icing system. The blades of the
main rotor and tail rotor, as well as the windshields of
the co-pilot and captain are equipped with electrical
thermal anti-icing devices. The engine air intakes have
anti-icing devices of air-thermal effect. The anti-icing
system of the dust protection device is a combined
system: air-thermal and electrical thermal ones.
The electric heating system is powered with 200 V 400 Hz.
The air heating system employs hot air taken from the
engines compressors.
For warning on the beginning of icing, installed in the
helicopter are CO-121BM/SO-121VM ice detector and visual
ice detector. The anti-icing systems of the rotor and
windows are switched on automatically from the signal
from ice detector CO-121BM or manually.
The helicopter pneumatic system is intended for braking
of the main landing gear wheels and charging the wheel
tires from the on-board bottles in the field conditions
with the help of a special appliance. The compressed air
at a pressure of 4000 to 5000+400 kPa (40 to 50+4 kgf/cm2)
is accommodated in two bottles of total capacity of 10
liters. The inner cavities of two main landing gear
struts are used as bottles. With the engines running, the
pneumatic system is charged from the air compressor
installed in the main gear box. At the parking area the

000.00.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
pneumatic system is charged through the external charging
valve from the ground source.
The helicopter is equipped with the heating and
ventilation system, which provides the supply of heated
and atmospheric air to the flight and cargo compartments,
air flow about the windshields and blisters of the flight
compartment, heating of the drain tank valve. The main
unit of the system is kerosene combustion heater KO-50.
The heater blower supplies a heated (or non-heated in the
blowing mode) air to the outlet distributor and then over
air conduits to the cargo compartment and to the flight
compartment. Besides, installed near the co-pilot and
captain are ДВ-302Т/DV-302T individual fans.
The helicopter is equipped with the hoisting-and-
conveying equipment, which provides carrying of people,
transportation of vehicles, various cargoes with landing
on an unprepared ground, as well as performing the
operations at hard-to-access regions. For carrying out
these operations, the following items are available:
hinged and easily detachable seats with seatbelts for
carrying passengers by air;
easily detachable on-board ЛПГ-150М/LPG-150M hoist
winch cargo system used for loading cargoes of up to
150 kg both on the ground and in hovering and for
picking up of rescued persons. The hoist boom is
swinging, it is installed in the brackets secured to
the ceiling and floor of the fuselage at the sliding
door. All the parts of the onboard boom, including the
electrical hoist with the control panel, are installed
on the uprights of the on-board boom. The hoist control
is an electrical remote control effected from the
buttons located on ПУЛ-300/PUL-300 control panel;
equipment for loading of non-self-propelled and self-
propelled vehicles includes БЛ-47М/BL-47M hoist
installed on the cargo compartment floor and a pulley

000.00.00
Page 12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
block for increasing the pulling power of the hoist.
Besides, applied in set 1:10 is the equipment for de-
springing of the carried vehicles;
equipment for loading cargoes on ПАВ-2,5/PAV-2,5
pallets, including the dolly and jacks. For taking in
the dolly with the load, БЛ-47М/BL-47M hoist is used.
Special cradles for transportation of five MR blades
are installed in the cargo compartment.
The external suspension system equipped with ДГ-65/DG-65
shackle is designed for carrying cargoes under the
fuselage on external sling, as well as for carrying out
the construction and mounting works.
Through the cartridge-actuated locking device and balance
device the suspension is attached with the help of four
slings to the attachment units on Frames No.7 and 10
inside the cargo compartment. With the help of this
external suspension system a quick disconnection of the
loads can be performed without releasing the extension
slings and calling for the ground maintenance personnel.
The suspension lifting capacity is 4000 kg.
Shackle ДГ-65 is controlled by the operator from the
remote control panel through the main and auxiliary
channels. In case of emergency, the whole suspension
system can be jettisoned from the cartridge-actuated
locking device or only the load can be released from
shackle ДГ-65. The operator is able to watch the load and
extension slings of the external load in flight through
the external sling door or through the opening of the
sliding door. For providing safe operation with the
external sling, an easily detachable guard is installed
on the floor of the cargo compartment around the external
sling door.
To pick up the rescued persons with the help of the on-
board hoist boom, the helicopter is equipped with a rope

000.00.00
Page 13
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ladder, 17,380 mm long, which is attached to the units in
the sliding door opening.
The electrical equipment available on the helicopter
provides for operation of the engine starting systems,
light equipment, anti-icing devices, fire-fighting
system, flight-and-navigation equipment, the engine,
control and transmission instruments, the controls of the
radio equipment and other consumers.
The electrical power system of the helicopter consists of
the primary and secondary systems, as well as the power
supply system from the external power source.
The primary electrical power system is three-phase AC
115/200-V 400-Hz system. The power sources of the system
are two AC generators ГT40ПЧ8В/GT40PCh8V. The generating
system comprises two circuits operating separately. The
rated power of the system is 80 kV.
The secondary electrical power system includes:
the single-phase AC 36 V 400 Hz system extracting power
from the AC single-phase 115 V 400 Hz primary system
via main or Tp115/36/Tr115/36 standby transformer;
the three-phase 36 V 400 Hz system deriving power from
the second circuit of the generating system through
main or ТС310С04Б standby transformer. Provided in the
system is the transformers power supply redundancy upon
failure of the second circuit by changing over to the
first circuit;
the 27-V DC system deriving power from the both
circuits of the generating system via two ВУ-6Б
rectifiers;
the standby sources including two 20НКБН-25/20NKBN-25
storage batteries, ПТС-800БМ/PTS-800ВM inverter,
supplying the AC single-phase 115-V 400-Hz voltage to
the equipment, and the starter-generator of АИ-9В/AI-9V
engine.

000.00.00
Page 14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
In normal operation, each circuit of the generating
system supplies power to its buses, the maximum load onto
which is distributed equally.
Upon failure of the first circuit of the generating
system, supplied are rectifiers No. 1 and No. 2, the
consumers of the AC single-phase 115-V 400-Hz voltage,
ТС310С04Б transformer, anti-icing systems of windows and
ПЗУ/PZU dust protection device.
Upon failure of the second circuit of the generating
system, the following units are supplied with power:
rectifiers No. 1 and No. 2, the consumers of the AC
single-phase 115-V 400-Hz voltage, transformer ТС310С04Б,
the anti-icing systems of windows and dust protection
device. The power supply backup of the anti-icing system,
of the main and tail rotors is carried out only with the
dust protection device removed.
Upon failure of the generating system as a whole, the
supply of the consumers required for completing the
flight and safe landing is performed from the standby
power sources. The duration of flight upon failure of the
primary electrical power system is 20 to 25 min, provided
the storage batteries operate along with the starter-
generator of АИ-9В engine running as a generator. In this
case, the equipment is supplied with alternating current
from ПТС-800БМ/PTS-800BM inverter.
On the ground the helicopter mains power supply with
three-phase AC of 115/200 V 400 Hz with both engines
inoperative is performed from ground power unit АПА-50M
via ШРАП-400-3Ф/ShRAP-400-3F external power connector. DC
+27V power supply is performed via ШРАП-500 K/ShRAP-500 K
external power connector.
ВФ0,4-150/VF0,4-150 AC voltmeter, two АФ1-150/AF-150 AC
ammeters, B-l/V-1 DC voltmeter and three A-l or A-3 DC
ammeters are installed on the helicopter for electrical

000.00.00
Page 15
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
power sources operation monitoring in current and
voltage.
Starting of АИ-9В/AI-9V engine is carried out from two
20НКБН-25/20NKBN-25 storage batteries.
The helicopter lighting equipment provides for flight
operation and ground maintenance of the helicopter both
in day and at night and incorporates:
lighting of the work places of the crew members, cargo
compartment, radio equipment compartment and tail boom;
inscription illumination system on the indicators,
systems control panels and inscriptions on the placards
arranged on the control panels consoles and instrument
panels;
helicopter light indication system CAC-4-9/SAS-4-9 for
monitoring the condition and operation of the
helicopter systems and units, except respective test
and measuring instruments;
external lighting.
External lighting consists of the following equipment:
БАНО-64/BANO-64 and XC-62/HS-62 navigation lights are
used for indicating the helicopter outline, for its
detection, for helicopter position and direction of
movement determination at night both as the helicopter
moves on the ground and in flight. БАНО-64/BANO-64
Navigation lights with green and red light filters are
installed on the port and starboard sides of the
fuselage nose section. XC-62/HS-62 Tail light, white in
color, is installed on the fairing of the tail boom
pylon;
three ФПП-7М/FPP-7M landing/search lights, two of which
are intended for lighting of the landing pad, as well
as the terrain for helicopter taxiing at night and in
low visibility conditions; they are installed in the

000.00.00
Page 16
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
fuselage nose under the cockpit floor. The third light
is intended for lighting of the hoist winch and
external sling work sites; it is installed outside in
the fuselage bottom, between Frames No. 2 and 3;
two MCЛ-3/MSL-3 flash beacons for indicating the
helicopter outline in night flight and in low
visibility conditions. One beacon is installed atop the
tail boom and the other, at the bottom of the fuselage
nose;
ОПС-57/OPS-57 formation lights for assisting the pilots
of the formation to make and maintain the formation at
night or in low visibility. Installed on the helicopter
are three formation lights on top of the tail boom;
the rotor blade tip lights for indicating the
boundaries of the plane swept by the main rotor in
night flights and in low visibility conditions. The
lights are arranged en the rotor blade tips;
ФР-100/FR-100 taxi light for an additional illumination
of the terrain during helicopter taxiing at night and
in low visibility conditions. The light is installed on
the external side of the fuselage on the left side on
the frame No 5 H;
The helicopter is equipped with a complete set of
instruments allowing monitoring of engines and systems
operation and piloting by day and at night. The
instrument indicators are arranged on the instrument
boards and consoles of the cockpit.
The flight-and-navigation system installed on the
helicopter incorporates the following groups of
instruments:
pressure instruments and temperature meters: two
altimeters BД-10ВK/VD-10VK, two IAS indicators УС-
450К/US450K, -two rate-of-climb indicators ВАР-

000.00.00
Page 17
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
30MK/VAR-30MK, IAS controller КЗСП/KZSP, outside air
temperature indicator TB-45/TV-45, pitot static system;
magnetic, gyroscopic and flight-and-navigation devices:
compass КИ-13/KI-13, two АГБ-96Д/AGB-96D gyro horizons,
АГБ-96Р/AGB-96R gyro horizon, БКК-18/BKK-18 attitude
monitor, СНП-1/SNP-1 power fail relay, ГМК-1ГЭ/GMK-1GE
compass system, ВК-53Э-РВ/VK-53E-RV erecting cut-out
switch.
An automatic stabilization of the helicopter in flight in
roll, yaw, pitch, altitude and airspeed is provided by
four-channel АП-34Б/AP-34B autopilot.
The autopilot is a device, which receives the information
about changes in helicopter attitude, pressure altitude
and indicated airspeed. It has four independent channels
acting on the respective controls:
the yaw/rudder channel - on the tail rotor pitch;
the roll channel - on the swash plate assembly in the
lateral direction;
the pitch channel - on the swash plate assembly in the
longitudinal direction;
the altitude channel - on the main rotor collective
pitch.
The heading signal is transmitted to the autopilot from
ГMK-1ГЭ/GMK-1GE compass system, the roll and pitch
signals - from АГБ-96Д/AGB-96D gyro horizon of the co-
pilot. The indicated airspeed variation signal is fed
from КЗСП/KZSP IAS controller to the pitch channel and
causes the appropriate variation in the helicopter pitch
angle.
For accumulation and recording the parameter information
in flight and for storing this information in case of an
accident, use is made of flight data recorder system БУP-
1-2/BUR-1-2.

000.00.00
Page 18
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The electronic equipment of the helicopter incorporates:
radio communication equipment;
helicopter piloting radio equipment;
IFF radio equipment.
The radio communication equipment provides:
two-way voice communication between the helicopter and
ground radio stations, as well as between aircraft in
the air with the help of VHF radio set and “ЯДРО-1Г1”/
“YADRO-1G1” SW radio set;
helicopter voice communication between the crew members
with the help of СПУ-7/SPU-7 interphone system;
voice report on the failures of the units and systems
on board to the captain and ground command post with
the help of “АЛМАЗ-УПM”/ “ALMAZ-UPM” voice message
equipment over VHF radio set ;
recording of voice messages arriving over the radio
communication lines and helicopter voice communication
lines with the help of П-503Б/P-503B tape recorder;
The helicopter piloting radio equipment is designed for:
piloting the helicopter with the help of homing and
broadcasting radio stations with their aural
indication;
homing the helicopter to the radio beacons of
continuous and pulse radiation with the purpose of
searching for the helicopters (aircraft), their crews
and other objects;
homing the helicopter to the area of landing airfield;
providing the execution of the intermediate approach by
the helicopter;
determining the flight navigation data;

000.00.00
Page 19
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
automatic and continuous measuring and indication of
the ground speed vector, drift angle, reckoning of the
helicopter transverse-pole coordinates;
detection of thunderstorms, heavy cumulus clouds, as
well аs for the navigational orientation by typical
radar reference points.
For solving these problems, included in the helicopter
piloting radio equipment are:
relative bearing determination radio equipment (APK-
15M/ARK-15M and АРК-УД/ARK-UD automatic direction
finders);
ground speed and drift angle meter (DISS-32-90A/ДИСС-
32-90А Doppler);
A-037 low-altitude radio altimeter;
8А813 on-board meteorological radar set.
For identifying, warning and active response, item 6201
is installed in the helicopter.
For supplying the crew members with oxygen in flight
and moving inside the helicopter in case of smoke or
fume, three oxygen equipment sets are arranged in the
flight compartment, each set incorporates БКП-2-2-210
oxygen supply unit, ДKM-1/DKM-1 smoke protection oxygen
mask and a bag for the oxygen mask.

000.00.00
Page 20
March 31/11
Section 005
TIME LIMITS
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

005.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

005.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub-Section, Sub-Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page

Record of 1 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11

List of 1/2 March 31/11

Effective
Pages

Table of 1/2 March 31/11

Contents

Introduction 1/2 March 31/11

005.00.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11
3 March 31/11
4 March 31/11
5 March 31/11
6 March 31/11

005.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
TIME LIMITS 005.00.00
General 1
Scheduled Maintenance Check 1
intervals
Mandatory information, provided 2
by operator and repair agencies

005.00.00
CONTENTS
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

Given in this section is the information on the

established service time, service life, intervals between
maintenance and overhaul of the helicopter, as a whole,
as well as on the service time and service life of the
main units, equipment and devices with service time and
service life different from those of the helicopter.

005.00.00
INTRODUCTION
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TIME LIMITS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
The service life and service time of helicopter,
engines, assemblies and components are specified in
their log-books and certificates (data sheets).
Table 1 contains reference service life and service
time for Mi-171Sh helicopter.

Table 1
Service life and service time Note
for Mi-171Sh helicopter
Assigned service life 7000
hours
Assigned service time 25
years
First overhaul period 1500
hours
First overhaul life 8 years For country with
temperate climate
7 years For country with
tropical climate
Time between overhauls 1500
hours
Repair-to-repair time 7 years For country with
temperate climate
6 years For country with
tropical climate
Note The data in the table are reference, for
the service life and service time of
helicopter please refer to the data,
specified in the helicopter log book.
2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECK INTERVALS
The maintenance works and their periods are specified
in “Maintenance Schedule” for the helicopter.

005.00.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 MANDATORY INFORMATION, PROVIDED BY OPERATOR AND REPAIR
AGENCIES 1
3.1 General provisions
3.1.1 During working out the specified time to first
overhaul and time between overhauls, the Operators
and repair agencies are obliged to inform JSC «Mil
Moscow Helicopter plant», as the holder of the type
certificate, and JSC «Ulan-Ude Aviation plant», as
the helicopter manufacturer, of accidents and
incidents, materials (acts, reports) on their
investigation, data of the faults detected on
aircraft, composition of the aircraft fleet and
helicopter operating hours. Providing the
abovementioned data is an obligatory condition for
working out and extension of the service life and
service time of the helicopter, its assemblies,
components, it is a condition of warranty
maintenance, engineering and technical support
during operation, increasing the reliability and
efficiency of the helicopter maintenance.
3.2 Information, provided immediately
3.2.1 Information of aviation accidents and incidents,
failures on helicopter, which effect or may effect
its airworthiness, should be reported to JSC «Mil
Moscow Helicopter plant» or to JSC «Ulan-Ude
Aviation plant» within one day after the fault,
damage or defect were detected, by means of any
available means of operational communication, such
as telegraph, facsimile telegraph, e-mail:

1
The Operators and repair agencies, in terms of the given
subsection, are any enterprises and companies, actually operating
the helicopter, eliminating the faults on aircraft, irrespective
to the helicopter belonging and registration.

005.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

JSC «Mil Moscow Helicopter JSC «Ulan-Ude Aviation

plant» plant»
Mailing address: Mailing address:
Russia, 107113, Moscow, Russia, 670009, Ulan-Ude,
Sokolnicheskyi Val street, Khorinskaya street,
building 2А building 1
Operational communication Operational communication
channels: channels:
fax: +7 (495) 264 55 71 fax: +7 (3012) 25 21 47
E-mail: E-mail: uuaz@uuaz.ru
mvz@mi-helicopter.ru
teletype: 112247 ЮБИЛЯР
(YUBILYAR)
(within Russia and CIS)
3.2.2 The urgent reports of the aviation accidents and
incidents should contain mandatory information,
specified in the effective regulations of the
country where the event took place, or the
helicopter registry country, and Appendix 13
«Investigation of aviation accidents and incidents»
to Convention on International Civil Aviation.
3.2.3 The urgent reports of the faults on helicopter,
which effect or may effect its airworthiness,
should contain the following mandatory information:
date of the event, type (designation), the
helicopter serial and registration numbers; name,
designation and the serial number of the faulty
engine, assembly or equipment; description of the
fault symptoms and form, its assignable or
suspected cause, date of the Operator and area of
helicopter operation (stationing). The
abovementioned kinds of faults should obligatorily
include:

005.00.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
a)faults and damages, causing inflammation or fire;
b)faults and damages, causing nuisance activation
of fire protection system;
c)faults and damages of the engine exhaust unit,
causing the damage of engine, structure and
systems of helicopter;
d)faults and damages, causing toxic or harmful
gases (gaseous emissions) penetration into the
cockpit;
e)faults and damages of the helicopter control
system units;
f)faults and damages of main and tail rotors, swash
plate;
g)faults and damages, causing leakage of flammable
liquids or their vapors, in the areas where there
inflammation is possible;
h)faults and damages of fuel system, causing fuel
interruption or dangerous leakage of fuel in
flight;
i)damages and defects of airframe primary
structural members: cracks, corrosion,
deformations, corruption, accidental damage,
exceeding the tolerable values;
j)faults and damages, causing the excessive
vibration or impacts on the helicopter structure;
k)faults and damages of the engines, including in-
flight shutdown due to surging, foreign objects
or ice getting into the engine, or due to other
external impact;
l)faults or damages of helicopter transmission;

005.00.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
m)faults in flight, effecting the helicopter
stability and controllability, piloting quality,
causing the necessity to deviate from the flight
trajectory or route;
n)in-flight failure of more than one current
generation channels within the electric power
supply system;
o)in-flight failure of more than one hydraulic
systems;
p)in-flight failure of more than one attitude
indicator, airspeed indicator, pressure altimeter
(absence or unreliable indications of roll,
pitch, indicated airspeed, pressure altitude
parameters in two sensing passages).

3.3 Information, provided quarterly

3.3.1 «Fault record sheets» made in accordance with
subsection 020.90.00 of the present Maintenance
Manual should be provided to SC «Mil Moscow
Helicopter plant» and JSC «Ulan-Ude Aviation plant»
(see the mailing addresses in item 3.2.1) for all
detected faults on the helicopter (failures,
damages, defects). In case of helicopter
maintenance by a third party, it becomes full-scale
liable for filling in the Fault record sheets, as a
mandatory maintenance requirement. At that the
third party, carrying out the maintenance
inconstantly (doing just some range of work),
should provide the helicopter Operator with the
Fault record sheets immediately after completion of
the mentioned range of works.

005.00.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.3.2 The data of the helicopter operating time for each
helicopter at the Operators' base or at the repair
agencies should be provided to JSC «Mil Moscow
Helicopter plant» and JSC «Ulan-Ude Aviation plant»
(see the mailing addresses in item 3.2.1) in the
form, specified in section 020.90.00 of the present
Maintenance Manual.

005.00.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Section 006
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

006.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

006.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub-Section, Sub-Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page

Record of 1 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11

List of 1/2 March 31/11

Effective
Pages

Table of 1/2 March 31/11

Contents

Introduction 1/2 March 31/11

006.00.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11

3 March 31/11

4 March 31/11

5/6 March 31/11

006.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 006.00.00
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 1

006.00.00
CONTENTS
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

The present Section contains the information on

dimensions, areas and arrangement of the helicopter main
structural members.

006.00.00
INTRODUCTION
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DIMENSIONS AND AREAS – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Length of Helicopter:
without main and tail rotors (with 18.990 m
modified “dolphin” nose)
without main and tail rotors (without 18.407 m
weather radar)
without main and tail rotors (equipped 18.654 m
with weather radar)
with rotating main and tail rotors 25.352 m
Height of helicopter:
without main rotor at G r 4.756 m
with rotating tail rotor at G r 5.521 m
Distance from ground to fuselage 0.445 m
lowermost point (clearance)
Horizontal tail area 2.0 m2
Stabilizer setting angle with respect to -3°
tail boom
Dimensions of cargo compartment:
length (of floor) 5.34 m
maximum width 2.340 m
height 1.8 m
Main rotor:
diameter 21.3 m
number of blades 5

006.00.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Direction of rotation Counterclockw

ise (if
looking from
below)
Main rotor disc area 356.1 m2
Propeller solidity ratio 0.0777
Main rotor blade droop angle:
+10'
with respect to lower stop 4 − 20'

with respect to centrifugal stop 1°40 +20'

Maximum possible flapping angle 25°±30'
Blade deflection angle in plane of main
rotor rotation (counted off direction
perpendicular to flapping hinge):
forward 13º ±15'
backward 11° ±10'
Main rotor axis forward tilting angle 4º 30' -10'
Minimum distance between blade tip and 0.5 m, min.
tail boom (at parking)
Tail rotor:
type gimbal
diameter 3.908 m
direction of rotation forward blade
moves upward
number of blades 3
Blade setting angle (at r = 0.7):
+110 '
minimum (left pedal at stop) -( 6  −50' )
+30 '
maximum-(right pedal at stop) 23 −15'

006.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Landing gear type tricycle non-

retractable
Main landing gear track at G r 4.510 m
Wheelbase at G r 4.281 m
Landing gear wheel dimensions:
nose landing gear 595×185 mm
main landing gear 865×280 mm
Static ground angle (datum line forward 4°35'
upward) at G r
Tail landing gear shock-
absorbing
The main overall dimensions of the helicopter are given
in Fig.1 and Fig.2.

006.00.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Helicopter Main Overall Dimensions

(with cargo leafs)
Figure 1

006.00.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Helicopter Main Overall Dimensions

(with ramp and modified “dolphin” nose)
Figure 2

006.00.00
Pages 5/6
March 31/11
 Section 007
LIFTING AND SHORING
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

007.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

007.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub-Section, Sub-Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page

Record of 1 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11

List of 1/2 March 31/11

Effective
Pages

Table of 1/2 March 31/11

Contents

Introduction 1/2 March 31/11

007.00.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11
3/4 March 31/11

007.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
INSTALLATION ON JACKS 007.00.00
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 1
General 1
Helicopter Lifting on Hydraulic 1
Jacks
Helicopter Lowering 2

007.00.00
CONTENTS
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

Given in the Section is the information on lifting and

lowering the helicopter with the help of jacks.

007.00.00
INTRODUCTION
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INSTALLATION ON JACKS -DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
1.1 Lifting the helicopter with the help of the jacks is
carried out:
in disassembly and assembly of the helicopter;
during removal and installation of the landing gear
shock struts;
in the course of helicopter leveling;
in the course of scheduled maintenance operations on
the landing gear.
1.2 Carry out the installation of the helicopter on jacks
on a special platform with a hard surface and off the
airfield, place plates or boards under the hydraulic
jacks.
CAUTION IN LIFTING THE HELICOPTER, NEVER USE NON-
STANDARD HYDRAULIC JACKS OH FAULTY HYDRAULIC
JACKS. LIFTING THE HELICOPTER AT THE WIND
VELOCITY OF MORE THAN 10 m/s IS PROHIBITED.

2 HELICOPTER LIFTING ON HYDRAULIC JACKS

2.1 Remove the slip covers off the hydraulic jacks and
briny them under the special seats, on Frames Nos 1
and 13, drive out the set screws down as far as they
will go, lower the hydraulic jacks on the jacking
pads.
ATTENTION! IN CASE OF SOFT SOIL, PLACE PLATES OR BOARDS
UNDER THE JACKING PADS.

2.2 Adjust the hydraulic jacks with reference to the

level using the adjusting screws.
2.3 Close the shutoff valves on the hydraulic jacks.

007.00.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.4 Lift the helicopter on the hydraulic jacks, for this
purpose:
operate the pump handle to bring the spherical head
of the set screw to the fuselage unit at a distance
some 50 to 80 mm off the seat;
stop operating the pump handle, drive out the set
screw by hand until the spherical head of the screw
bears into the seat of the unit on the fuselage;
bring the set screws of other three .hydraulic jacks
to the units on the fuselage in a similar manner;
operate the pumps handles on all four hydraulic jacks
to begin a uniform lifting of the helicopter so that
all the wheels come clear of the ground
simultaneously;
every 50 to 80 mm of lifting, screw out the locknuts
down as far as they will go;
stop lifting the helicopter when the distance between
the wheels and the ground becomes 60 to 70 mm;
lift the helicopter to a desired height, lower the
locknuts on the hydraulic jack rams as far as they
will go.
3 HELICOPTER LOWERING
3.1 Lift the locknuts of the hydraulic jacks rams upwards
as far as they will go.
3.2 Simultaneously open the valves on all four hydraulic
jacks and lower the helicopter.
ATTENTION! LOWER THE HELICOPTER SMOOTHLY AND UNIFORMLY ON
ALL FOUR HYDRAULIC JACKS.

3.3 On each hydraulic jack use two pins to connect the

bushing and locknut and while rotating it, lower the
ram to a height providing the removal of the
hydraulic jack from under the helicopter.

007.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.4 Fully lower the rams by hand.
3.5 Bring the hydraulic jacks from under the helicopter.

Installation of the helicopter on jacks

Fig. 1

007.00.00
Page 3/4
March 31/11
 Section 008
LEVELING AND WEIGHING
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

008.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

008.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page 008.10.00 12 March 31/11
13/14 March 31/11
Record of 1 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11 008.20.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11
List of 1/2 March 31/11 3 March 31/11
Effective 4 March 31/11
Pages 5/6 March 31/11

Table of 1/2 March 31/11

Contents

Introduction 1/2 March 31/11

008.00.00 1/2 March 31/11

008.10.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11
3 March 31/11
4 March 31/11
5/6 March 31/11
7/8 March 31/11
9 March 31/11
10 March 31/11

11 March 31/11

008.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
LEVELING AND WEIGHTING 008.00.00
General 1/2
HELICOPTER LEVELING - DESCRIPTION AND 008.10.00
OPERATION
General 1
Description and Operation 1
Installation of Helicopter on 1
Hydraulic Jacks
Leveling of Separate Parts of 2
Helicopter and Checking Them for
Correct Installation
WEIGHTING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 008.20.00
General 1
Description and Operation 1

Tools and Appliances Used for 1

Weighting
Preparation of Helicopter for 1
Weighting
Determination of Helicopter Mass 3
by Weighting

008.00.00
CONTENTS
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

The present Section contains the information on leveling

the helicopter in the course of operation and overhaul,
it also comprises the instructions on preparation of the
helicopter for weighing.

008.00.00
INTRODUCTION
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LEVELING AND WEIGHING

GENERAL
The leveling of the helicopter in the course of operation
is carried out after rough landings which result in
residual deformation of separate structural members.
The weighing of the helicopter is performed with the
purpose of determining actual mass when it is empty or
loaded to different extents.

008.00.00
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LEVELING OF HELICOPTER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
1.1 The leveling aims at determining the possibility of
further operation or the necessity of repair of the
helicopter airframe.
1.2 In leveling, the following helicopter structural
members can be checked:
attachment of the tail boom to the pylon and to the
fuselage central section;
installation of the main and tail rotor gear boxes;
installation of the tail rotor drive shaft with
supports ;
installation of the stabilizer;
installation of the landing gear;
installation of platforms for instruments.
1.3 Figure 1 shows the leveling diagram of the
helicopter. The linear dimensions are given in
millimeters, the deflection angles in degrees with
the appropriate tolerances which will be checked in
the test levelings.
1.4 The leveling and check of leveling data of the
helicopter are carried out with the use of the
leveling diagram and data specified in the drawings
on the installation and adjustment of separate units
and parts, as well as by the actual measurements
which are put down in the table of the leveling
diagram obtained in the first Manufacturer's
leveling. The table is applied to the helicopter
technical documentation.
2 DESCRIPTIONS AND OPERATION
2.1 Installation of Helicopter on Hydraulic Jacks

008.10.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.1.1 Carry out the leveling of the helicopter in a
hangar or in a closed room. In extra cases, the
leveling can be performed in the field conditions
in still air or at the wind velocity of no higher
than 5 m/s (directed along the helicopter center
line), on a smooth ground with hard soil. If the
soil is soft, place plates or boards under the
hydraulic jacks.
2.1.2 The helicopter is leveled without the main rotor
blades, without fuel, oil, crew members and loads.
2.1.3 For leveling, install the helicopter on four
hydraulic jacks (Ref. 007.00.00).
2.1.4 Carry out the lifting of the helicopter until the
wheels clear off the ground uniformly on all four
jacks.
2.2 Leveling of Separate Parts of Helicopter and Checking
Them for Correct Installation
2.2.1 For leveling of the nose section of the fuselage,
position the helicopter horizontally with respect
to four reference points arranged, on the bides of
the fuselage central section along the datum line.
The reierencs points are made as round head rivets.
Made in the heads are depressions encircled with
reu paint. Front reference points 5 and 7 are
arranged at Frame No. 1, whereas rear points 10 and
11, at Frame No. 13. These points are the datum
points. Count off the reference points against
special datum leveling bar which in its upper part
has a metal rod with taper pins and in its lower
part, a dividing measuring rule.
Place the pin pointer into the depression of one of
the reference points, make it assume a vertical
position against a plumb line secured thereto.

008.10.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Use a level installed at the side of the helicopter
some 5 or 6 m away from the 0, 11 is in plain view
and the divisions on the measuring reel applied
with its zero to points 25 and 27. reference point
and read the rule. Position the level so that the
rule applied to reference points 5, 7, 10, 11.
Arrangement of plumb lines is shown in Fig. 2, the
positions of the level and helicopter are shown in
Fig. 3.
Use the jacks to position the helicopter so that
the marks on the rule applied to reference points
5, 7, 10, 11 lie in level. A departure of one of
the four point's by +2 mm is tolerated.
Besides, the helicopter can be positioned
horizontally in another -way without the level,
special rule and reference points on board of the
fuselage. For this purpose, install a plumb line in
the opening of the sliding door some 40 mm to the
left if looking forward of frame No. 2.
Use the jacks to position the helicopter so that
the plumb line pointer comes in alignment with the
center of the reference line on the floor of the
cargo compartment. This method is used in the field
conditions.
For checking a correct mating of the fuselage
sections, stretch a string under the fuselage
between the trestles installed in front and in the
rear of the helicopter. The plumb lines lowered
from reference points 8, 9, 13 should get onto the
string (a departure of +2 mm, maximum, of the
pointer of the plumb line lowered from reference
point 9 is tolerated).
A correct mating of the tail boom and the tail boom
pylon along the helicopter center line will be

008.10.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
checked with the help of the plumb line lowered
from point 26 arranged on the tail boom pylon some
85 nm from Frame No. 9. Determine the displacement
to the right or left with respect to the string
used as a helicopter center line. The tolerable
departure lies within the limits of +30 mm.
Determine the departure of the tail boom and the
tail boom pylon in height (reference points 25 and
27) with the help of the level and measuring reel.
For this purpose, apply the zero of the measuring
reel to shell go down to keep the tape in the
vertical position so that the shell is clear of the
ground. Align the level tube with the reel division
and read the obtained size. Subtract the reference
size from the obtained size.

008.10.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Helicopter Leveling Diagram (with cargo leafs)

Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

008.10.00
Pages 5/6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Helicopter Leveling Diagram (with ramp and dolphin nose)

Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

008.10.00
Pages 7/8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Arrangement of Plumb Lines for Helicopter Leveling

Figure 2

Arrangement of Helicopter and Level in Leveling

Figure 3

008.10.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The difference
+20
should lie within the limits of
1
(1217 −35 ) mm, the reference size is the size read
off the level rule obtained upon the installation
of the helicopter in the horizontal plane with the
use of points 5, 7, 10, 11.
NOTE: In the course of operation, it is allowed to
shorten the height of reference points Nos 24 and
25 above the fuselage datum lines by 20 mm as
compared to-the size obtained during assembly of
the helicopter and put down in the leveling
diagram applied to the Log Book; in this case,
the height of reference points Nos 24 and 25
above the datum line should not be less than 1165
mm provided the irregularities of the
transmission drive shaft lie within the rated
limits.
After finding the size of point 25, find the size
of point 27. For this purpose, remove the cover on
the tail rotor gear, box at the sprocket. A
hexahedral nut is located on the axle of the gear
box shaft. Draw two lines (Ref. Fig. 1) on this nut
to find the center of the shaft of the tail rotor
gear box. Apply the reel zero to the point, allow
the reel shell drop to position the tape
vertically. Read the level. Subtract the size of
point 25 and the reference size from the obtained
size. The obtained difference should lie within the
+3
limits of (156 6 −12 ) mm.
Check the correct installation of the stabilizer
with the help of the measuring reel. Measure the
distance between reference point 12 on the central
section of the fuselage and points 20 and 21 on the
stabilizer tips. The difference in the values of
the right and left measurements within the limits
of ±20 mm is tolerated.

008.10.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The position of the main landing gear legs with
respect to the center line is (2022±13) mm
determined from the center of the fastening bolt of
the shock strut of the main landing gear leg (for
the starboard and port side main landing gear
legs). For measurement, also use the metal
measuring reel and plumb line.
Determine the position of the main landing gear
legs with respect to the datum line as the
difference in right and left measurements from the
center of the fastening bolt of the shock strut of
the main landing gear leg (of the starboard and
port side main landing gear legs). The difference
in the sizes falling in the limits of ±20 mm is
tolerated. The position of the main landing gear
legs with respect to reference point 8 is
determined as values of right and left measurements
from the point to the center of the fastening bolt
of the shock strut (starboard and port side). The
size tolerable limits are ±20 mm.
2.2.2 The transmission units are leveled in the following
way. Check the installation of the main gear box
against the position of the main rotor shaft.
Install the quadrant KO-1 or KO-60 on the end face
of the main rotor shaft. Check the shaft position
in the longitudinal and lateral directions. The
shaft axle should tilt forward by 4°30' -10' . In the
lateral direction the angle should equal 0°±5'.
Check the installation of the rail rotor each box
(horizontal position of its axle) using a
protractor applied to the flange of the tail rotor
attachment shaft (with the tail rotor removed). The
angle should equal ( 0+−15 )°.
For checking the axial alignment of the engine and
the gear box, using feeler No. 4, measure the

008.10.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
clearance between the sphere cover and the casing
of the main gear box in four diametrically opposite
points with the help of the feeler gauge. The
difference in sizes should not exceed 0.15 mm.
2.2.3 Installation of the RF unit of ДИСС-32-90А (ДИСС-
32-90АЭ) equipment. For checking the position of
the RF unit in direction, on helicopters equipped
with ДИСС-32-90А (ДИСС-32-90АЭ), drop the plumb
line from first leveling point 18 installed on the
nacelle to the drawn longitudinal axis of symmetry
and measure the deflection by the rule. Drop the
plumb line from rear l eveling point 19 onto the
longitudinal axis of symmetry and measure the
deflection. Subtract the smaller value from the
larger one. Measure the distance between the two
plumb lines. Calculate the angle, knowing the two
sides of the rectangle. Allowed deflection in
direction is ± 10 '.
For checking the deflection in pitch and roll,
install the protractor on the lower plane of the
nacelle in the longitudinal and lateral directions.
The tolerated deflections in pitch and roll are
+20'. For obtaining the values, it is allowed to
install 3-mm thick washers under the bosses of the
RF unit.
The actual measured sizes will be compared with the
sizes specified in the table of the leveling
diagram, which is attached to the technical
publications for the helicopter.
2.2.4 Installation of instruments is carried out as
follows. The requirements for the installation of
platforms for instruments are discussed in the
leveling diagram applied to the helicopter Log
Book.

008.10.00
Page 12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The actual measured sizes will be compared with the

sizes specified in the table of the leveling
diagram which is applied to the helicopter
technical documentation.
2.2.5 Temporary/production leveling points № 1, 2, 3, 4,
6, 14, 15, 16, 17, 22 and 23. These points are not
used for reference during leveling.
2.2.6 To check parallel horizontal position of PVD-6M
pitot static tubes install the protractor on top of
them and measure the angle. Allowed deflection is
±20. To check PVD-6M pitot static tubes position in
relation to helicopter symmetry plane, drop the
plumb lines from front and rear parts of the pitot
static tube (project pitot static tube axis on
horizontal plane). Measure the distance from the
axial line to the front and rear plumb lines.
Difference between the distances from the axial
line must not exceed 2 mm, when distance between
the plumb lines on one pitot static tube is 60 mm
(allowed deflection is ±20).

008.10.00
Pages 13/14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WEIGHING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
For obtaining accurate results of weighing and observing
the safety precautions while doing it, carry out acareful
preparation for weighing which incorporates:
preparation of appliances and tools required for
weighing;
preparation of the helicopter for weighing;
filling in the documentation as to the results of
weighing.
2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
2.1 Tools and Appliances Used for Weighing
For weighing the helicopter, prepare the following
tools and fixtures:
the platform balance (of a beam or other type) with
maximum load-carrying capacity of 5 tons with
measurement error of ±0.1 % of load weight to be
installed under each strut of the helicopter.
Overloading of the balance with the helicopter in the
set of weighing installed on it is not tolerated.
NOTES: 1 The balance should have the certificate with
the note on serviceability for operation.
2 In storage and operation, observe the
recommendations (instructions) applied to it.
hydraulic jacks;
chocks for the wheels of the helicopter struts to
prevent it from rolling off the balance platform.
2.2 Preparation of Helicopter for Weighing
2.2.1 In the course of operations connected with weighing
of the helicopter, observe the safety precautions.

008.20.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.2.2 Carry out the weighing of the helicopter in a
closed room since in case of weighing in an
unclosed room the wind can have an effect on the
helicopter and introduce an error in the
determination of its mass.
The floor of the room should have a horizontal
smooth surface.
2.2.3 In weighing the helicopter, remove the objects
alien to its set. Carry out the weighing when the
helicopter is empty or loaded to suit a certain
set.
2.2.4 Put down the list of differences in the helicopter
sets on the balance with respect to the desired set
in the record of weighing and state down extra or
missing pieces of equipment or units on the
helicopter.
2.2.5 Install the balance for weighing the helicopter.
The balance installation diagram is shown in Fig.
1.
2.2.6 Before weighing, check on the helicopter:
that the fuel and oil are fully drained iron the
vessels of the engines and gearboxes systems. Carry
out draining through all the draining valves and
plugs available on the helicopter in level
attitude;
that the hydraulic and air systems, storage
batteries and bottles of the fire-extinguishing
systems are adequately filled;
that the blanking covers are removed from the
inlets and outlets of the engines and fan, that the
slip covers are removed as well;
that the balance is correctly installed with
respect to the level, that the balance scales are
set to zero and are serviceable (to be checked by

008.20.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
weighing a load). If all the balances used for
weighing one and the same load read one and the
same mass, they are fit for weighing.
2.2.7 Lift the helicopter on the hydraulic jacks.
2.2.8 Bring the balance platforms under the landing gear
wheels.
2.2.9 Lower the helicopter on the balance platforms.
2.2.10 Install the chocks under the landing gear wheels
to prevent the helicopter from rolling down from
the balance.
2.3 Determination of Helicopter Mass by Weighing
2.3.1 Weigh the helicopter in compliance with the
weighing statement.
2.3.2 Unlock the balance platforms.
NOTE: Before reading the balance scale, check the
balance for freedom from seizing (after
balancing, on moving a balance weight through one
minimum scale division, the balance rocker should
go out of balance).
2.3.3 Determine the balance readings under the nose and
tail landing gear wheels leaving the minimum
required number of supports and chocks on the
balance. Put down the readings of all the balances
into the statement table. The supports and chocks
left on the balance in weighing should be
separately weighed and their masses put down in the
statement.
2.3.4 Determine the helicopter mass as a whole obtained
as a result of weighing and put it down in the
statement.
2.3.5 Calculate the helicopter mass in the required set
and put it down in the statement which is to be
filled in and signed by persons responsible for
weighing.

008.20.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

I Balance
II Helicopter Center Line

X Distance Between Axles of Rear Landing

Gear Wheels (Track)
Y Distance Between Axles of Nose and tail
Landing Gear Wheels (Wheelbase)

Balance Installation Diagram

Figure 1

008.20.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

BLANK OF WEIGHT STATEMENT

Fraction
Mass of of mass Mass of
Point of
Balance gaskets w/o helicopter as
installation Reaction
readings on gaskets a. whole on
of balance
balance en balance
balance
Nose wheels
Tail stbd
whee
ls port
Helicopter mass
Dwg No. Mass Remarks
calculation
Balance-mounted
helicopter mass
Extra removed:

Missing added

Altogether, helicopter mass in a set

Persons responsible for weighing:

Post Name, surname, christian name Signature

008.20.00
Pages 5/6
March 31/11
 Section 009
TOWING AND TAXIING
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

009.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

009.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub-Section, Sub-Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page

Record of 1 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11

List of 1/2 March 31/11

Effective
Pages

Table of 1/2 March 31/11

Contents

009.00.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11

3 March 31/11

4 March 31/11

5 March 31/11

6 March 31/11

009.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
TOWING AND TAXING 009.00.00
Description and Operation 1
General 1
Safety Precautions Exercised in 1
Towing
Towing of Helicopter along 2
Concrete Track, Asphalt and Hard
Soil by Nose Landing Gear with
Help of Rigid Tow Bar
Towing of Helicopter Over 4
Slippery Soil Main Landing Gear
with Help of Cables

009.00.00
CONTENTS
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TOWING AND TAXING – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
1.1 Towing of the helicopter is carried out by a motor
vehicle (a tractor) with the help of a towing device.
The set of the device includes a towing bar and a
towing cable.
1.2 With the help of the tow bar (Ref. Fig. 1) the
helicopter can be towed to the airfield along the
highways and earthen roads. Under severe conditions
(sticky soil or pulling the helicopter onto a smooth
area) the helicopter is towed by the tail forward
with the help of the towing cable (Ref. Fig. 2) to
avoid damage to the nose landing gear.
2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS EXERCISED IN TOWING
2.1 Before towing the helicopter about the airfield, make
sure that the main rotor is locked so that none of
the blades is above the tail boom or stabilizer, the
main rotor blades are unmoored and the mooring slings
are removed, that the towing devices are in good
repair.
2.2 Carry out towing of the helicopter to large distances
outside the airfield with the blades of the main and
tail rotors removed. In this case, transport the main
rotor blades on the motor vehicle on special cradles.
It is allowed to transport the tail rotor blades and
other loads in the cargo compartment of the
helicopter.
2.3 Carry out towing of the helicopter under the
supervision of the pilot or helicopter technician who
must stay in the compartment of the towed helicopter.
2.4 It is strictly prohibited to stay right at the cable
device, as well as to step onto the tow bar in

009.00.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the course of movement as the helicopter is being
towed.
2.5 Carry out moving the helicopter off from rest
smoothly, without jerks.
3 TOWING HELICOPTER ALONG CONCRETE TRACK, ASPHALT AND
HARD SOIL BY HOSE LANDING GEAR WITH HELP OF RIGID TOW BAR
ATTENTION! The running gear (17) should be positioned so
as to prevent the free end of the tow bar
from touching the ground or tarmac when the
other end is attached to the helicopter.

3.1 Carry out towing of the helicopter along the concrete

or asphalt road at the speed of not higher than 8
km/h, over hard soil roads, of not higher than 5
km/h.
3.2 The helicopter angle of turn (the angle between the
helicopter longitudinal axis and the motor vehicle
axis) should not be more than 60° in towing with the
rigid tow bar along the concrete or asphalt road and
30° in towing along the hard soil roads (Ref. Fig.
1).
Sreering torque М T = 4kN · M.
Allowable towing force Рт = 40kN
3.3 At steep turns, the towing speed should not be more
than 4 km/h.
3.4 To avoid damage to the locks of the nose landing
gear, do not turn the helicopter if the value of
compression of the lever shock strut of the nose
landing gear is less than 40 mm (against the
indicator), with the normal pressure in the wheel
tyre.

009.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Eye bar 11 Hexagon bolt

2 Bolt 12 Clamp
3 Link 13 Test bolts
4 Towbar link 14 Bolt
5 Nut 15 Test shaft
6 Ring 16 Holder
7 Damping rings 17 Running gear
8 Ring 18 End piece
9 Nut 19 Yoke
10 Test bolt 20 Lock pin

Helicopter towing by tow bar

Fig. 1

009.00.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.5 Before towing the helicopter, check to see that the

tow bar is correctly attached to the helicopter (the
tow bar should be attached to the horn of the
swinging bracket of the nose landing gear) and to the
motor vehicle, as well as that the pin securing the
tow bar to the nose landing gear is locked with the
locking pin. Be sure to lock the tow hook of the
motor vehicle as well.
3.6 If, in towing the helicopter by the tow bar, bolt (2)
(Ref. Fig. 1) securing the eye bar with the tube gets
sheared off (which occurs at the end load of
(4500±200) kg) or test bolt (10) securing the towbar
end piece to the yoke (which occurs at the load of
(11700±1000 kg)), discontinue towing and find the
cause of bolt shear off.
In clearing up the cause, check the nose and main
landing gear. After finding the cause, replace the
broken bolts with the spare ones secured to the tow
bar tube and continue towing.
Before installing the safety bolt (2) and the test
bolt (10) , coat the surfaces of the hole walls and
of bolts with grease ЦИАТИМ-201.
4 TOWING OF HELICOPTER OVER SLIPPERY SOIL BY MAIN LANDING
GEAR WITH HELP OF GABLES
4.1 The helicopter is towed over a slippery soil or is
pulled out onto a even area by the main landing gear
with the help of the cables (Ref. Fig. 2). In the
course of towing of the helicopter by the cables, use
the rigid tow bar as a guide lever for maintaining a
required direction.
ATTENTION! IN TOWING THE HELICOPTER BY THE CABLES,
EXERCISE THE ESTABLISHED SAFETY PRECAUTION
WHICH ALLOW TO AVOID THE POSSIBILITY OF
COLLISION OF THE HELICOPTER WITH THE TOWING

009.00.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VEHICLE.

4.2 Carry out the attachment of the towing cable using

the following procedure:
bring the cables to the main landing gear on the side
of the tail boom;
secure the cables to the half-axles of the main
landing gear with the pins;
stretch apart the cables and slip the ring over the
hook of the towing tractor;
check the correct attachment of the towing cable to
the helicopter and to the towing tractor, after that
carry out towing.
4.3 Carry out helicopter towing by the main landing gear
at a speed of no more than 3 km/h. The helicopter
angle of turn should be within +25°.
4.4 If, in towing the helicopter by the cable, one of
safety bolts (4) (8AT-9800-127) of the towing cable
gets sheared off (which occurs at the load of
(3250±250) kg), replace it with one of two spare
bolts secured to the tow bar tube (Ref. Fig. 1). In
this case, clear up the cause and provide the towing
conditions preventing damage to the safety bolts.

009.00.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Universal Joint
2 Cable
3 Eye bar
4 Safety Bolt 8AT-9800-127
5 Test shaft

Helicopter Towing by Towing cable

Fig. 2

009.00.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Section 010
PARKING AND MOORING
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

010.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

010.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub-Section, Sub-Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page 010.10.01 301/302 March 31/11

Record of 1 March 31/11 010.10.02 301/302 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11
010.20.00 1 March 31/11

List of 1/2 March 31/11 2 March 31/11

Effective 3 March 31/11

Pages 4 March 31/11

5 March 31/11

Table of 1/2 March 31/11 6 March 31/11

Contents 7/8 March 31/11

901/902 March 31/11

Introduction 1/2 March 31/11

010.00.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11

301/302 March 31/11

010.10.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11
3 March 31/11
4 March 31/11
5 March 31/11
6 March 31/11
7/8 March 31/11
301/302 March 31/11

010.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
PARKING AND MOORING 010.00.00
Description and Operation 1
Maintenance Practices 201/202

PARKING 010.10.00
Description and Operation 1
General 1
Description and Operation 5
Maintenance Practices 201/202

Maintenance Practices 010.10.01 201/202

Maintenance Practices 010.10.02 201/202

MOORING 010.20.00
Description and Operation 1
General 1
Description and Operation 1
Helicopters Mooring 1
Mooring of Main Rotor Blades 2
STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS 901/902

010.00.00
CONTENTS
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

Given in the present Section is the information on the

equipment of the mooring apron, mooring of the helicopter
and the main rotor blades, as well as protecting the
helicopter with slip covers.

010.00.00
INTRODUCTION
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PARKING AND MOORING. GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 Arrange the helicopter parking at a place which is well

protected against prevailing winds, since a strong
gusty wind can lead to the breakage of the main rotor
blades.
The most convenient places for helicopter parking
providing the protection against wind are the aprons
arranged at the edge of the forest, forest plane, the
outskirts of a village (town), at the foot of a
mountain, etc.
2 The soil of the apron should be dry, sufficiently
strong and even. When searching 'the soil for aprons,
pay attention to that it easily permits moisture in
precipitation. Otherwise, the aprons will fail to dry
after precipitation which can lead to the corrosion of
the helicopter parts.
At aprons, the soil should be not only dry but
sufficiently strong, it should provide the erection of
artificial attachment points for testing the engines
for the tie-down run.
The aprons should be cleaned of high thick grass, since
it accumulates a great amount of moisture. Besides, dry
grass can be the source of fire.
3 It is not advisable to arrange the aprons on dusty and
sandy soil, as well as on soft snow. At such an apron,
dust, sand or snow is raised in the air under the
action of the air flow caused by the rotating rotor and
settles out on the parts of engines and helicopter.
If it is still necessary to base the helicopters on a
dusty or sandy soil, as well as on soft snow, pour the
apron with water or roll down.
4 The ground servicing equipment used at the apron should
be arranged in places free from the effect of the air

010.00.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
flow from the rotating main rotor (at a distance of two
or three diameters of the main rotor).
5 If the helicopters are parked on the airfields or
aprons, pay attention to the reliable mooring of the
main rotor blades.
6 Start and test the engines at the helicopter parking
areas or specially equipped grounds in compliance with
the Flight Manual.
Test the engine after installing it on the object and
after replacement of the fuel control unit, carry out
the regulation of the cone alignment of the main rotor
blades with the helicopter rotor system tie-down run or
by loading the helicopter to the maximum takeoff mass.
7 The parking areas should be equipped with mobile fire-
fighting installations, one installation per two
parking areas, and on the operational points, with two
portable fire extinguishers ОУ and ОУ-5. The portable
installations and fire extinguishers should be sealed
and bear tags with indication of check terms and
service life.

010.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PARKING AND MOORING. GENERAL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Maintenance Practices includes the following Task Cards

TASK CARD No DESCRIPTION TC PAGE

TC 010.00.00a Preparation of Parking (Ref.
Area for Helicopter and Collection 1)
Checking Availability of
Fire-Fighting Facilities
ТC 010.00.00b Acceptance of Helicopter (Ref.
for Parking Collection 1)
TC 010.00.00c Listening to Engines and (Ref.
Transmission Units Collection 1)
Operation
TC 010.00.00d Checking Condition of (Ref.
Helicopter Skin Collection 1)
TC 010.00.00e Obtaining Information (Ref.
from Crew Members Collection 1)

010.00.00
Pages 301/302
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PARKING - DESCRIPTION AHD OPERATION

1 GENERAL
1.1 At the parking area of the helicopter, carry out the
following operations:
place the chocks (Ref. Fig. 1) under the main landing
gear.
NOTE: If the parking area is arranged on a slippery
soil, place wooden boards under the wheels;
ground the helicopter.
NOTE: If the helicopter is parked on a concrete
ground, the grounding rod should lie with its
toothed section on the ground concrete, and if
on an earthen ground, the grounding rod should
be pierced into the earth;
make sure that the helicopter electrical system is
deenergized, switches BAT I (АККУМУЛ I) and BAT II
(АККУМУЛ II) on the RH side panel are in position
OFF;
select the low pitch for the main rotor blades and
apply brakes so that none of the blades is above the
tail boom and stabilizer (Ref. Fig. 2, Sub-Section
010.20.00);
install lock 8AT-9912-510 (the anti-theft device) on
the LH (ШАГ-ГАЗ) collective pitch control lever,
install NO-9114-200 Protective casing on KA-61 (KA-
60) Antenna (on helicopters equipped with KA-61 (KA-
60).
close the air intake of the blower, engine compressor
air bleed pipes, АИ-9В exhaust pipe, engine АИ-9В air
bleed pipe, signal flare launchers (ЭКСР), ПВД;

010.10.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
slip covers over the engine air intakes (dust
protection devices), engine exhaust nozzles, АИ-9В
air intake (louvers);
slip covers over the helicopter fuselage, power plant
cowling, main rotor hub, tail boom pylon at the
intermediate gear box, АРК-УД antenna (on helicopters
equipped with АРК-УД/ARK-UD), actuating portion (with
installed SAFIR).
NOTES: In steady bad weather and in winter, slip covers
over the main and tail rotor blades.
(a)In winter:
slip covers over the main rotor hub with the
winter cover;
slip covers over the tail boom pylon with the
winter cover providing heating of the
intermediate and tail rotor gear boxes;
in case of icing (on the ground), remove ice
from the blades of the main and tail rotors by
warm air from the airfield heater. The hot air
temperature should not exceed 70 °C.
(b)In summer in good weather, cover only the
nose section of the fuselage.

010.10.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Installation of Wheel Chocks Under Wheels of

Landing gear Main Supports
Figure 1

010.10.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Slip Cover for Engine Dust Protection Device 8МТ-9113-60

2 Slip Cover for Cowling
3 Slip Cover for Main Rotor Blade 8АТ-2799-00
4 Slip Cover for Rotor Hub 140-9113-60
5 Slip Cover for Fuselage Central Section 8MT-9113-30
6 Slip Cover on actuating portion NO-9113-290
8 Slip Cover heating Rotor of the tail boom pylon 8MT-9113-70
9 Slip Cover for Tail Rotor Blade 140-9113-90
10 Slip Cover for Blade and Hub of Tail Rotor 140-9113-100
11 Cap with Flag 8AT-7705-20
12 Slip Cover for Fuselage Nose Section
- with weather radar 8MT-9113-10
- with modified “dolphin” nose 171M-9113-00-2
13 NO-9114-200 Protective casing for KA-61 (KA-60) antenna (on
helicopters equipped with KA-61 (KA-60)

I Standard Connection of Slip Covers

Covering Helicopter with Slip Covers

Figure 2

010.10.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
2.1 If the helicopter parking lasts longer than seven
days in winter, as well as if icing is likely to
occur, slip covers over the whole helicopter.
The list of slip covers and blanking covers applied
to the helicopter:
1 Slip cover of the fuselage nose section.
2 Slip cover of the fuselage center section.
3 Slip cover of the cowling.
4 Slip cover for heating rotor of the tail boom
pylon.
5 Slip cover for the inlet to engine АИ-9В.
6 Slip covers for the dust protection devices.
7 Blanking cover for the inlet in the engine.
8 Slip covers for the main rotor blades.
9 Slip cover for the rotor hub.
10 Slip cover on the tail rotor blade and hub.
11 Slip cover on the tail rotor blades.
12 Slip cover for АРК-УД antenna (on helicopters
equipped with АРК-УД/ARK-UD).
13 Slip cover for actuating portion
14 Caps with flag for pitot static tube ПВД.
15 Slip covers for hydraulic actuators.
16 Blank cover for the blower inlet.
17 Plugs for turbocompressor manifold.
18 Blank for АИ-9В exhaust pipe.
19 Plug for АИ-9В air passage.
20 Blanks for the signal flare launchers.
21 Blank for the engine exhaust pipe.

010.10.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.2 Slip covers over the helicopter using the following
procedure (Ref. Fig. 2):
install caps on the pitot static tube ПВД;
slip the cover АРК-УД antenna (on helicopters
equipped with АРК-УД/ARK-UD);
install the blank on АИ-9В exhaust pipe;
slip the covers over the generators and hydraulic
actuators in the gear box compartment;
install plugs on the blower air intake, АИ-9В air
passage;
slip the covers over air intakes of engines dust
protection devices (ПЗУ);
slip the covers over the blades of the main and tail
rotors;
put slip cover on actuating portion
slip the cover over the rotor hub;
slip the covers over the fuselage nose section, power
plant cowling, fuselage center section;
blank off signal flare launchers (ЭКСР).
install blanks on the engines exhaust pipes.
NOTES: 1 While covering the fuselage nose section with
the slip covers, check to see that the glass
panels are not damaged, make sure that the
felt gaskets fully cover the glass panels.
2 Connect the slip covers of the cowling, nose
and center sections of the fuselage with
attachment loops and shock cords.

010.10.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Secure the hooks of the cords of the slip

covers of the cowling and of the fuselage
center section to the eyes of the slip cover
of the main rotor hub.
3а In order to secure the cover of the actuating
portion it will be necessary to use a shock-
absorber cord with hook: wrap the cord around
the main LG strut and secure it in its own
loop.
4 IT IS PROHIBITED to slip wet and dirty slip
covers over the helicopter.

010.10.00
Page 7/8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PARKING AND MOORING. GENERAL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Maintenance Practices includes the following Task Cards

TASK CARD No DESCRIPTION TC PAGE

TC 010.10.00a Evaluation of condition (Ref.
of M.R blade mooring Collection 1)
devices and mooring rods
ТC 010.10.00b Preparation of the (Ref.
helicopter for engine Collection 1)
starting

010.10.00
Pages 301/302
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PARKING AND MOORING. GENERAL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Maintenance Practices includes the following Task Cards

TASK CARD No DESCRIPTION TC PAGE

TC 010.10.01a Preliminary operations (Ref.
(checking of helicopter Collection 1)
static discharge cable
and wheel chocks)

010.10.01
Pages 301/302
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PARKING AND MOORING. GENERAL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Maintenance Practices includes the following Task Cards

TASK CARD No DESCRIPTION TC PAGE

TC 010.10.02a Preliminary operations (Ref.
Collection 1)

010.10.02
Pages 301/302
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MOORING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
1.1 Mooring of the helicopter should be carried out at a
specially equipped mooring apron with the help of
mooring, device. The mooring apron consists of two
front and four rear cement hurried mooring anchors
(Ref. Fig. la). The mooring anchors have welded
design.
1.2 The helicopter is moored in the cases when it is
necessary to test its engines at all power settings,
as well as in ground tests. Mooring provides the
attachment of the nose landing gear and the upper
units of the main landing gear to the mooring apron.
1.3 In the preparation for operations pertaining to
mooring the helicopter, thoroughly inspect the
mooring apron, tie-down cables and their attachment
units on the helicopter. During inspections, pay
particular attention to the condition of the
attachment elements and cables (their termination),
check tightening of nuts. Replace the tie-down cables
on which broken cords is detected with new ones.
2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
2.1 Helicopters Mooring
2.1.1 Carry out mooring of the helicopter using the
following procedure: wheel up the mooring fixture
to the helicopter;
secure the front cables to the anchors of the
mooring apron and then to the nose landing gear
strut (Ref. Fig. 1);
secure the main cables to the anchors of the
mooring apron and then to the upper units of the
main landing gear.

010.20.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION IN THE ATTACHMENT OF THE MAIN CABLES TO THE

UPPER UNITS OP THE MAIN LANDING GEAR,
EXERCISE CARE LEST THE DROP FUEL TANKS GET
DAMAGED;
after the arrangement of the tie-down cables
(before starting the engines), check to assure that
the tie-down cables elements are properly jointed.
2.1.2 Remove the tie-down cables using the procedure
reverse to that of their installation on the
helicopter.
2.2 Mooring of Main Rotor Blades
2.2.1 Turn the main rotor so that none of its blades is
positioned above the tail boom and stabilizer,
select the low pitch and apply the brakes (Ref.
Fig. 2).
2.2.2 Install the pins of the mooring fixture stops into
the holes in the blade tips with the help of
carrier 8AT-9927-00.
2.2.3 Pull down the tip of each blade (at the force of
100: to 150 N) and keeping the blade in this
position, pull the sling. Secure 'the slings to the
eyes on the drag struts of the main landing gear.
2.2.4 In stormy weather (at a wind velocity of higher
than 20 m/s), additionally secure the blades with
two rods (Ref. Fig. 3) to prevent the blades
against turning in the feathering hinges. The mass
of the mooring fixture is 8.4 kg.
During installation of the rod, secure its one end
to the pin of the main rotor flapping hinge axle
and the other yoke-type end, to the shaft of the
swash plate hinge.

010.20.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTES Install the stormy rods so that one of the rods

eliminates a tilt of the swash plate in the
longitudinal direction and the other in the
lateral direction.
2.2.5 It is allowed to leave the blades untied if a
flight or engine start is planned for the next day
and the forecast wind velocity is up to 20 m/s. In
this case, position the blades so that none of them
is above the boom or stabilizer, after that apply
the main rotor brake.

010.20.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

l Front Cables
2 Main Cables

Helicopter Mooring
Figure 1

010.20.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE. Tamp concrete

Mooring Site
Figure 1a

010.20.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Sling
2 Sling
3 Sling

Mooring of Main Rotor Blades

Figure 2

010.20.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Stormy Mooring of Main Rotor Blades

Figure 3

010.20.00
Page 7/8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MOORING - STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

1 After removing the tie-down cables, clean them of dirt

and, if necessary, coat with grease ЦИАТИМ-201.
2 Keep the tie-down cables in a dry room.
3 In a long-term storage, preserve the cables and units
by applying a thick layer of grease ПВК.

010.20.00
Pages 901/902
March 31/11
 Section 011
REQUIRED PLACARDS
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

011.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

011.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub-Section, Sub-Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page

Record of 1 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11

List of 1/2 March 31/11

Effective
Pages

Table of 1/2 March 31/11

Contents

Introduction 1/2 March 31/11

011.00.00 1 March 31/11

2 March 31/11
3 March 31/11
4 March 31/11
5/6 March 31/11
7/8 March 31/11
9 March 31/11
10 March 31/11
11 March 31/11
12 March 31/11

011.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
REQUIRED PLACARDS 011.00.00
Description and Operation 1
General 1
External Symbols and Placards 1
Internal Symbols and Placards 1

011.00.00
CONTENTS
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

Given in the present Section is the information on

inscriptions and placards offering the information
required in the course of operation of the helicopter as
well as the nationality marks.

011.00.00
INTRODUCTION
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REQUIRED PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
Applied to the external and internal sides of the
fuselage of the helicopter are the placards offering
the information required for the operation and
maintenance of its systems.
2 EXTERNAL SYMBOLS AND PLACARDS
Applied to both sides are the nationality marks of the
helicopter (Ref. Fig. 1).
Applied to the external side of the fuselage to the
hatch covers, tail boom and stabilizer are the placards
instructing the maintenance staff on the access to the
systems and units of the helicopter, as well as
warnings and cautions (Ref. Figs 2, 3, 4).
3 INTERNAL SYMBOLS AND PLACARDS
Applied inside the cargo compartment on the RH side is
the layout of the cargo compartment for the arrangement
of cargos at different variants of helicopter loading,
the placard with the explanation of the instructions on
use of this layout and the placard offering the
information on the tolerated loads on the floor of the
cargo compartment and on the wheel (Ref. Fig. 5).
The placards inside the cargo compartment and at the
port side and on the partition on Frame No. 5Н are
shown in Figs 6, 7.
Applied to the floor of the cargo compartment is the
layout of wheels for taking up the vehicular, as well
as a placard with the layout of the fuel shut-off
valves (Ref. Fig. 8).

011.00.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

011.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

011.00.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

I Port Side
II Starboard Side
Nationality Marks
Figure 1

011.00.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Main External Symbols and Placards on Port Side

Figure 2

011.00.00
Page 5/6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Main External Symbols and Placards on Starboard Side

Figure 3

011.00.00
Page 7/8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Main External Symbols and Placards (Fuselage Bottom View)

Figure 4

011.00.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Symbols and Placards on Starboard about Tolerated Loads

on Cargo Compartment Floor
Figure 5

011.00.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Symbols and Placards (Portside View From Inside of Cargo

Compartment
Figure 6

Symbols and Placards (Portside View Frame No 5H As

Looking Forward)
Figure 7

011.00.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Layout for Rolling in Vehicular

(Top View of Cargo Compartment Floor)
Figure 8

011.00.00
Page 12
March 31/11
Section 012
SERVICING
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No.. Subject Reference No.
and Date

012.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No.. Subject Reference No.
and Date

012.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page 012.10.00 2 March 31/11

3 March 31/11

Record of 1 March 31/11 4 March 31/11

Revisions 2 March 31/11 5 March 31/11

6 March 31/11

List of 1 March 31/11 7 March 31/11

Effective 2 March 31/11 8 March 31/11

Pages 3 March 31/11 9 March 31/11

4 March 31/11 10 March 31/11

5 March 31/11 11 March 31/11

6 March 31/11 12 March 31/11

13 March 31/11

Table of 1 March 31/11 14 March 31/11

Contents 2 March 31/11 15 March 31/11

3 March 31/11 16 March 31/11

4 March 31/11 17 March 31/11

5 March 31/11 18 March 31/11

6 March 31/11 19 March 31/11

20 March 31/11

Introduction 1/2 March 31/11 21 March 31/11

22 March 31/11

012.00.00 1/2 March 31/11 23 March 31/11

24 March 31/11

012.10.00 1 March 31/11 25 March 31/11

012.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
012.10.00 26 March 31/11 012.10.00 52 March 31/11

27 March 31/11 53 March 31/11

28 March 31/11 54 March 31/11

29 March 31/11 55 March 31/11

30 March 31/11 56 March 31/11

31 March 31/11 57 March 31/11

32 March 31/11 58 March 31/11

33 March 31/11 59 March 31/11

34 March 31/11 60 March 31/11

35 March 31/11 61 March 31/11

36 March 31/11 62 March 31/11

37 March 31/11 63 March 31/11

38 March 31/11 64 March 31/11

39 March 31/11 65 March 31/11

40 March 31/11 66 March 31/11

41 March 31/11 67 March 31/11

42 March 31/11 68 March 31/11

43 March 31/11 69 March 31/11

44 March 31/11 70 March 31/11

45 March 31/11 71 March 31/11

46 March 31/11 72 March 31/11

47 March 31/11 73 March 31/11

48 March 31/11 74 March 31/11

49 March 31/11 75 March 31/11

50 March 31/11 76 March 31/11

51 March 31/11 77 March 31/11

012.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
012.10.00 78 March 31/11 012.10.00 104 March 31/11

79 March 31/11 105 March 31/11

80 March 31/11 106 March 31/11

81 March 31/11 107 March 31/11

82 March 31/11 108 March 31/11

83 March 31/11 109 March 31/11

84 March 31/11 110 March 31/11

85 March 31/11 111 March 31/11

86 March 31/11 112 March 31/11

87 March 31/11 113 March 31/11

88 March 31/11 114 March 31/11

89 March 31/11 115 March 31/11

90 March 31/11 116 March 31/11

91 March 31/11 117 March 31/11

92 March 31/11 118 March 31/11

93 March 31/11 119 March 31/11

94 March 31/11 120 March 31/11

95 March 31/11 121 March 31/11

96 March 31/11 122 March 31/11

97 March 31/11 123 March 31/11

98 March 31/11 124 March 31/11

99 March 31/11 125 March 31/11

100 March 31/11 126 March 31/11

101 March 31/11 127 March 31/11

102 March 31/11 128 March 31/11

103 March 31/11 129 March 31/11

130 March 31/11

012.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
012.10.00 131 March 31/11 012.11.00 8 March 31/11

132 March 31/11 9 March 31/11

133 March 31/11 10 March 31/11

134 March 31/11 11 March 31/11

135 March 31/11 12 March 31/11

136 March 31/11 13 March 31/11

137 March 31/11 14 March 31/11

138 March 31/11 15 March 31/11

139 March 31/11 16 March 31/11

140 March 31/11 17 March 31/11

141/142 March 31/11 18 March 31/11

143 March 31/11 19 March 31/11

144 March 31/11 20 March 31/11

145 March 31/11 21 March 31/11

146 March 31/11 22 March 31/11

147 March 31/11 23 March 31/11

148 March 31/11 24 March 31/11

149/150 March 31/11 25/26 March 31/11

301/302 March 31/11
012.20.00 1 March 31/11

012.11.00 1 March 31/11 2 March 31/11

2 March 31/11 3 March 31/11

3 March 31/11 4 March 31/11

4 March 31/11 5 March 31/11

5 March 31/11 6 March 31/11

6 March 31/11 7 March 31/11

7 March 31/11 8 March 31/11

012.00.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Date Section, Page Date
Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
012.20.00 9 March 31/11 012.20.00 37 March 31/11

10 March 31/11 38 March 31/11

11 March 31/11 39 March 31/11

12 March 31/11 40 March 31/11

13 March 31/11 41 March 31/11

14 March 31/11 42 March 31/11

15 March 31/11 43 March 31/11

16 March 31/11 44 March 31/11

17 March 31/11 45 March 31/11

18 March 31/11 46 March 31/11

19 March 31/11 47 March 31/11

20 March 31/11 48 March 31/11

21 March 31/11 49 March 31/11

22 March 31/11 50 March 31/11

23 March 31/11 51 March 31/11

24 March 31/11 52 March 31/11

25 March 31/11 53 March 31/11

26 March 31/11 54 March 31/11

27 March 31/11 55 March 31/11

28 March 31/11 56 March 31/11

29 March 31/11 57/58 March 31/11

30 March 31/11 59 March 31/11

31/32 March 31/11 60 March 31/11

33 March 31/11 61 March 31/11

34 March 31/11 62 March 31/11

35 March 31/11 63 March 31/11

36 March 31/11

012.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
012.20.00 64 March 31/11 012.30.00 20 March 31/11
65 March 31/11 21/22 March 31/11
66 March 31/11 23 March 31/11
301/302 March 31/11 24 March 31/11
25 March 31/11
012.20.01 301/302 March 31/11 26 March 31/11
27 March 31/11
012.20.10 1 March 31/11 28 March 31/11
2 March 31/11 29 March 31/11
3 March 31/11 30 March 31/11
4 March 31/11 31 March 31/11
32 March 31/11
012.30.00 1 March 31/11 33 March 31/11
2 March 31/11 34 March 31/11
3 March 31/11 35 March 31/11
4 March 31/11 36 March 31/11
5 March 31/11 37 March 31/11
6 March 31/11 38 March 31/11
7 March 31/11 39 March 31/11
8 March 31/11 40 March 31/11
9/10 March 31/11 41/42 March 31/11
11/12 March 31/11
13/14 March 31/11
15/16 March 31/11
17/18 March 31/11
19 March 31/11

012.00.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
SERVICING 012.00.00
General 1/2

GROUND SERVICING EQUIPMENT 012.10.00

Description and Operation
General 1
Recommended General-Purpose 2
Ground Servicing Equipment
Special-Purpose Ground 3
Servicing Equipment
Description and Operation 12
Special-Purpose Ground 12
Servicing Equipment
Hoisting Facilities 13
Aids Providing Access to Parts 17
and Units
Installation/Removal Equipment 30
Servicing Accessories 60
Servicing Equipment of Separate 65
Systems and Units
Protection Equipment of 113
Helicopter at Parking
Servicing equipment for 121
aircraft armaments

012.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
Ground test facilities (GTF) 012.10.00 148
Maintenance Practices 201/202

TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE OF HELICOPTER 012.11.00

Description and Operation 1
Airborne Tools Kit 8AT-9100-000 1
Special Tools Kit 8MT-9102-00 3
Multi-Purpose Tools 8AT-9101-00 8
Tools for Electrical Equipment 11
8AT-9106-00
Tools for Instruments 12
8AT-9108-00
Tools for Radio Equipment 14
8АТ-9107-00
Bench Tools 8AT-9105-00 15
Special Tools 17
Special Tools 8AMT-91104-00 20
Armament maintenance tools 22
4V-9112-00
Armament maintenance tools 23
8TV-9112-00

AIRFIELD SERVICING 012.20.00

Description and Operation
General 1
Layout of NO STEP Areas 1
012.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
Features of Operation of 012.20.00 1
Helicopters in Different
Climatic Conditions
Preparation of Helicopter and 1
Engines for Winter Operation
Preparation of Helicopter 6
Airborne Equipment for Winter
Operation
Preparation of Radio Equipment 8
for Winter Operation
Preparation of Lifting and 8
Conveying Equipment for Winter
Operation
Features of Maintenance and 9
Operation of Helicopter and
Engines in Winter
Features of Operation of 12
Airborne Equipment in Winter
Features of Operation of Radio 13
Equipment in Winter
Preparation of Helicopter and 14
Engines for Operation in Summer
Preparation of Airborne 16
Equipment for Operation in
Summer
Preparation of Radio Equipment 17
for Operation in Summer
Preparation of Lifting and 18
Conveying Equipment for
Operation in Summer
012.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
Features of Operation of 19
Helicopter and Engines at High
Temperatures and Elevated
Humidity
Features of Operation of 21
Airborne Equipment at High
Temperatures and Elevated
Humidity
Features of Operation of Radio 012.20.00 22
Equipment at High Temperatures
and Elevated Humidity
Features of Operation of 24
Helicopter on Dusty and Sandy
Grounds and Airfields
Features of Operation of 25
Helicopter in Seaside and
Solonchak Areas
Connection of External 26
Electrical Power Source
Filling Helicopter Systems 27
Grades of Fuels and Oils and of 27
Other Materials Used in Filling
Helicopter Systems
Helicopter Systems Tanks 29
Helicopter Fuelling. 30
Preparation for Tank Fuelling
Pilling Oil Systems of Engines 38
and Main Gear Box
Filling Intermediate and Tail 40
Rotor Gear Boxes
012.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
Filling Hydraulic System 012.20.00 41
Charging Airborne Bottles with 43
Compressed Air
Charging Hydraulic Accumulators 45
Charging Landing Gear Shock 46
Struts with nitrogen
Replenishment of Landing Gear 47
Shock Struts with Oil АМГ-10
Charging Landing Gear Wheel 51
Tires
Filling Oil in Feathering Hinge 52
of Tail Rotor Hub
Filling Compensation Tank of 55
Hydraulic Dampers
Filling Main. Rotor Hub Hinges 55
Draining Fuel, Oil and 56
Discharging Air System
Draining Fuel 56
Oil Draining 60
Discharging Air System 66
Cleaning and Washing Helicopter 66
Maintenance Practices 201/202

Maintenance Practices 012.20.01 201/202

012.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
APPLICATION OF FOREIGN LUBRICANT 012.20.10
ANALOGS
Description and Operation
General 1
Foreign-made analogs of the 2
operating oils for helicopters
Foreign-made analogs of АМГ-10 3
(AMG-10) operating fluid,
approved for application on
helicopter
HELICOPTER TRANSPORTATION 012.30.00
Description and Operation
General 1
Description and Operation 1
Preliminary Operations 1
Performed Before Disassembly of
Helicopter
Disassembly of Helicopter 2
Preservation of Helicopter 3
Packing and Loading of 6
Helicopter
Unloading and Unpacking 28
Containers from Helicopters
after Sea Transportation
Unpacking and Unloading of 31
Containers after Transportation
by Rail
Assembly of Helicopter 34

012.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

The present Section offers the information on tools and

fixtures required for maintenance of the helicopter

012.00.00
INTRODUCTION
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SERVICING - GENERAL

Given in the present Section is the information on the

ground servicing equipment used during maintenance of the
helicopter, about airfield maintenance of the helicopter
and its systems, about transportation of the helicopter.

012.00.00
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

GROUND SERVICING EQUIPMENT –

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
The ground servicing equipment includes:
general-purpose equipment delivered to the using
agency;
ground servicing equipment delivered with a helicopter.
The general-purpose equipment is the standard airfield
equipment. Its nomenclature is given in the present
Section while the description of the design and
technical data, in the relevant descriptions of the
Manufacturer.
The ground servicing equipment applied to the
helicopters incorporates one single set 1:1 and group
sets 1:5, 1:10. These are different fixtures and
installations (sets) applied in the course of operation
of helicopters.
In handling the ground servicing equipment, provide an
adequate care and storage. Coat all the moving parts
and units, cables and other structural members bare of
paint-and-varnish coating or other coatings regularly,
but at least once a month with grease ЦИАТИМ-201 to
avoid corrosion.
All types of ground servicing equipment which are test
means and which contain measuring means should be
subjected to metrological check according to using
agency schedule at least once a year (except torque
wrenches which are checked once every three months).
If, in the course of operation, deterioration of the
paint-and-varnish coating is detected, recondition it
without delay. Inspect all the cables of the ground
servicing equipment at least once every three months

012.10.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
and coat with grease ЦИАТИМ-201. Keep all the slings
used during the installation and removal of the
helicopter parts with the help of a crane in the
preserved and hanged condition or place them in a box.
Neither twisting nor breakage of cables is tolerated.
Before every lift, inspect the fixtures and slings in
use. NEVER use the slings with deformed parts,
overtwisted, broken or sharply bent cables.
In handling the fixtures, observe the following
requirements: lift the load vertically, smoothly,
without jerks and swinging;
in the course of lifting, it is not allowed to catch
foreign objects with the load;
do not disengage the fixture from the load until the
load is reliably installed.
1.1 Recommended General-Purpose Ground Servicing
Equipment
1.1.1 Fluid filling equipment:
Refueler T3A-7,5-5334 or T3-5,
TЗA-7,5-500A, or
ТЗ-8-255Б, or T3-22
Special liquid fueler A2111 AM3-53MC (МФ)
Special liquid fueler ЭСЖ-66М
1.1.2. Gas charging equipment:
Compressor truck B3-20-350
Ground air bottle cart (for АТБ-46
helicopters based in small
groups)
Oxygen dispenser truck (for AK3C-80/210 or
charging detachable oxygen УГЗСМ-К-131
bottles)

012.10.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Fire extinguisher servicing AЗОC-1

tanker (for servicing fire
extinguishers)
1.1.3. Power supply equipment:
Ground power unit АПА-5Д or АПА-50М
Multi-purpose mobile set УПГ-300 or УПГ-250ГМ
1.1.4. Heaters:
Multi-purpose motor heater УМП-350-131
1.1.5. Towing equipment:
Towing truck ЗИЛ-131 or ГАЗ-66
1.1.6 Lifting, transportation and
mounting equipment:
Truck-mounted crane (for KC-1562, or K-67,
lifting units) or 8T-210
Truck-mounted crane (for KC-1562, or K-67, or
lifting units) 8T-210
Truck-mounted crane (for KC-4561AM or K-162M
lifting the helicopter after
emergency landing or for
loading onto flatcars)
1.2. Special-Purpose Ground
Servicing Equipment
1.2.1. Towing, supporting and tie-
down equipment:
Helicopter mooring 8MT-9911-00 (1:10)
Main rotor blades mooring 8AT-9900-00 (1:1)
TOW bar 8TB-9800-00 (1:10)
Wheel chocks 8-9126-00 (1:1)
Storm thrust 8AT-9900-40 (1:1)
Carrier for blades and for 8AT-9927-00 (1:1)

012.10.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
turning helicopter with
sling
8AT-9927-510
1.2.2. Hoisting equipment:
Hydraulic jack 8AT-9907-00 (1:10)
Fixture for hoisting 140-9943-00 (РМИ)
helicopter without tail boom
and with tail boom
1.2.3. Aids providing access to
parts and units:
Multi-purpose air stairs 8A-9917-00 (1:1)
Ladder for climbing to tail 8-9905-00 (1:1)
boom
Maintenance stand for 8AT-9919-00 (1:10)
operation at tail and main
rotors
Maintenance stand for 8AT-9919-200 (1:1)
fueling
Mat-trolley for operation 8AT-9803-00 (1:10)
under fuselage
1.2.4. Installation/removal
equipment:
Support for storage of main 8AT-9915-00 (1:10)
rotor blades
Trolley for transportation 8AT-9801-00 (1:10)
of main rotor blades
Sling for lifting main rotor 8AT-9903-00 (1:10)
blades
Sling for lifting swash 8AT-9920-00 (1:10)
plate assembly
Sling for lifting main rotor 8AT-9921-00 (1:10)

012.10.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
hub and hydraulic unit
Sling for lifting tail boom 8AT-9924-00 (1:1)
pylon
Sling for lifting tail boom 8AT-9936-00 (1:1)
and tail pylon in assembly
Sling for lifting tail rotor 8AT-9925-00 (1:10)
gear box
Vibration damper hoist sling НО-9923-00/NO-9923-
00 (1:10)
Yoke for lifting tail rotor 8АТ-9925-100 (1:10)
hub
Trolley for transportation 8AT-9802-00 (1:10)
and preliminary assembly of
engine
Support for main gear box 8AT-9906-00 (1:10)
Wheel tire puller СШ-07-000 or СШ-04
(1:10)
Spreader for lifting engine 140-9908-00 (1:10)
Fixture for lifting main 8AT-9942-00 (1:10)
gear box
Fixture (eye bar) for B-0099-587 (1:10)
mounting wheel tube
Spreader for lifting engine 8MT-9904-00 (1:10)
АИ-9В
Fixture for mounting and 8AT-9938-00 (1:1)
demounting main wheel
bearings
Fixture for mounting 8AT-9948-00 (1:10)
hydraulic accumulator
Mat for detachable section 8AT-9930-50 (1:1)
of dust protection device
1.2.5. Servicing accessories:
20-ltr can for oil 8AT-9980-700 (1:10)

012.10.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Funnel for oil 2-1 (1:1)

Funnel for hydraulic mixture 2-1 (1:1)
(АМГ-10)
Funnel for fuel 2-1 (1:1)
Lubricator for filling 8AT-9129-00 (1:1)
intermediate and tail rotor
gear boxes and the main
rotor hub hinge cavities
with oil
Bucket with pouring lip for (1:1)
10 ltr of oil
Bucket for oil АМГ-10 (1:1)
Bucket for fuel (1:10)
Pan for oil 8-9923-00 (1:10)
Container for keeping 8AT-9931-00-3/5
servicing accessories at (1:1)
parking
Pan 140-9924-000 (1:1)
1.2.6. Servicing equipment for
separate systems and units:
Trestle for frames Nos 3, 10 8A-9905-500 (1:10)
Mat for operation in tail 8AT-9930-40 (1:10)
boom
Support for main rotor hub 140-9807-10 (1:10)
Support for swash plate 140-9807-20 (1:1)
assembly
Carrier for blades and for 8AT-9927-00 (1:1)
turning helicopter with
sling
Ground servicing line 8AT-9991-10 (1:1)

012.10.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Fixture for slipping covers 8-0029-680 (1:1)

over main rotor blades
Hose for fuel drain 8A-9901-00/A (1:1)
Hose for draining oil from 8AT-9918-00 (1:1)
main, intermediate and tail
rotor gear boxes
Hose for draining oil from 140-9928-05 (1:1)
engine oil tank
Hose for draining oil from 8AT-9928-500 (1:1)
engine oil system
Suction pipe oil drain hose 245-9969-00 (1:10)
Fixture for oil collection 140-9923-100 (1:1)
in removal of main gear box
filter
Hoses for charging and 8A-9910-00 (1:1)
checking pressure in wheels,
electric system, shock
struts and hydraulic
accumulators
Lever-plunger grease gun Ш-1 (1:1)
reworked ace. Dwg B-9917-100
Modified grease gun 8AT-9917-500 (1:1)
Fixture for checking 8AT-9951-00 (1:10)
electric circuits of
electric flare launchers,
signal flare launchers ЭКСР-
46
Fixture for checking 8AT-9914-00 (1:10)
transmission shaft runout
Installation for checking 8AT-9937-00 (1:10)
cone alignment of main rotor
blades

012.10.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Fixture for checking tail 8-0071-20 (1:10)

shaft misalignment with
attachment ЭТ-8АТ-15-250 for
measuring side clearance in
couplings
Pins for locking controls in 8AT-9912-00 (1:10)
neutral position
Datum leveling bar in cover 105-9900-170 or 3
8AT-9939-540 (1:10)
Screw with plumb line 8AT-0001-510 (1:1)
Protractor for measuring 8AT-9939-00 (1:10)
angles of main rotor blades
trim tabs
Fixture for bending trim 56-9918-00 (1:10)
tabs of main rotor blades
Installation for inner 2-9909-00 (1:10)
preservation of fuel system
of engine УКД-1
Fixture for measuring 140-9994-00 (1:10)
backpressure in engine oil
system
Fixture for measuring plays 6360/504 (1:10)
of tail rotor blade turning
lever shaft
Fixture for measuring axial 6360/714 (1:10)
play of tail rotor rod
bearing
Set of fixtures for
measuring total play of
swash plate assembly:
Plate T6358-6226
Wedge in assembly T6358-6225

012.10.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Screw clamp T6350-6223

Rod T6358-6224
Rod T6358-6223
Clamp T6358-6228
Clamp T6358-6229
Indicator ИЧ10, acc. cl. 1
Fixture for oil servicing 8-100 (1:10)
into feathering hinge of
tail rotor hub ЭКС-1
Fixture for checking 8A-9910-600 (1:10)
airtightness of pipeline of
mode measuring system
ИР-117М
AC external power cable 8AMT-9934-10
(separate request)
Portable pump unit ПНА-1М 8Д2.960.000
(separate request)
Level H=3 (HB-1) (1:30)
Plumb line, 25 to 35 g, with 6409/И-013 (1:10)
threads No. 10
1.2.7. Equipment for protecting
helicopter at parking
Set of plugs for systems 140-9940-00 (1:10)
pipelines (with engine and
gear box removed)
Lock for collective pitch 8AT-9912-510 (1:1)
control lever
Set of blanking covers for
units:
Set of slip covers for 8MT-9113-00 (1:1)
helicopter

012.10.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Ladder for tail boom 8AMT-9930-00 (1:10)

Cap with flag on Pitot 8AT-7705-20 (1:1)
static tube
Ladder for cargo compartment 8AT-9929-00 (1:1)
floor
Carpet for flight 8AT-9929-500 (1:1)
compartment
Sun curtain HO-9113-220 (1:1)
1.2.8. Equipment for cleaning and
special treatment of
helicopter
Vacuum cleaner for 27 V PAKETA-7M (PAKETA-7M)
(separate request)
Washing-neutralizing machine 8T311M
1.2.9 Servicing equipment for
aircraft armaments
Cargo lifting system 8TV.8799.700
Trolley 8MT.9970.040 SB
Boresight target 8MT-9990-00
Appliance for boresighting 242-9991-00
Appliance for boresighting 8MT.9992.000
by datum point
Target for leveling the 8MT.9993.000 SB
goniometer reticle
Appliance for leveling the 242-9994-00
goniometer reticle
Adaptor assembly 8MT.9995.000 SB
Adaptor assembly 242-9995-00
Adaptor assembly 242-9996-00

012.10.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Appliance for checking 8AT-9939-200

safety angles
Cover for left Exhaust Gas 8MT-9981-100-1
Shield (EGS)
Cover for right Exhaust Gas 8MT-9981-100-2
Shield (EGS)
EGS storage and shipping 8МТ-9980-00
container
Lanyard for EGS
Dolly for transportation of
external store rack adapters

012.10.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

2.1 Special-Purpose Ground Servicing Equipment
2.1.1 Helicopter mooring
The helicopter is moored with six steel cables
attached to steel lugs (Ref. Sub-Section 010.20.00,
Fig. 2).
Two front cables, 19.5 mm in dia., are secured to
the nose landing gear and to two anchors of the
mooring apron. Pour main cables, 29.5 mm in dia.,
are secured in pairs to the main landing gear and
to four anchors of the mooring apron.
Mooring provides relative (in the limits of cable
lengths) freedom of moving in all directions for
the helicopter.
The total mass of the tie-down cables is 103.2 kg.
2.1.2 Mooring of the main rotor blades. This is performed
by five slings orange in colour. They are made of
capron tape and thread stitched (Ref. Sub-Section
010.20.00, Fig. 2). One end of the sling has a lug
for the attachment of the sling to the main rotor
blade and the other, a snap-hook for the attachment
to the eyes on the landing gear brace struts.
The mass of mooring fixture is 15 kg.
2.1.3 Tow bar. The tow bar is intended for towing the
helicopter by a towing truck to the airfield,
highways or earth roads (Ref. Sub-Section
009.00.00, Fig. 1)
The mass of the tow bar is 45.6 kg.
2.1.4 The tow cable. It is intended for towing the
helicopter to short distances with the tail boom
forward in heavy conditions over slippery soil. In

012.10.00
Page 12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
this case, the cable is secured to the main landing
gear (Ref. Sub-Section 009.00.00, Fig. 2).
The mass of the tow cable is 24.8 kg.
2.1.5 Chocks. The chocks are intended for preventing an
accidental helicopter move on the parking area
(Ref. Sub-Section 010.10.00, Fig. 1). The chocks
are of cast structure with bearing teeth. They are
made of material АЛ-9. The bearing outline of the
chock is made to suit the wheel radius.
The overall dimensions of one chock is 300x170x210
mm. The mass of a chock is 1.2 kg.
2.2 Hoisting Facilities
2.2.1 Hydraulic jack. The hydraulic jacks are intended
for lifting the helicopter during the removal and
installation of the landing gear shock struts,
their charging, removal and installation of the
wheels, helicopter leveling, as well as in the
course of other operations pertaining to lifting of
the helicopter.
The set consists of four hydraulic jacks.
Basic specifications of the hydraulic
jack:
Lifting capacity 5000 kgf
Minimum height 550 mm
Maximum height 1440 mm
Hydraulic travel 690 mm
Travel of setting screw 200 mm
Operating pressure 13000 kPa
(130 kgf/cm2)
Working fluid АМГ-10
Capacity of working fluid 5.5 ltr

012.10.00
Page 13
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Mass 38 kg

NOTE: Hereinafter in the text, 1 kgf/cm2 is taken

equal 100 kPa for the sake of convenience.
The hydraulic jack (Ref. Fig. 1) consists of truss
(2), hydraulic cylinder (13) with tank (4), pump
(24) with pump handle (22) and pipelines (20).
The hydraulic cylinder consists of cylinder (13)
proper and base (19) driven thereto. The base is a
blind nut with a cavity for rods. The base has
three eyes for attaching the lower portion of the
hydraulic cylinder to truss (2) with the help of
braces, a lug with the passages for working fluid,
shut-off valve (3) and drain plug (21).
Telescopic rods (14) and (15) are installed inside
the hydraulic cylinder. Secured by thread to the
lower portion of each rod are duralumin guide
bushings (17) with sealing collars which at the
same time, protect the hydraulic cylinder faces and
outer rod against scores which are likely to occur
as the rods are displaced. Made on the outer
surface of each rod is a trapezoidal thread for
locknuts (6) and longitudinal slot for bosses (9)
which are secured to upper bushings (8), (10) and
do not allow the rods to turn while moving up or
down. Made inside rod (15), in its upper portion,
is thread for setting screw (7).
Upper bushings (8) and (10) are secured rigidly
relative to the hydraulic cylinder and rod (14) and
are the rod guides.
Looknuts (6) serve for protecting rods (14) and
(15) against a spontaneous down-stroke at a
prolonged parking of the helicopter positioned on
the hydraulic jacks or at an accidental pressure

012.10.00
Page 14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
drop in the hydraulic system, as well as for a
forced downstroke of the rods when it is difficult
to lower them by hand. In this case, install
connecting pins (23) into the holes of upper
bushings (8) and (10) and lower the rods by
rotating locknuts (6).
Setting screw (7) is used for manual installation
of the rods of the hydraulic jacks without
clearance or with the minimum clearance. The screw
terminates in a spherical head matching the bearing
seat in the fuselage-mounted units. Limit screw
(16) does not allow setting screw (7) to turn out
of rod (15) and leave it.
The welded aluminum casing installed outside the
cylinder makes up tank (4) for the working fluid.
Welded to the bottom and to the top of the tank are
flanges (11) and (18) which have seals at the
points of attachment to the hydraulic cylinder. The
tank has a filler neck with the filter and cover
and the drain hole. Installed in the lower portion
of the tank is a servicing connection through which
the pipeline connects the tank to pump (24) and
hydraulic cylinder (13). In the upper outer side of
the tank there is an eye for securing plumb line
(5).
The truss is a structure welded of pipes. It has a
base and three load-bearing struts for the
attachment of the hydraulic cylinder. Melded in the
corners of the base are threaded bushings for
securing supports (25). Welded to two rear threaded
bushings are brackets to which two wheels are
mounted for moving the hydraulic jack. For the same
purpose, articulated to the front strut of the
truss is handle (12) which is locked with the
lockpin in its inoperative position.

012.10.00
Page 15
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Supports (25) serve for adjustment upon
installation of the hydraulic jack with the help of
the plumb line. The support consists of a screw and
a base. The lower surface of the base has circular
projections for better grip with the soil.
Installed in the front portion of the truss is HP-
01 pump (24).
The hydraulic cylinder is secured not only to the
upper struts of the truss through which all the
loads caused in the course of lifting of the
helicopter are transmitted but to the base truss
with the help of three braces as well. With its one
end each brace is secured to the truss base and
with the other, articulated to one of the eyes on
the base (19) of hydraulic cylinder.
Before the upstroke of rods (14) and (15) of the
hydraulic jack, close shut-off valve (3). As handle
(22) of pump (24) moves, the fluid runs from the
tank through pipeline (20) to the pump from which
it is supplied under pressure to the hydraulic
cylinder chamber. Under the action of the fluid
pressure, the hydraulic cylinder rods go up.
As the rods go down, open shut-off valve (3) and
lower the rods by hand, in this case, the fluid
will flow from the chamber of the hydraulic
cylinder to the tank.
2.2.2 Fixture for lifting the helicopter without the tail
boom and with the tail boom. The fixture (Ref. Fig.
2) is intended for lifting the helicopter with the
tail boom detached. In this case, the helicopter
has a forward center of gravity. The fixture
consists of boom (2) (the primary load-bearing
unit) of the box section welded of channel
sections. Welded to the ends of the boom are steel
brackets. Front bracket (9) serves for the

012.10.00
Page 16
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
attachment of the crane hook. Attached to the rear
bracket through the universal joints are two braces
(3). There is a port in the middle section of the
boom for connection to the eye of eye-nut (1) (Ref.
Fig. 3) with the help of locking pin (4) (Ref.
Fig. 2).
Braces (3) are made of pipes 73x58 mm with welded
lugs. With its lower end brace (3) is connected via
the universal joint to the bracket for mooring the
helicopter on frame No. 10 with the help of locking
pin (6).
Eye-nut (1) (Ref. Fig. 3) serves for connection of
boom (2) (Ref. Fig. 2) to the gear box shaft. For
lifting the fixture, the boom has yoke (1).
The mass of the fixture is 193.4 kg.
2.3 Aids Providing Access to Parts and Units
2.3.1 Multi-purpose airborne ladder.
The ladder is used for servicing the helicopter
when it is parked on the ground. It consists of
lower link (1) (See. Fig. 4) and upper link (3)
with handrails (4).
The lower link is made of duralumin tubes. Secured
to the lower ends of the tubes are steel pointed
end pieces intended for bearing against the ground.
Riveted to the upper ends of the tubes are steel
eye brackets for the connection to upper link (3).
The upper link is made of duralumin tubes. In its
upper part it is bent for the installation on the
tail rotor gear box (assembly No. 2) and glued over
with rubber to protect the tail rotor gear box
against damage. Riveted to the lower part of the
upper link are fork-type brackets for the
connection to the lower link 1.

012.10.00
Page 17
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Riveted to the steps of the ladder made of tubes is
ribbing to avoid slipping. For improving stiffness
and for convenience of operation, the ladder is
made with the handrails.
The ladder can be used in two variants.

012.10.00
Page 18
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Wheel 14 Rod
2 Fruss 15 Rod
3 Shut-Off Valve 16 Limit Screw
4 Tank 17 Guide Bushings
5 Plumb Line 18 Flange
6 Locknuts 19 Hydraulic Cylinder Base
7 Setting Screw 20 Hydraulic System Pipelines
8 Upper Bushing 21 Drain Plug
9 Boss 22 Pump Handle
10 Upper Bushing 23 Connecting Pins
11 Flange 24 Pump
12 Handle 25 Support
13 Hydraulic Cylinder

Hydraulic Jack
Figure 1

012.10.00
Page 19
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Yoke for Lifting Fixture 6 Pin

2 Boom 7 Special Nut
3 Brace 8 Eye-Nut
4 Pin 9 Bracket
5 Line

Fixture for Lifting Helicopter Without Tail Boom

(8AT-9945-00)
Figure 2

012.10.00
Page 20
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Eye-Nut
2 Locking Screw
3 Bolt
4 Screw
5 Plate
6 Pin
7 Nut
8 Line

Variant of Lifting Helicopter with Tail Boom

and Tail Rotor
Figure 3

012.10.00
Page 21
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

I-II Assemblies Nos 1 to 2

1 Lower Link
3 Upper Link
4 Handrails

Multi-Purpose Airborne Ladder

Figure 4

012.10.00
Page 22
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Assembly No. 1.
The variant in which the lower link are used. The
ladder is leaned against the helicopter fuselage at
an angle of 75° with respect to the ground plane,
bears with its pointed end pieces against the
ground and with the stop glued over with rubber,
against the helicopter skin.
Assembly No. 2.
The variant in which the lower and middle links are
used. The links are rigidly connected to the
brackets installed in the tubes of the ladder and
handrails with the locking pins. In this case, the
ladder is used for maintenance of the tail rotor.
It is installed at an angle of 75° to the ground
plane and with the hook of the upper link engaged
with the tail gear box.
The mass of the ladder is 16 kg.
2.3.2 Ladder for climbing into tail boom. The ladder
(Ref. Fig. 5) is intended for entering the tail
boom from the fuselage. The ladder is a riveted
structure. Its side uprights and four steps are
made of duralumin tubes. Installed on the lower and
upper ends of the ladders are rubberized end pieces
to prevent the ladder from slipping and to protect
the helicopter inside skin against damage.
The mass of the ladder is 4.8 kg.
NOTE: When using the ladder in the radio equipment
compartment, one of the workers should support
the ladder.
2.3.3 Maintenance stand for operation at main and tail,
rotors. The maintenance stand
(Ref. Fig. 6) is intended for the inspection of the
blades and for the operation at the tail rotor. The

012.10.00
Page 23
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
height of the operating platform above the ground
is 3160 mm. The dimension of the operating platform
is 630x630 mm. The mass of maintenance stand is
39 kg.
The maintenance stand (Ref. Fig. 7) consists of
front panel (1), rear panel (2), braces (3) and
platform (4). The front panel is made of duralumin
tubes interconnected with gussets with rivets.
Provided in the upper part of the panel are two eye
lugs for the attachment to operating platform (4)
and in the lower part - lugs protecting the
maintenance stand against slipping over the surface
against which it bears. Installed on the tubes are
eye lugs for securing braces (3) to them.
The front panel has a ladder, 400 mm wide, with the
step stage of 300 mm. The steps are made of
duralumin tubes with ribbing riveted to them to
avoid slipping.
The rear panel is made of duralumin tubes
interconnected with gussets. Provided in the upper
part of the panel are two eye lugs for the
attachment of operating platform (4) and in the
lower part - two forks to which wheels, 200x80 mm,
are secured.
The braces are intended for the attachment of the
front and rear panels, They are duralumin tubes
reduced at the ends. Provided at the ends of the
braces are fork-type ends for the attachment to the
eye lugs of the front and rear panels.
The platform is made of duralumin angles and tubes.
It has a form of a rectangle in the base. Provided
at the platform corners are lugs with the help of
which the platforms are connected with the front
and rear panels. The angles and lugs are
interconnected with duralumin sheet with beaded

012.10.00
Page 24
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
holes. The beaded holes are intended to prevent
slipping of a worker using the maintenance stand
for operation.
The platform is guarded from three sides. The guard
is made of duralumin tubes and is secured to the
lugs of the operating platform. From the side of
the ladder the guard has an axle and on the
opposite side - a bracket with the hole intended
for the installation of a safety rod.
Safety rod (5) is intended for protecting the
worker against falling. It is a duralumin tube one
end of which is provided with a lug and the other,
with a lock. The rod lug is secured to the axle
which is provided on the platform guard. With its
one end the rod bears against the bracket seat. The
lock button arranged in the bracket hole does not
allow the safety rod to fall out of the bracket.
For setting the rod to its inoperative position,
press the lock button and disengage the rod from
the bracket seat.
2.3.3а Maintenance stand for fueling
Maintenance stand for fueling (Fig. 7a) is intended
for fueling fuel tanks. The height of operation
platform over ground is 760 mm, operation platform
is 460x300 mm in dimension, mass of the stand is
11.5 kg. The stand consists of two parts which are
articulated. Each part of stand consists of right
(1), left (2) sides connected by sections (4), (6),
(8), flooring (5) and treads (3). In the lover part
there is a rubberized end piece (9) which avoid
sliding over surface on which it stands.
Treads (3) have flanged holes preventing slippage.
Flooring (5) is essentially a duralumin angle
pieces with knurling riveted to it to avoid

012.10.00
Page 25
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
slipping. In working position stand sides are drawn
apart at an angle of 30°.
Pins (7) serve to fix stand in working position.
They are installed in side sections 8.
In stowed position the stand is folded.
2.3.4 Mat-trolley for operation under fuselage. The mat-
trolley (Ref. Fig. 8) consists
of panel (1), brackets (2) and (3), axles (4) and
wheels (5). The panel is intended for carrying a
person who works under the fuselage. It is made as
a trough. To improve stiffness of the panel, it is
framed with a duralumin section. The panel has a
headrest for the convenience of a worker.
Riveted to the panel is a covering of sponged
rubber, 5.5 mm thick. The covering is protected
against wear by aviation povynol. The panel has
four duralumin brackets with holes for the wheel
axles. Brackets (2) and (3) are different in size
and height. As a result, the trolley is higher in
its nose.
Axle (4) is secured with its one end in the bracket
hole. Owing to a slant position of the wheel axles,
the trolley is capable of moving in any direction.
Wheels (5) are made of aluminum casting and their
rims are covered with rubber. The wheels are
secured to the trolley axle with nuts.
The trolley dimensions are 1560x650 mm.
The mass of the trolley is 7.5 kg.

012.10.00
Page 26
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Ladder for Climbing into Tail Boom

Figure 5

Installation of Maintenance Stand for Inspection of

Blades and for Operation at Tail Rotor
Figure 6

012.10.00
Page 27
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Front Panel 4 Platform

2 Rear Panel 5 Safety Rod
3 Braces

Maintenance Stand
Figure 7

012.10.00
Page 28
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Right Side 6 Section

2 Left Side 7 Pin
3 Tread 8 Section
4 Section 9 Rubberized End Piece
5 Flooring

Maintenance Stand for Fueling

Figure 7a

012.10.00
Page 29
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.4 Installation/Removal Equipment

2.4.1 Support for stowage of main rotor blades (Ref. Fig.
9). The cradles are used for stowage of the main
rotor blades on the ground.
The set consists of two cradles. Each cradle is a
truss welded of steel tubes, 30x1 mm in dia. Welded
to the truss is a cradle for five blades bent of
steel strip to suit the blade shape. To protect the
blade surface against damage, the cradles are glued
over with rubber and material "poncho".
One of the cradles is shaped as blade section №4
and marked "SECTION №4) and the other one is shaped
as blade section №15 and marked “SECTION №15”.
The cradles are not interchangeable.
To prevent rotor blades from damage during stowing
the cradles must be arranged in compliance with the
marking, strictly according to the blade section
types (4 and 15)
The dimensions of one cradle are 1220x585x735 ram.
The mass of the set of cradles is 26.6 kg.
2.4.2 The trolley for transportation of the main rotor
blades, The trolley (Ref. Fig. 10) is intended for
transportation of one set of the main rotor blades
about the airfield at a speed of up to 10 km/h. It
can also be used as a support during the
replacement of the blades on the helicopter.
Number of transported blades 5
Length of trolley with tow bar 11,500 mm
Track 1120 mm
Mass 140.625 kg

012.10.00
Page 30
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Panel
2 Bracket
3 Bracket
4 Axle
5 Wheel

Mat-Trolley for Operation under Fuselage

Figure 8

012.10.00
Page 31
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The trolley consists of the following main

elements: truss (5), cradles (4), locks (3),
adapter (2) and tow bar (1). Truss (5) is a welded
structure made of steel tubes, 30x1.5, 34x1.6 and
50x3 mm in dia. Welded to the truss are three
cradles with locks on the front cradle. Mounted on
the truss are two main wheels 500x125 mm and nose
twin wheels 300x125 mm. The nose upright of the
truss terminates in a flange which bears through
the detachable duralumin washer against the adapter
intended for the connection of the tow bar.
Box-shaped cradles (4) are made of a steel sheet,
1.5 mm thick, and glued over with rubber, 5 mm
thick, and material "poncho". The cradles are
stretched to suit the blade shape in sections
Nos 1, 12, 17.
Hinged locks (3) installed on the front cradle
protect the blades against falling out and moving
about the trolley during transportation. The lock
is made as a cover with a clamp. The cover is a
welded structure made of a steel sheet. Prom the
inside, it is glued over with rubber and material
"poncho". with its one end the cover is articulated
to the shaft of the bracket welded to one side of
the cradle. Articulated to the other side of the
cradle is a clamp which is imposed onto the cover.
When pressed by hand, the clamp turns and presses
the cover to the blade.
Steel adapter (2) is a T-piece in shape. One end is
installed in the nose upright of the truss and two
other receive the axle of the twin wheel. The
trolley nose wheels can turn through 360º.
Tow bar (1) is intended for towing the trolley
behind the truck or manually. It is a duralumin
tube, 60x2 mm, with a lug and an eyebar. The lug is

012.10.00
Page 32
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
used for the connection of the tow bar to the
adapter eyes whereas the eyebar, to the truck hook.
2.4.3 Sling for lifting main rotor blades.
The sling (Ref. Fig. 11) serves for lifting
(lowering) the main rotor blades with the help of
the crane during the installation and removal. The
sling is essentially two steel cables (3), 5 mm in
dia. With their one end the cables are secured by
the lugs to eyebar (2). One cable is connected to
the eyebar with, a bolt, nut and cotter pin and the
other, with a locking pin. Eyebar (2) is an
intermediate part for connection of cables (3) to
ring (1).
The ring is made of steel to be engaged with the
crane hook.
The other ends of cables (3) are connected with the
help of universal joints (5) with clamp (4). The
clamp consists of two halves articulated with a
bolt on the side of the blade tail and on the other
side they have a detachable joint. The clamp is
secured to the blade with the help of two eye bolts
with wing nuts.
The clamps are made of a duralumin sheet with
angles riveted to the edges to suit the shape of
the blade eighth section. Glued to the inner side
of the clamps is a rubber gasket to protect the
blades against damage.
The lifting capacity of the sling is 150 kgf. The
mass of the sling is 3.7 kg.
2.4.4 Sling for lifting swashplate assembly. The sling
(Ref. Fig. 12) serves for lifting (lowering) the
swashplate assembly by a crane. The sling is a
cable suspension made up of three steel cables (3),
5 mm in dia. Each cable (3) is secured with its lug

012.10.00
Page 33
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
with the help of a bolt, nut and eyebar (2) to
common ring (1) made of steel to suit the shape of
the crane hook.
With their other ends the cables attached to the
thimble are slipped over the circular grooves of
threaded bushings (4). In this case, secured to one
bushing is the thimble of one cable and to the
other, the thimbles of two cables. The threaded
bushings are fully driven into the outer ring of
the universal joint of the swash-plate assembly.
Por supporting the slide guide against falling out,
installed into the hole of the swashplate assembly
flange in lifting is a retainer which is secured to
the chain slipped over the threaded bushing. To
protect the swashplate assembly against damage,
rubber hoses are slipped over the cables.
The lifting capacity of the sling is 140 kgf. The
mass of the sling is 1.46 kg.
2.4.5 The sling for lifting main rotor hub and hydraulic
unit. The sling (Ref. Fig: 13) serves for lifting
(lowering) the main rotor hub and hydraulic unit
with the help of the crane. The sling is a cable
suspension made of five steel cables, 5 mm in dia.
Bach cable is secured with its lug with the help of
a bolt, nut and eyebar (2) to common steel ring (1)
to suit the crane hook. With other lugs the cables
are connected to universal joints (6) which are
secured with locking pins (5) by special eye-bolts
(4) driven into the threaded holes on the main
rotor hub. The cable lugs can also be secured with
the help of locking pins (5) by the eyes on the
hydraulic unit.
For lifting the main rotor hub, use is made of all
five cables, for lifting the hydraulic unit, three
cables.

012.10.00
Page 34
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Lifting capacity of the sling is 650 kgf.
The sling mass is 1.26 kg.
2.4.6 The sling for lifting the tail boom pylon.
The sling (Ref. Fig. 14) serves for lifting
(lowering) the tail boom pylon with the help of the
crane. The sling is a cable suspension of two steel
cables (3), 5 mm in dia. With their lugs cables (3)
are secured with the help of bolts, nuts and
eyebars (2) to common steel ring (1) for the crane
hook. With their other ends the cables are secured
with the help of bolts, nuts and eyebars to the
rings of clamps (4). The clamps are intended for
the attachment of the sling to the tail boom pylon.

Support for Stowage of Main Rotor Blades

Figure 9

012.10.00
Page 35
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Tow Bar

2 Adapter

4 Cradle

5 Truss
3 Lock

Trolley for Transportation of Main Rotor Blades

Figure 10

012.10.00
Page 36
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Ring
2 Eye bar
3 Cables with Lugs
4 Clamp
5 Universal Joint

Sling for Lifting Main Rotor Blades

Figure 11

012.10.00
Page 37
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Each clamp consists of two duralumin clamps. In

their upper part the clamps are connected with the
ring used for the attachment of the clamp to the
cable lug. Secured to the lower part of the clamp
to one of its halves is a swinging bolt and riveted
to the other part is a bracket for securing a
special nut.
The nut is a threaded bushing. In its operating
position the switching bolt is driven into the nut
and brings together the both halves of the clamp.
To protect the tail boom pylon against damage,
glued to the inner side of the clamp is rubber.
Lifting capacity of the sling is 50 kgf.
The sling mass is 2.72 kg.
2.4.7 Sling for lifting the tail boom complete with tail
boom pylon. The sling (Ref. Fig. 15) is intended
for assembly or disassembly of the tail boom
(complete with the tail boom pylon) with or from
the fuselage with the help of the crane. The sling
is a cable suspension of three steel cables (3), 5
mm in dia. With its lug each cable is secured with
the help of a bolt, nut and eyebar (2) to common
steel ring (1) for the crane hook. With their other
lugs the cables are connected through universal
joints (4) to clamps (5), two of which are secured
to the tail boom at Frames Mo. 8 and No. 16,
whereas the third clamp, to the casing of the tail
rotor gear box. The middle cable has turnbuckle (6)
for adjustment of the cable length during assembly
or disassembly of the tail boom with or from the
fuselage.
Each clamp (5) consists of two duralumin halves the
upper parts of which are connected by the axle of
universal joint (4). The lower halves of the clamps
have a bracing device made up of a swinging bolt
with the tommy-bar-nut. To protect the tail boom
and the tail boom pylon, as well as the tail rotor

012.10.00
Page 38
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
gear box casing against damage, rubber is glued to
the inner surfaces of the clamps.
During disassembly or assembly of the tail boom,
remove the tail rotor blades or complete tail
rotor, reliably tighten the clamps, as well as lift
the tail boom with the crane of the minimum lifting
capacity of 1000 kgf and of the crane height of not
less than 5 mm. During disassembly and assembly,
support the boom ends with hands. The lifting
capacity of the sling is 320 kgf. The sling mass is
9 kg.
2.4.8 Sling for lifting the tail rotor gear box. The
sling (Ref. Fig. 16) is intended for lifting
(lowering) the tail rotor gear box with the help of
the crane during installation and removal on the
tail boom pylon. The sling consists of steel cable
(4) with lugs (3). Connected to end lug of the
cable with the help of eyebar (5) is ring (6) for
the crane hook. Connected to the other lug of the
cable is snap-hook (2) by which the sling is
attached to eye (1) on the tail rotor gear box.
The lifting capacity of the sling is 100 kgf. The
sling mass is 1.172 kg.
2.4.8а. Vibration Damper Hoist Sling
НО-9923-00/NO-9923-00 sling serves to lift (lower)
the vibration damper (3) (see fig. 16а) using crane
during its installation and removal. The sling (1)
represents hoist sling made of three rings sewn of
ЛТКМ-27-1600/LТКМ-27-1600 orange caprone tape (7).
There is ring (6) put on each tape.
Ring (5) made of 30ХГСА steel is installed under
crane hook.
Placard (4) with data is glued on the ring.
The slings are put on three hubs (2) (see fig. 1)

012.10.00
Page 39
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Sling capacity is 90kg.
Sling weight is 1,144kg
2.4.9 Yoke for lifting the tail rotor hub. The yoke
serves for lifting (lowering) the tail rotor hub
with the help of the crane. The yoke (Ref. Fig. 17)
is made of steel. For lifting or lowering the tail
rotor hub, couple yoke (3) with help of locking pin
(2) with one of the holes in the hub connecting
bar. To avoid damage to the surfaces of holes in
the hub connecting bar, the locking pin is made of
duralumin.
The lifting capacity of the yoke is 150 kgf.
The yoke mass is 0.78 kg.
2.4.10 Trolley for transportation and preliminary
assembly of the engine. The trolley (Ref. Fig. 18)
is intended for transportation and preliminary
assembly of engine TB3-117MT, ТВ3-117BM and
TB2-117.
Trolley wheelbase 2280 mm
Track 1120 mm
Tow bar length 2200 mm
Trolley mass 81 kg
Transportation speed of trolley- 6 km/h, max.
mounted engine
The trolley consists of the following main parts:
truss (1), front retainer (5), rear clamp (3) and
tow bar (7). Truss (1) is a welded structure made
of steel tubes, 30x1 and 50x3 mm in dia. Welded to
the truss uprights are supports - one in the front
and two in the rear. In the nose part, the truss
terminates with the upright to which the axle of
wheels, 300x125 mm, is secured. The upright is
provided with a bushing to which tow bar (7) is

012.10.00
Page 40
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Ring
2 Eye bar
3 Cables with Lugs
4 Treaded Bushing
5 Guides Slide retainer

Sling for Lifting Swash Assembly

Figure 12

012.10.00
Page 41
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Ring
2 Eye bars
3 Cables
4 Eye-Bolt
5 Locking Pin
6 Universal Joint

Sling for Lifting Main Rotor Hub and Hydraulic Unit

Figure 13

012.10.00
Page 42
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Ring
2 Eye bar
3 Cable with Lugs
4 Clamp

Sling for Lifting Tail Boom

Figure 14

012.10.00
Page 43
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Ring
2 Eye bar
3 Cable with Lugs
4 Universal Joint
5 Clamp
6 Turnbuckle

Sling for Lifting Tail Boom in Assembly with

Tail Boom Pylon
Figure 15

012.10.00
Page 44
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Eye
2 Snap-Hook
3 Lug
4 Cable
5 Eye bar
6 Ring

Sling for Lifting Tail Rotor Rear Box

Figure 16

012.10.00
Page 45
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Sling 5 Ring
2 Hub 6 Ring
3 Vibration damper 7 Caprone tape
4 Placard

Vibration damper hoist sling

Fig. 16а

012.10.00
Page 46
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Limit Plates 8-200

2 Locking Pin
3 Yoke

Yoke for Lifting Tail Rotor Hub

Figure 17

012.10.00
Page 47
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Truss 5 Front Retainer

2 Rest 6 Truss Support
3 Rear Clamp 7 Tow Bar
4 Lug

Trolley for transportation and Preliminary

assembly of Engine
Figure 18

012.10.00
Page 48
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
secured for transportation of the trolley by a
truck or manually. In the rear the truss terminates
with a tube to which two trunnions are welded.
Installed on the trunnions are wheels, 500x125 mm.
Front retainer (5) is a mandrel made of steel. Each
side of the mandrel has one flange. The mandrel is
secured to truss support (6) in which it can move
along the trolley axle. A flange .of a smaller
diameter is intended for the attachment of engine
TB3-H7BM whereas the flange of a larger diameter,
for the attachment of engine TB2-117. The both
flanges have engine mounts. The engine is secured
to the flange with six bolts.
Rear clamp (3) is made of a duralumin tube, 40x1.5
mm in dia., it is essentially an arc to the end of
which T-pieces are riveted. Installed in the T-
piece holes are two lugs (4). Both lugs can move
horizontally. The free ends of the lugs are secured
to rests (2) of the rear uprights of the truss.
Lugs (4) are connected to the engine eyes with the
help of quick-detachable pins, 8 mm in dia.
Tow bar (7) is made of a duralumin tube, 60x2 mm in
dia. Riveted to one end of the tube is an eyebar
made as a loop. It is intended for the engagement
of the tow bar with the truck hook. Riveted to the
other end is a lug for the connection of the tow
bar to the trolley.
2.4.11 Support for main gear box (8AT-9906-00). The
support (Ref. Fig. 19) is intended for the
installation and removal of units on the main gear
box.
Length of support (less tow bar) 1750 mm
Width 1270 mm
Height (in traveling position) 635 mm

012.10.00
Page 49
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Travel of adjustment screws 140 mm

Transportation speed of empty support 6 km/h, max.
Mass 70.1 kg
The support consists of the following main parts:
truss (1)(Ref. Fig. 19), adapter (2), rests (3) and
(4), stops (5), pins (6), adjustment screws (7),
tow bar (8).
Truss (1) is welded of steel tubes, 40x1.5 and
50x1.5 mm in dia. The truss base is a rectangle. It
is connected with the braces to the ring, 920 mm in
dia. Welded to the ring are four guide bushings for
rests (3) and (4). Welded to the corners of the
truss base are four tubular uprights with the
brackets for securing stops (5). Welded to the
lower part of each upright are guide bushings for
adjustment screws (7).
Provided on the truss base on each side are box-
shaped brackets terminating in bushings in which
the wheel axles are installed.
The wheel dimensions are 200x800 mm.
In its front the truss has an upright terminated in
a flange. Via the duralumin washer the flange bears
against adapter (2) cast of steel. The adapter has
s shape of a T-piece one end of which is connected
to the front upright whereas two other ends bear
two wheels, 200x80 mm. The front wheels of the
support can turn through 360°. The adapter has an
eye for the attachment of tow bar (8).
CAUTION: THE WHEELS INSTALLED ON THE SUPPORT ARE
INTENDED FOR TRANSPORTATION OF AN EMPTY
TROLLEY ONLY. TRANSPORTATION OF THE TROLLEY
WITH THE GEAR BOX MOUNTED ON IT IS NOT
TOLERATED.

012.10.00
Page 50
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Truss 5 Stop
2 Adapter 6 Pin
3 Rest 7 Adjustment Screw
4 Rest 8 Tow Bar

Support for Main Gear Box

Figure 19
Rest (3) (two pieces) is a steel screw with a
keyslot. Welded to the upper part of the screw is a
cradle against which the projection of the gear box
casing bears. As the nut is rotated by the hand
wheel, the screw is set to motion. The screw is
retained from rotation by a key which is secured to
the guide bushing. The screw is held from a full
come out of the bushing by a locking ring installed

012.10.00
Page 51
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
in the annular groove of the screw. The cradle made
to suit the shape of the gear box projection is
made of a steel sheet, 2 mm thick, glued over with
rubber, 5 mm thick, and aviation canvas.
Rest (4) is made up of two screws with spherical
end pieces welded to them for supporting the
cradle. As the nut is rotated by the hand wheel the
screw is set to motion as with rests (3). The
cradle glued over with rubber and material "poncho"
has a shape to suit the protection on the main gear
box casing. So, the adjustment of the position of
the main gear box in height is carried out at the
expense of rests (3) and (4).
Pour stops (5) are intended for the installation of
mounting feet of the gear box mount. They are
secured by the eyes with the help of two bolts to
the brackets on the truss. The stops are secured to
the brackets so that the plane drawn through four
flanges of the rests is the bearing plane of the
main gear box. The stops have holes for locking
pins (6). Steel pin (6) has a flange with which it
presses the foot of the gear box mount to the
flange of atop (5). The pin is held against falling
out by the locking pin.
Before the operation, the support should be
installed on the rests of adjustment screws (7) so
that the clearance between the ground surface and
the wheels is not less than 20 mm.
Adjustment screw (7) is made of steel. It has a
keyslot owing to which it is capable of moving
along the axis as the hand wheel is being rotated.
The screw is held from rotation by a key installed
in the guide bushing. The screw terminates in a
spherical end piece. The end piece is equipped with
the duraluminium base which is used to transfer

012.10.00
Page 52
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
weight pressure of the support and the main gear
box installed thereon to the ground. During
transportation of the empty support the adjustment
screws should be lifted into the uprights as far as
they will go.
The empty support is towed by a truck with the help
of tow bar (8). The tow bar is made of a duralumin
tube, 60x2 mm. On one end, the tube is provided
with an eyebar and on the other end, with a lug.
The eyebar is used to couple the
tow bar with the truck hook. The lug welded of
steel is secured to the eyes of adapter (2) with
the aid of the bolt.
2.4.12 Wheel tyre puller СШ-07 (Ref. Fig. 20) is designed
to pull wheel tyres of the nose and main landing
gear. It consists of body (1), eye screws (2),
adjustment screws (3) and center axle (4) with
detachable bushings.
To remove the wheel tyre, insert detachable
bushings in the wheel hub holes
from both sides. Pass the axle through the
detachable bushing holes. Attached to the axle are
all fixture with eye and adjustment screws. Mate
the puller together with adjustment and eye screws
to the center axle. Place the aluminim spacers on
the wheel tyre. To remove the wheel tyre
completely, apply force with the help of eye screws
to the spacers.
To remove the wheels tyres of different diameters,
adjust the eye screws with the use of adjustment
screws (3).
The wheel tyre puller mass is 12 kg.

012.10.00
Page 53
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.4.13 Spreader for the engine lifting (Ref. Fig. 21) is
designed to lift (lower) the engine with the use of
the crane during its assembly and disassembly. The
spreader is essentially a welded frame made of
steel tubes with the set of the cable suspension
consisting of three upper and four lower steel
cables, 5 mm in dia.
The cable ends are attached to the lugs. The frame
has the units for securing the cable lugs. The
attachment of the cable lugs to the frame units is
performed via the universal joints. The ring made
of steel for the crane hook is connected to the
lugs of the three upper cables via the eyebars.
Secured to the lugs of the front lower cables via
the universal joints are the brackets for the
attachment of the spreader to the eyes on the
engine front flange. Secured to the ends of the
rear lower cables are the snap hooks for the
attachment of the spreader to the eyes on the
casing of the free turbine nozzle guide vanes.
The lifting capacity of the spreader is 500 kgf.
The spreader mass is 10.4 kg.
2.4.14 Fixture for lifting main gear box (8AT-9942-00).
The fixture (Ref. Fig. 22) is intended for lifting
(lowering) the main gear box during its
installation and removal with the help of the
crane. The fixture consists of eye-nut (1), bolt
(2), plate (3), screws (4) and (6), pin (5), nut
(7), and plug (8).
For installing the fixture onto the main gear box
shaft, proceed as follows:
drive special auxiliary nut (7) onto the main gear
box shaft as far as it will go;

012.10.00
Page 54
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
lock the not with pin (5) with the help of plate
(3) and screws (4) and (6);
drive in the screws of the eye-nut so that they
allow to slip eye-nut over nut (7);
slip the eye-nut over nut (7); in so doing, check
to see that its projections enter the slots of the
shaft nut;
turn the eye-nut in either side so that bolts (2)
face the slots of nut (7); after that, turn screws
(6) until they bear against the shell of eye-nut.
In the fixture storage, stop the thread on nut (7)
with special threaded plug (8). The eye-nut should
be assembled with parts (3), (4), (5), (6), (7) and
(8).
The lifting capacity of the fixture is 7500 kgf.
The mass of the fixture is 12.62 kg.
2.4.15 Eyebar for installation of landing gear wheel tube
(B-0099-587).
The eyebar (Ref. Fig. 23) serves for the
installation of the landing gear wheel tube. It is
a steel cable (7x7-2) made as a loop over which a
bowden sheathing is slipped. A free end of the
cable is attached to the threaded lug.
During the installation of the tube, the eyebar lug
is engaged with the hole of the wheel rim and
driven into the tube nipple, then pulled outside to
make the tube occupy a definite position.
The eyebar mass is 0.1 kg.

012.10.00
Page 55
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Puller Body
2 Cargo Screw
3 Adjustment Screw
4 Center Axle with Detachable Bushings
5 Wheel Hub
6 Wheel Tyre

Tire Puller СШ-07

Figure 20

012.10.00
Page 56
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Spreader for Lifting Engine

Figure 21

012.10.00
Page 57
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Eye-Nut
2 Bolt
3 Plate
4 Screw
5 Pin
6 Locking Screw
7 Nut
8 Plug

Fixture for Lifting Main Gear Box

Figure 22

Eyebar for Installing Landing Gear wheel inner Tube

Figure 23

012.10.00
Page 58
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.4.16 Spreader for lifting engine АИ-9В. The spreader

(Ref. Fig. 24) serves for installation and removal
of engine АИ-9В on and from the helicopter with the
help of the crane. Spreader (1) is a welded frame
made of steel tubes, 20 mm in dia., with steel eyes
(2) welded to the corners for securing cables (3).
The cables ends are terminated in lugs (4).
Secured to the top of the frame with the help of
steel pins is a sling for lifting the main rotor
hub and hydraulic unit (8AT-9921-00) whereas to the
bottom with the help of steel bolts and nuts, three
cables, 3.6 mm in dia., two of which are 420 mm
long and one, 300 mm long.
The lower cables are secured to the engine with the
help of steel locking pins (5).
The lifting capacity of the spreader is 90 kgf.
The spreader mass is 2.2 kg.
2.4.17 Fixture for installation and removal of main wheel
bearings. The fixture (Ref. Fig. 25) is intended
for installation and removal of the landing gear
main wheel bearings. It consists of steel
cylindrical guide (5), two screws (9) and (10) with
trapezoidal thread, collet (8) and cone (7). Welded
to the outer side of the guide at an angle of 120°
are steel eyes for securing three steel clamps (6).
The fixture mass is 7.5 kg.
2.4.18 Mat for detachable part of dust protection device.
The mat is intended for stowing the detachable part
of the dust protection device in the course of
inspection of the dust protection device. The mat
is made of polyurethane foam and covered with
aviation tarpaulin. The mat dimensions are
600x600 mm.
The mat mass is 1.45 kg.

012.10.00
Page 59
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.5 Servicing Accessories
2.5.1 20-ltr can for oil. The can (Ref. Fig. 26) is
intended for keeping oil. It consists of body (1),
two handles (2) and plug (3). Each can should keep
oil of .one grade only.
The can capacity is 20 ltr.
The can mass is 4 kg.
2.5.2 Funnel for filling oil. The funnel (Ref. Fig. 27)
is used for filling oil Б-3В into the oil tanks of
the engine and main gear box if the oil servicing
truck is not available.
The funnel consists of body (1) to which a pouring
lip and a handle are welded. Installed into the
funnel is filter (2) having a frame covered with a
mesh with the cell size of 0.180 mm.
CAUTION: NEVER USE THE FUNNEL WITHOUT FILTER.
After filling oil, wash and dry the filter. Keep
the funnel clean in a special container.
The funnel capacity is 400 cm3.
The funnel mass is 0.25 kg.
2.5.3 Funnel for filling oil АМГ-10. The funnel (Ref.
Fig. 28) serves for filling oil АМГ-10 into
helicopter hydraulic system tank.
The funnel has a body with a pouring lip and a
handle, and two filters. One filter is covered with
mesh, 80/720, serge woven, the other, a cambric
one.
CAUTION: NEVER USE THE PUMMEL WITHOUT FILTER.
After oiling, wash the funnel, allow it to dry and
keep in a special container.
The funnel capacity is 300 cm3.
The funnel mass is 0.5 kg.

012.10.00
Page 60
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Spreader 4 Lug
2 Eye 5 Locking Pin
3 Cable 6 Frame View

Spreader for Lifting Engine АИ-9В

Figure 24

012.10.00
Page 61
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Screw
2 Cover
3 Ring
4 Ring
5 Guide
6 Clamp
7 Cone
8 Сollet
9 Screw
10 Screw
11 Bushing

Fixture for Installation and Removal

of Main Wheel Bearings
Figure 25

012.10.00
Page 62
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Body
2 Handle
3 Plug

20 –ltr Can for Oil

Figure 26

1 Body
2 Filter

Funnel for Filling Oil

Figure 27

012.10.00
Page 63
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.5.4 Funnel for filling fuel. Funnel ОСТ 1 10892-73

(Ref. Fig. 29) serves for filling
fuel tanks with kerosene when the refueler is not
available. The funnel consists of body (1) with a
pouring lip and handle welded to it and filter (2).
The frame, is covered with serge-woven mesh,
80/720.
In filling the tanks with kerosene, NEVER remove
the filter.
After filling, wash the funnel, allow it to dry and
keep in a special container.
The funnel capacity is 1500 cm3.
The funnel mass is 1.26 kg.
2.5.5 Oil can for filling oil into intermediate and tail
rotor gear boxes. The oil can (Ref. Fig. 30) serves
for filling hypoid oil into the tail and
intermediate gear boxes. The oil can has a body
with a pouring lip and cover, two handles and a
filter. The filter frame is covered with a l.0xl.0-
mm mesh. The pouring lip of the oil can is closed
with the cap.
After oiling, wash the oil can, allow it to dry and
keep in a special container.
The oil can capacity is 2 ltr.
The oil can mass is 0.74 kg.
2.5.6 Bucket with pouring tip for 10 ltr of oil. The
bucket (Ref. Fig. 31) serves for bringing oil to
the helicopter units during the helicopter
maintenance. The bucket is made of galvanized iron.
It has a cover protecting the bucket against
foreign objects. There is a pouring lip on the
bucket for convenience of draining oil from the
bucket. The bucket bow is made of steel.

012.10.00
Page 64
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The amount of oil in the bucket is determined with
the help of the dipstick. The bucket capacity is 10
Itr. The bucket mass is 1.7 kg.
The helicopter ground equipment set includes three
buckets ОСТ 1 10885-73 for oil, oil АМГ-10 and for
fuel.
2.5.7 Pan for collecting oil. The pan (Ref. Fig. 32) is
intended for collecting oil in the removal of the
oil filter of the main gear box for washing.
She pan mass is 0.42 kg.
2.5.8 Container for keeping servicing accessories at
parking. The container (Ref. Fig. 33) serves for
keeping the servicing accessories at parking. The
container is a riveted structure made of duralumin
sheet and shaped sections. It is installed on
sledges. The sledges are provided with clamps
intended for lifting the container with the crane.
Riveted to the RH wall of the container outside is
a flange. The front wall of the container is made
as doors. The side walls have clamps intended for
tying down the container during transportation.
The mass of the container is 118.23 kg.
2.6 Servicing Equipment of Separate Systems and Units
2.6.1 Driving arm for turning main rotor blades and
turning helicopter. The driving arm (Ref. Fig. 34)
for turning the main rotor blades consists of lug
(1) and grip (2) with ring (3). For turning the
main rotor blades, install the driving arm on the
tie-down pin of the main rotor blade.
For turning the helicopter, install sling (3) (Ref.
Fig. 35) on the driving arm. With the one end,
secure the sling to lug (1) by quick-detachable pin
(2).

012.10.00
Page 65
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Body
2 Filter

Funnel for Filling Oil AMГ-10

Figure 28

1 Body
2 Filter

Funnel for Filling Fuel

Figure 29

012.10.00
Page 66
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Handle 4 Handle
2 Cover 5 Body
3 Filter 6 Cap

Oil Can for Filling Hypoid Oil into Tail

and Intermediate Gear Boxes
Figure 30

10-ltr Bucket with Pouring Lip for Oil

Figure 31

012.10.00
Page 67
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Pan for Oil Collecting

Figure 32

Container for Keeping Servicing Accessories at Parking

Figure 33

012.10.00
Page 68
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Throw the other sling end over the tail boom at the
joint of the tail boom (Frame No. 17) to the tail
boom pylon and fix it in position by quick-
detachable pin (2) to the sling end. After that
turn the helicopter.
The mass of the driving arm is 2.8 kg.
2.6.2 Fixture for slipping covers over main rotor blades.
The fixture (Ref. Fig. 36) is intended for slipping
covers over the main rotor blades. It consists of
tube (2) and rope (1). Tube (2) is a duralumin 450-
mm long tube made to suit the blade outline. It has
two steel lugs, one of which is movable used for
the adjustment of the tube length. Riveted to the
lugs are stops to which the blade cover is secured
by laces. Ropes (1) are attached to the lugs, they
serve for spreading the cover over the main rotor
blade.
The fixture mass is 0.6 kg.
2.6.3 Hose for draining fuel into refueler. The hose
(Ref. Figs 37, 38) serves for draining fuel from
the helicopter fuel system into the refueler. The
hose (Ref. Fig. 38) consists of the following main
parts: plug (1), nipple (2), sleeve (3), ring (4),
hose (5), bushing (6), clamp (7), hose (8) and
plug (9).
Nipple (2) made of steel connects the hose expanded
on it with the helicopter-mounted fuel drain
connection. The upper part of the nipple is made
for the drain valve connection. It has a groove for
the packing ring. Welded to the nipple are two
steel rods and ring (4). The outer surface of the
nipple lower part is threaded.

012.10.00
Page 69
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Lug
2 Grip
3 Ring

Driving Arm for Turning Main Rotor Blades

Figure 34

012.10.00
Page 70
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Lug
2 Quick –Detachable Pin
3 Sling

I Port Side View

II Forward View
III Frames Nos 15 to 17. Axes of Frames

Driving Arm for Turning Helicopter

Figure 35

012.10.00
Page 71
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Rope
2 Tube
3 Cover
4 Blade

Fixture for Slipping Covers over Main Rotor Blades

Figure 36

012.10.00
Page 72
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Adapter Hose
4 Refueler
1 Nipple
2 Hose

Draining Fuel from Helicopter into Refueler

Figure 37

012.10.00
Page 73
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8 Adapter Hose
6 Bushing
7 Clamps

9 Plug
2 Nipple
3 Sleeve
1 Plug

4 Ring
5 Hose

Hose for Draining Fuel from Helicopter

Figure 38

012.10.00
Page 74
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Hose (5) (2У-28-15) is secured to the nipple with

sleeve (3). Jointed to hose (5) with the help of
bushing (6) and clamps (7) is adapter hose (3У-42-
15) to which a lug applied to the refueler is
connected. With the union nut the lug is connected
to the refueler connection.
For protecting the hose against contamination in
storage, duralumin plug (1) is fitted onto the
nipple upper part and plug (9) is installed in the
hose free end plug (1) is chained to the nipple
body whereas plug (9) is chained to the clamp
installed some 600 mm away from the adapter hose
end.
The hose length is 6.4 m.
The hose mass is 6.0 kg.
2.6.4 Hose for draining oil from the main, intermediate
and tail rotor gear boxes.
The hose (Ref. Fig. 39) is intended for draining
oil from the main, intermediate and tail gear
boxes. It is also used in the fixture for
collecting oil during the removal of the filter of
the main gear box.
The hose consists of hose (3), unit (1) and through
connection (4). The hose incorporates two parts,
each two meters long. The hose parts are
interconnected with the help of a duralumin sleeve.
The hose ends slipped over the sleeve are secured
by binding wire. One hose end is slipped over unit
(1) and the other, over through connection (4). The
hose ends slipped over the unit and through
connection are also secured with binding wire.
Unit (1) made of duralumin is used for the
connection of the hose with the drain hole in the
valve body instead of the magnetic plug .removed

012.10.00
Page 75
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
for draining oil from the gear box. Made on the
unit outer surface are two grooves for packing
rings and two holes for pins (2) (as in case with
magnetic plug). The unit is installed into the hole
in the valve body in this case, pin (2) enters the
groove and as the unit is turned, provides a
reliable connection, as well as opening of the
valve to allow the oil to flow out of the gear box
case. For turning the unit during installation of
the hose, knurling is made on the unit flange.
Through connection (4) serves for the protection of
the hose inner space against contamination in
storage when the hose is coiled and the unit is
installed in the through connection which has a
slot for pin (2).
The hose mass is 1.6 kg.
2.6.5 Hose for draining oil from the engine oil tank. The
hose (Ref. Fig. 40) is intended for draining oil
from the engine oil tank. It consists of two or
three hoses (1) (1V12-15), 12 mm in inner dia. The
hoses are interconnected with the help of tube (3).
The point of connection is secured with two layers
of binding (2) of material "poncho". The tube and
binding in the points of connection are secured
with cement 88H.
Installed in one end of the hose is tube (4), the
other hose end is slipped over the connection of
the oil tank drain valve. In storage the hose is
coiled and its ends are mated (one hose end is
installed in its other end with tube (4)).
The hose mass is 1.8 kg.

012.10.00
Page 76
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4 Through Connection
1 Unit

3 Hose
2 Pin

Hose for Draining Oil from Main Gear Box

Figure 39

012.10.00
Page 77
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Hose 3 Tube
2 Binding 4 Tube

Hose for Draining Oil from Engine Oil Tank

Figure 40
2.6.6 Fixture for collecting oil during removal of main
gear box filter. The fixture (Ref. Fig. 41) serves
for the collection of oil during removal of the
main gear box filter. It consists of funnel (1),
hose (2), T-piece (4) and support (5). Used as hose
(2) is hose (8AT-9918-00) for draining oil from the
main gear box.
The funnel is intended for the collection of oil.
It is made of rubber mix which facilitates its
installation under the hole with the filter
removed. Hose (2) is secured to the T-piece through
cup (6). T-piece (4) is made of steel whereas
support (5), of rubber mix.
At the point of installation, the fixture is fixed
with the help of hook (3) made of steel which is
engaged with the bracket on the fire-fighting
system pipe.
The fixture mass is 3 kg.
2.6.7 Hoses for charging and checking pressure in landing
gear wheels, helicopter pneumatic system, shock
struts and hydraulic accumulators from the ground
and airborne bottles. The set of hoses (Ref. Fig.
42) incorporates the following main parts: hose (1)

012.10.00
Page 78
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
for charging item with air; lug (5) for charging
helicopter pneumatic system; unit (2) for charging
and checking pressure in the wheel tyres; unit (4)
for filling and checking pressure in the landing
gear shock struts and hydraulic accumulator; unit
(3) for charging from the helicopter bottle. The
hoses and units (Ref. Figs 43, 44) are stowed into
the case.
The hose (Ref. Fig. 45) for charging with air
consists of two hoses, 2 m long, and one hose, 0.4
m long. Besides, the said hoses, the hose set
includes: air filter 442, pressure reducing valve
669300 (6-14), valve with the pressure gauge. One
end of the hose has a union nut for the connection
to the ground air bottle and the other, for the
connection of detachable units.
The hose mass is 7.7 kg.
2.6.8 Lever-plunger grease gun Ш-l. The grease gun (Ref.
Fig. 46) serves for forcing grease and thick oils
into different unit parts through grease cups. The
grease gun consists of the following main parts: a
cylinder with covers, rod with piston, lever with
plunger and hose with nozzle.
For filling the grease gun cylinder cavity with
grease, remove the upper cover and take out the rod
with piston. After filling, install the rod into
the cylinder and turn on the cover. Then, rotate
the rod handle to remove a taper spring for
building up piston pressure on the grease. Install
the hose nozzle into the grease cup and push down
the lever to make the plunger force the grease from
the cylinder lower part. The grease will be fed as
long as the taper spring is compressed. To continue
grease feeding, turn the rod handle again and
compress the spring.
The mass of the grease gun is 0.56 kg.

012.10.00
Page 79
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

I Bucket from Ground Equipment Set

5 Support
6 Cup

4 T-Connection
1 Funnel
2 Hose

3 Hook

Fixture for Collecting Oil During Removal

of Main Gear Box Filter
Figure 41

012.10.00
Page 80
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.6.5a Suction pipe oil drain hose 245-9969-00

Suction pipe oil drain hose 245-9969-00 (Fig. 41a)
consists of two sleeves (7) and (13) with inner
diameter of 26 mm each, drain valve (5), adapter
(6), ground valve - adapter (9), two plugs (10),
nipple (2), strap (8) and buckle (12), used when
storing the hose coiled.
Nipple (2) connects sleeve (13), rolled in it, with
helicopter oil drain outlet and has a seal ring
groove.
Sleeve (13) is attached to nipple (2) with coupling
(3) and to drain valve (5) with clamp (4).
Sleeve (7) at one end is attached to adapter (6)
with coupling (16), and at the other end to the
valve - adapter (9) through coupling (15).
To prevent the hose from contamination while
storing both nipples are to be plugged with plugs
(1) and (10).
Plug (1) is attached to coupling (3) with cable
(14), and plug (10) is attached to valve-adapter
(9) with cable (11).
Hose length is 1.7 m.
Hose mass is 1.52 kg.

012.10.00
Page 81
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh

Figure 41a
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Plug 5 Drain 9 Ground End Valve 13 Sleeve

2 Nipple 6 Adapter 10 Plug 14 Cable

Suction Pipe Oil Drain Hose 245-9969-00

3 Coupling 7 Sleeve 11 Cable 15 Coupling

4 Clamp 8 Strap 12 Buckle 16 Coupling

March 31/11
012.10.00
Page 82
 Figure 42
1 Hose for Charging Item with Air I Charging Nose Wheel from
Helicopter Bottle
Mi-171Sh

2 Unit for Charging and Checking Pressure in II Charging Landing Gear Wheels

Helicopter Bottles
Pneumatic Units
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Unit for Charging from Helicopter Bottle III Charging Shock Section of Main
Landing Gear
4 Unit for Charging and Checking Pressure in IV Charging Shock Strut of Nose
Landing Gear Shock Struts and in Hydraulic Landing Gear

Hydraulic Accumulators from Ground and

5 Unit for Charging Helicopter Pneumatic V Charging Helicopter Pneumatic
System System
VI Filling Hydraulic Accumulator

VII Charging Main Landing Gear

Wheels, in Helicopter Rheumatic System, Shock Strut and

Hose for Charging and Checking Pressure in Landing Gear
Wheel from Helicopter Bottle

March 31/11
012.10.00
Page 83
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Nipple
2 Cut-Off Needle
3 Pressure Gauge
4 Cap
5 Pipeline
6 Plug

Unit for Charging and Checking Pressure in Landing Gear

Shock Struts and in Hydraulic Accumulator
Figure 43

012.10.00
Page 84
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Union Nut
2 Body
3 Needle Pressure Gauge
4 Nut
5 Screw with Handle
6 Cap
7 Plug

Unit for Charging from Helicopter Bottle

Figure 44

012.10.00
Page 85
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Union Nut 5 Pressure Regulator 669300

2 Hose 6 Valve with Pressure Gauge
3 Air Filter 7 Hose
4 Hose
Hose from Charging with Air
Figure 45

012.10.00
Page 86
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Hose
2 Lever
3 Rod
4 Cylinder

Lever-Plunger grease Gun Ш-1 with Retrofitting B9917-100

Figure 46

012.10.00
Page 87
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Tube
2 Lever
3 Rod
4 Body

Modified Grease Gun

Figure 47

012.10.00
Page 88
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.6.9 Modified grease gun. The grease gun (Ref. Fig. 47)
serves for filling different parts and units with
grease. It consists of a cylinder with covers, rod
with piston, lever with plunger and tube with
nozzle.
Additionally applied to the grease gun are: the
hose made ace. Dwg B9917-100 used for forcing oil
into the oil cups in hard-to-reach places. The hose
is installed on the grease gun instead of the tube
with nozzle; the nozzle made ace. Dwg В9917-101
used for greasing the points where grease fittings
are not available (through counter bored holes).
The nozzle is installed on the grease gun on the
tube end with nozzle instead of an earlier
installed nozzle.
For filling in the grease gun with the grease, turn
out the cover-head with the plunger and lever by
turning the handle to disengage the nut thread from
the rod. To prevent air from getting into the
cylinder in filling the grease gun with grease,
bring the piston flush with the cylinder edge.
Under the pressure of grease filled in the grease
gun, the piston makes a full backstroke, after
that, the handle of the cover-head with the plunger
and lever are screwed on the grease gun cylinder.
Bring the nut thread into the engagement with the
rod thread. Rotate the rod handle clockwise to
compress the spring.
As the lever with plunger are lifted to their upper
position, the grease comes to the under-plunger
cavity from the cylinder under the action of the
spring. At the press of the lever, the plunger
moves down, exerts a pressure on the grease which
opens the non-return valve and comes via the tube
to the nozzle where it also opens the non-return

012.10.00
Page 89
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
valve and comes under pressure to the grease
fitting. Regularly press the lever to feed the
grease into the grease fitting until the taper
spring turns decompressed. Rotate the rod handle
to compress the spring again and to continue
greasing of units.
The mass of the modified grease gun is 1.28 kg.
2.6.10 Tester for checking electrical circuits of flare
launcher ЭКСР-46. The tester (Ref. Fig. 48) is
intended for checking flare launcher ЭКСР-46
electric circuits installed in the helicopter. It
consists of the following main parts: holder (1),
contact heads (2), magazine (3) with launcher from
set ЭКСР-46, lamps СЛЦ-51 with fitting (4) (red,
yellow, green, white).
The principle of the check comes to that the 27-V
DC voltage supplied in the launch of a flare to the
electric spiral of the pyrotechnical striker is
fed to the tester to the electric lamp glowing of
which testifies to continuity of a respective
circuit of flare launcher ЭКСР-46.
For checking, the tester is installed instead of
the magazine with launcher into the casing of the
upper launcher and the circuit breaker is switched
on. After that, successively press the buttons on
the upper flare release panel. Glowing of the lamps
testifies to continuity of the circuits. If, with
the button pressed, the lamp is dead, the
respective circuit is faulty.
Use much the same procedure to check the circuits
from the lower flare release panel after installing
the tester in the casing of the lower launcher.
The tester mass is 1.37 kg.

012.10.00
Page 90
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Holder
2 Contact Head
3 Magazine with Launcher from Set ЭКСТРА-46
4 Lamp СЛЦ-51with Fitting (red, yellow, green,
white)

Tester for Checking Electric Circuits

of Flare Launchers ЭКСТРА-46
Figure 48

012.10.00
Page 91
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.6.11 Fixture for checking runout of the transmission

shaft in the tail bооm and tail boom pylon. It
consists of the following main parts: indicator (1)
(Ref. Fig. 49), grade ИЧ-02, holder (2), retainer
(3), hold-down strip (5), clamp (4), clamping
screw (6).
The fixture is installed on and secured to the
stringer cap as shown in Fig. 49. The indicator
needle is brought to the shaft into contact after
that the scale is set to zero.
The fixture mass is 0.42 kg.
2.6.12 Installation for checking cone alignment of the
main rotor blades. The installation (Ref. Fig. 50)
is intended for checking cone alignment of the main
rotor blades. It consists of the following main
parts: platform (1), post (4), extension piece (5)
shock absorber (2) and handle (3)« Post (4) is a
duralumin tube, 45x2.5 mm in dia. Installed in the
upper end of the post is extension piece (5) also
made of duralumin tube which makes it possible to
regulate the installation in height over 200 mm.
The adjustment in height and fixing the extension
piece with respect to the post are carried out by a
locking device arranged in the extension piece the
button of which enters the respective slot in the
post. Installed in the upper end of the extension
piece is sheet of white thick paper (6) rolled up
in which the prints of the main rotor blade tips
are fixed painted different in colour.
In its lower part, the post terminates in a fork-
type lug for the connection of shock absorber (2).
In the lower part of the post pipe cast duralumin
fork is secured to connect the post with the
U-shaped upright of the platform.

012.10.00
Page 92
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Platform (1) is a riveted structure. It is the base
of the installation. It is made of duralumin tubes,
28x1.5 mm, gussets and cover plates. The platform
floor is made of a duralumin sheet, 1.5 mm thick,
with holes and beadings to avoid slipping. For
convenience of operation, handle (3) is installed
on the platform.
Rubber shock absorber (2) attached to the lugs
serves for connection of the lower end of post (4)
with platform (1).
The installation mass is 7 kg.
2.6.13 Fixture for checking alignment of the tail rotor
drive shaft. The fixture consists of the following
main parts: collar (10) with bracket (8), holder
(6), indicator (5), indicator needle (3) and lever
(2) (Ref. Fig. 51).
The collar with bracket serves for installation of
the fixture on the nut of the tail rotor drive
shaft. It is essentially two clamps connected on
one side with the axle and on the other side, with
the screw. Made on the collar are three threaded
holes for setting screws and bracket (8) in the
slot of which, on the axle indicator holder (6) is
attached. Secured to the holder are dial test
indicator (5) and lever (2). Indicator needle (3)
is installed in the indicator by thread. Lever (2)
has two projections through which the runout of the
tail rotor drive shaft is transmitted to the
indicator.
The check of shaft alignment is carried out with
reference to the table and diagram (Ref.
Fig. 52).

012.10.00
Page 93
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Indicator
2 Holder
3 Retainer
4 Clamp
5 Hold-Down Strip
6 Clamping Screw

I Vertical Axis of Symmetry of Tail Boom

II Stringer axis

Fixture for Checking Run out of Transmission Shaft

Figure 49

012.10.00
Page 94
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Platform
2 Shock Absorbent
3 Handle
4 Post
5 Extension Piece
6 White Thick Paper

Installation for Checking Cone Alignment of

Main Rotor Blades
Figure 50

012.10.00
Page 95
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Tail Rotor Drive Shaft

2 Lever
3 Indicator Needle
4 Screw
5 Indicator
6 Indicator Needle
7 Screw
8 Bracket
9 Axle
10 Collar
11 Splined Coupling Sleeve Nut

Fixture for Checking Alignment of Tail Rotor Drive Shaft

Figure 51

012.10.00
Page 96
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The fixture is to be regularly checked in

compliance with the diagram and check measurement
table (Ref. Fig. 53).
The fixture mass is 0.51 kg.
2.6.14 Attachment for measuring side clearances in the
couplings of the tail rotor drive shaft
(Ref. Fig. 54). It consists of the following main
parts: upright (5), clamp (3), wing screw (4) and
indicator (1). The attachment is installed on
fixture 8-0071-20 in the following sequence:
install upright (5) instead of the fixture screw
(install the attachment so that upright (5) is some
15 to 20 mm off the head of taper bolt (2)).
CAUTION: IN THE COURSE OP OPERATIONS POR CHECKING
THE SIDE CLEARANCE IN THE COUPLINGS OP THE
TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT, BE SURE THAT THE
MAIN ROTOR IS BRAKED.
The attachment mass is 0.15 kg.
2.6.15 Pins for securing the levers and foot control
pedals of the helicopter in neutral position
(8AT-9912-00). The pins are used for setting the
helicopter controls in the neutral position during
adjustment of the manual and foot control. The set
comprises three pins for manual control and one pin
for fixing the foot control pedals (Ref. Fig. 55).
The pins, 8 and 12 mm in dia. are made of steel
2x13. They have rings secured at the ends. The pins
are stored in the pockets of the tools kit made of
aviation canvas (Ref. Fig. 56).
The mass of pins is 0.38 kg.
2.6.16 Datum leveling bar. The datum leveling bar (Ref.
Fig. 57) is intended for installing the helicopter
in line of flight and for leveling the helicopter.
The datum leveling bar consists of guide (1), rule

012.10.00
Page 97
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) (from 0 to 1000 mm) and plumb line (3). Guide
(1) is made of a steel tube, 32 mm in dia., on both
ends of which bushings are installed. Installed in
the middle part of the tube is rule (2) which
together with the block is clamped to the guide.
Secured to the end of the guide with clamps is the
tube with plumb line (3) for finding the vertical
position of the datum leveling bar. Secured with
the screw to the other end of the guide on the axle
is a bracket with needle.
The mass of the datum leveling bar is 1 kg.
2.6.17 Plumb line. The plumb lines (Ref. Fig. 58) are
used in leveling and in installing the helicopter
in line of flight. The plumb line is a load made as
a cone on one end and on the other end as an eye
for attachment of thread, 10 m long.
The mass of the plumb line is 0.03 kg.
2.6.18 Protractor for measuring angles of trim tabs of
the main rotor blades. The protractor (Ref.
Fig. 59) serves for measuring the bending angle of
the trim tab of the main rotor blade. The
protractor is made of a duralumin sheet, 2.5 mm
thick.
It has a tail piece with two projections to bear
against the lower plane of the blade and a clamp
with a scale. The scale zero corresponds to the
position of the trim tab when its plane comes in
alignment with the blade lower plane.
When using the protractor, apply the tail piece
projections to the lower plane of the blade so that
the protractor clamp bears against the trim tab»
The protractor mass is 0.08 kg.

012.10.00
Page 98
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table and Diagram of Check Measurements

for Checking Shaft Alignment
Figure 52

Table and Diagram of Check Measurements

for Checking Fixture
Figure 53

012.10.00
Page 99
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Indicator
2 Taper Bolt Head
3 Clamp
4 Wing Screw
5 Upright

Attachment for Measuring Side Clearances in Couplings

Figure 54

012.10.00
Page 100
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

I To LH Control Pedal

III To Control Column

II To Control Levers

Installation of Pins for Securing Helicopter Control

Pedals and Levers in Neutral Position
Figure 55

012.10.00
Page 101
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Guide
2 Rule
3 Plumb
Line

Tools Kit with Pins Datum Leveling Bar

Figure 56 Figure 57

012.10.00
Page 102
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Plumb Lines
Figure 58

I Lower Plane of Blade

II Reading Off Lower Plane of Trim Tab

Protractor for Measuring Angles of Trim Tabs of Main

Rotor Blades
Figure 59

012.10.00
Page 103
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Retainer
2 Bracket
3 Nut
4 Height Gage
5 Boom
6 Flange

Appliance for Measurement of Tail Gear Box Rod

Figure 59a

012.10.00
Page 104
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Clamp
2 Handle

Holder for Bending Main Rotor Trim Tabs

Figure 60

012.10.00
Page 105
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.6.18a Fixture for measuring travel of tail gearbox rod.
The fixture consists of the following main parts:
retainer (1) (Ref. Fig. 59a), bracket (2), nut (3)
and height gage (4).
The fixture is placed on bolts of current collector
of tail gearbox, fixed with nuts. Bracket (2) of
height gage slider is installed on the rod and
secured with nut (3). After installation of fixture
the tail gearbox rod travel is measured by pressing
pilot's LH and RH foot pedals. Size H (space from
gearbox flange plane to measuring surface of part
(2)) should correspond to readings of vernier
height gage:
H = 270.1±4, neutral position of rod;
H = 29.6±1.5, position of rod with LH foot pedal,-
H = 244.9+0.45, position of rod with RH foot pedal.
To determine alignment of surfaces dia 64 and 20.02
place fixture on gage flange and secure with nut
from gage set. In this position boom (5) should
freely enter hole dia. 20.2H9 of bracket (2), the
clearance should be within tolerance.
The error of readings is determined according to
gage block in three points:
(a) 270.1 mm, error should not exceed ±0.1;
(b) 244.9 mm, error should not exceed ±0.2;
(c) 296 mm, error should not exceed ±0.8.
To determine error of readings place gage block
between mounting surfaces of flange (6) and
bracket (2).
2.6.19 The holder for bending trim tabs of main rotor
blades (56-9918-00). The holder (Ref. Fig. 60)
serves for bending the trim tabs in adjustment of
cone alignment of the main rotor blades. It

012.10.00
Page 106
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
consists of clamp (1) and handle (2). Clamp (1)
made of steel 30ХГСА, 400 mm long, has a deep
groove covered with material "poncho". Handle (2)
is made of steel tube, 20x18 mm in dia. It is
riveted to the clamp.
In the course of operation, slip the holder over the
blade trim tab up to the stop and gently apply force
to the handle to bend the trim tab to the required
side.
The mass of the holder is 0.7 kg.
2.6.20 Installation УКД-1 for preservation of engines.
The installation (Ref., Fig. 61) is intended for
internal preservation of engines. It consists of
the following main parts: base (1), casing (2),
tank (3), pump (8), filter (5), hose (6), cord with
plug (9) and switch (7).
Tank capacity 14 ltr
Preserving oil temperature 50 to 70°C
Drain direct current 27 V
Plow 800 ltr/h
Guaranteed service life 300 h
Mass of installation 7.81 kg

Duralumin base (1) of the tank is of a square

shape. In its lower part it is stiffened with a
diaphragm and edging of a duralumin angle piece.
The base is secured to casing (2) with eight
screws.
Cast aluminium casing (2) has a concave bottom with
ribs and a well with a flange for the attachment of
pump (8). Welded to the upper flange of the casing
is oil tank (3) made of alloy АМц 1.5 mm thick.
Arranged in its upper part is a filler neck with a
cover and a screen filter, a vent pipe and a

012.10.00
Page 107
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
handgrip for carrying the installation. Provided on
the side surface of the tank is a sight gage for
determining the oil level, as well as the
connection-cap for the attachment of the hose in
storage and transportation.
Pump (8), type БЦН, is equipped with an electric
motor, pressure regulator, centrifugal pump.
Installed near the pump is plate-type filter (5)
with the cutoff valve connected to the pump via a
rubber sleeve. To facilitate the removal of the
filtering element for cleaning, installed on the
filter body is a cover with a quick-response lock
and drain valve.
Secured to the filter is hose (6) which is
essentially a flexible hose with braiding to which
ends lugs with union nuts are secured. Installation
УКД-1 has cord with plug (9) for connection to the
electric circuit and switch (7).
Upon switching on the installation, hot oil earlier
poured in to the tank arrives at the operating
centrifugal pump wherefrom it is forced by the
pressure through the filter over the hose to the
preserved engine.
The engine preservation is carried out in
compliance with the engine Maintenance Manual. The
preservation oil flow is checked against the sight
gage on the oil tank of installation УКД-1.

012.10.00
Page 108
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9 Cord with Plug

7 Switch
8 Pump
4 Oil Level Sight Gage
5 Filter
6 Hose
1 Tank Base
2 Casing
3 Tank

Installation УКД-1 for Preservation of Engines

Figure 61

012.10.00
Page 109
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Set of Plugs for Pipelines

Figure 62

1 Hook 4 Clamp
2 Eye 5 Key
3 Handle 6 Lock
Lock for Collective Pitch Control Lever (8AT-9912-510)
Figure 63

012.10.00
Page 110
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Blanking Cover for Blower Inlet

Figure 64

012.10.00
Page 111
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Plug for Exhaust Pipe of Engine АИ-9В

Figure 65

012.10.00
Page 112
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.7 Protection Equipment of Helicopter at Parking
2.7.1 Set of plugs for pipelines. The plugs for pipelines
(Ref. Fig. 62) of the systems with the engines,
main gear box and hydraulic systems removed are
intended for the protection of pipelines against
contamination and foreign objects.
The plugs are made of polyethylene and are kept in
a special case. The mass of the set is
3.97 kg.
2.7.2 Lock for collective pitch control lever (8АТ-9912-
510). The lock is used as an anti-theft device for
a helicopter at parking. It blocks the collective
pitch control lever in the extreme lower position.
The lock (Ref. Fig. 63) consists of lock (6), clamp
(4), eye (2) and hook (1).
For locking the collective pitch control lever,
engage hook (1) with the bushing of the separate
engine control lever while the clamp with lock
braces the stem of the collective pitch control
lever, after that the lock is closed.
The lock mass is 0.5 kg.
2.7.3 Blower inlet blanking cover. The blanking cover
(Ref. Fig. 64) serves for the protection of the
inner space of the blower against the atmospheric
precipitation and against foreign objects when the
helicopter is at parking. The blanking cover is a
disc with a rim riveted thereto. The rim is made to
suit the contour of the inlet port. It is made of
duralumin. The blanking cover surface coming in
contact with the inlet flue of the blower is
covered with felt. A cutout is made in the blanking
cover for the accommodation of detector CO-121BM.

012.10.00
Page 113
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
For convenience of installation and removal of the
blanking cover, two knobs are glued to its disc. The
blanking cover is painted red.
The blanking cover mass is 1.5 kg.
2.7.4 Plug for exhaust pipe of engine АИ-9В. The plug
(Ref. Fig. 65) serves for the protection of inner
space of engine АИ-9В against atmospheric
precipitation and against foreign objects when the
helicopter is at parking. The plug is essentially a
disc with a rim welded to it, both being made of
material АМЦ2М. The plug surface contacting the
surface of the exhaust pipe is covered with felt, 5
mm thick.
For convenience of installation and removal, the
knob is riveted to the plug disc. The plug is
painted red.
The plug mass is 0.29 kg.
2.7.5 Plug for air by-pass pipeline. The plug (Ref. Fig.
66) serves for the protection of inner space of
engine АИ-9В against the atmospheric precipitation
and against foreign objects when the helicopter is
at parking. The plug consists of a body made of
material AMц2М and a knob. The plug surface
contacting the pipeline surface is covered with
felt, 5 mm thick.
The plug is painted red.
The plug mass is 0.8 kg.

012.10.00
Page 114
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Plug for Air By-Pass Pipeline

Figure 66

012.10.00
Page 115
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Shock Absorbing Tape

4 Tube
1 Mat

3 Lug

Nat Runner for Tail Boom

Figure 67

012.10.00
Page 116
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Mat Runner for Cargo Compartment Floor

Figure 68

Electrical Vacuum Cleaner «РАКЕТА»

Figure 69

012.10.00
Page 117
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.7.6 The set of slip covers for helicopter. The slip

covers serve for the protection of the helicopter
and its units against atmospheric precipitation,
dust and mechanical damage when the helicopter is
at parking. The slip covers are made of "poncho" to
suit the shape of the helicopter parts and units
and are trimmed with a tape, The attachment of the
slip covers is performed with the help of shock
absorbing laces.
The slip cover for the fuselage nose section is
provided with a felt liner at points contact with
the glass panels of the flight compartment. At the
end of the slip cover for the main rotor blade in
its lower part a hole is made to give access to the
blade tie-down unit.
The mass of the slip cover set is 95 kg.
The list of the slip covers used on the helicopter
is given in Sub-Section 010.10.00, Fig. 2.
2.7.7 Mat runner for tail boom. The mat runner (Ref. Fig.
67) is intended for allowing the personnel to move
along the tail boom during helicopter ground
maintenance. The mat runner has three sections (I,
II, III) each consisting of mats, shock absorbing
tape, lugs and tubes.
Mats (1) (12 pieces), 0.5 m long, are made of
rubber. The sides of the mat runner are terminated
in the loop in which tubes (4) having holes for
lugs (3) are installed. The mats having cutouts for
the antenna, formation lights and directional gyro
are spread over the boom some 10 mm apart.
Tubes (4) are installed into the mat loops, two
pieces on each side. Installed in the holes of each
tube are lugs (3) for the attachment of shock
absorbing tapes (2) at the ends of which hooks are

012.10.00
Page 118
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
made. Shock absorbers (6 pieces) serve for the
attachment of the mat to the tail boom.
The mat runner is kept in a special bag made of
aviation canvas.
The mat runner is 6.6 m long.
The mass of the mat runner set is 35 kg.
2.7.8 Mat runner for cargo compartment floor. The runner
(Ref. Fig. 68) sizing to 4120x800 mm serves as a
quick-detachable cover (something like a mat) for
the floor in the cargo compartment to protect the
latter against contamination. It is made of
aviation canvas. For preserving the shape, stitched
crosswise the mat runner with tapes of aviation
canvas are duralumin plates sizing to 20x750x1.5 mm
at a pitch of 250 mm.
The runner edges are stitched in three layers, 20
mm thick. Sewn to the runner edges are tapes: on
one side, two tapes and on the other, one tape. By
these tapes the runner is tied down to the die-down
rings on the floor of the cargo compartment at
Frames Nos 2 and 13.
The set includes two mat runners.
For storage, roll the runner in a coil and tie up
with a tape sewn to the runner edge.
The mass of the mat runner is 3 kg.
2.7.9 Electrical vacuum cleaner, type РАКЕТА. The vacuum
cleaner, type РАКЕТА, rated at 27 V (Ref. Fig. 69)
is intended for cleaning and removing dust inside
the helicopter during scheduled maintenance
operations.
The mass of the vacuum cleaner is 6 kg.

012.10.00
Page 119
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.7.10 Sun curtain
NO-9113-220 (HO-9113-220) removable curtain is
installed inside the cockpit and serves to protect
the helicopter instruments against direct sun light
during the helicopter parking.
The curtain is made of AST-100 (ACT-100) white
cotton fabric of 1600x5000mm dimensions.
The curtain is attached with fabric fasteners (see
fig. 70).
Helicopter maintenance mechanic should store this
curtain.

1 Sheet; 2 Fabric fastener;

3 Fabric fastener; 4 Label

Curtain
Fig. 70

012.10.00
Page 120
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.8 Servicing equipment for aircraft armaments

2.8.1 Cargo lifting system (8TV.8799.700)
8TV.8799.700 system (fig. 82) is used for
lifting/lowering cargos to/from external store
racks of the helicopter. If it is necessary to
perform some rigging operations, the cargo lifting
system can be installed on two special-type bolts
attached instead of the bolts that secure the
shackles of external store rack.
Cargo lifting system comprises the following
components:
- boom with BL-47M hoist (1);
- lifting belt (2);
- two brackets (3);
- fixed pulley (4);
- clamp (5)
Special-type bolts are made of high-resistance
steel. When installing the bolts, first put on the
bushing, then tighten the nut thus securing the
assembly, and lock it with cotter pin.
Bushings and the heads of special-type bolts have
circular grooves. During installation of cargo
lifting system the slots of boom and brackets
should go into circular grooves of bushings and the
heads of special-type bolts.
Boom of welded structure is essentially a tube with
a Metal pad on one end and a plate on the other
end. The hoist is attached on the pad. There are
two slots milled on the plate – they go into the
necks in the grooves of special-type bolts
(bushings) when the boom is attached with these
special-type bolts. A mount bracket welded on the

012.10.00
Page 121
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
pad is used for attaching the hoist (hoist tab
catches this bracket) and a through hole drilled in
the pad accommodates the bolt securing the hoist on
the pad.
The bracket is made in the shape of clamp with slot
on each end – they go into the grooves on special-
type bolt heads.
Lifting belt serves as a cradle for the cargo being
lifted or lowered. It may be a belt with two or
four rollers depending on the cargo size.
Clamp is used for attaching the lifting belt on the
cargo.
2.8.2 Trolley (8MT.9970.040 SB)
The trolley is used for transporting cargoes
weighing up to 500 kg and attaching them on
external store racks.
Trolley (fig. 81) consists of the following
components:
- frame (5);
- truss (1);
- detachable straps (6);
- tow bar (3);
- BD-47M hoist (2).
The frame is made in the shape of a clamp to allow
easier access to the cargoes resting on the ground
or suspended. The frame is a welded structure made
of bent tubes, braces, brackets and gussets. On
both ends of the frame there are clamps (mount
brackets) and hooks for stowing detachable straps.
There are three 300x125 wheels fitted on the frame
(one of them is a castoring wheel).

012.10.00
Page 122
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The truss is a welded structure made of tubes
connected by steel plates. On the top part of the
truss there is a bracket with roller. The truss is
bolted to the trolley frame. In the front section
of the truss a mount bracket is welded – during
transportation of empty trolley the hoist hook
should be attached to this bracket.
Detachable straps serve as supports for cargo when
the trolley is moved to or from under the external
store racks.
Tow bar comprises main tube, bracket for attachment
to the trolley frame, cross-rails for drag towing
and mount brackets for truck towing.
BD-47M hoist is mounted on special pad on the side
of trolley frame. Hoist cable should pass over the
roller on detachable truss and then through the
hole on top surface of the truss. On the end of the
cable there is a thimble with hook attached.
Before using the trolley you should visually
inspect it. There shouldn’t be any cracks, dents,
mechanical damage, traces of corrosion on the hoist
attachment fittings, truss and trolley. The truss
roller should turn smoothly and freely.
Apply TsIATIM-201 lubricant on motion parts and
threaded joints.
2.8.3 Boresight target (8MT-9990-00)
The boresight target is used for adjusting the axes
of special-purpose equipment units in vertical and
horizontal planes with the helicopter axes.
The target is a boom with boresighting targets
attached in certain points.
Overall view of the target is shown on fig. 70

012.10.00
Page 123
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.8.4 Appliance for boresighting (242-9991-00)(fig. 71)
The appliance is used for boresighting the external
store racks.
The appliance is a bracket with a press fitted
bushing in which the goniometer is mounted. The
bracket can be attached to external store rack with
bolt (5) and nut (6).
2.8.5 Appliance for boresighting by datum point
(8MT.9992.000) (fig. 72)
The appliance is a mast on accommodating a disk
with cross and circles.
The appliance is designed for boresighting the
datum point used for alignment of special-purpose
units.
2.8.6 Target for leveling the goniometer reticle
(8MT.9993.000 SB) (fig. 73)
Target for leveling the goniometer reticle is used
for leveling the goniometers.
2.8.7 Appliance for leveling the goniometer reticle (242-
9994-00) (fig. 74)
Appliance for leveling the goniometer reticle is
designed for leveling the goniometers.
2.8.8 Adaptor assembly (8MT.9995.000 SB) (fig. 75)
Adaptor assembly 8MT.9995.000 SB is used for
mounting the goniometers.
2.8.9 Adaptor assembly (242-9995-00) (fig. 76)
Adaptor assembly 242-9995-00 is used for mounting
the goniometers.
2.8.10 Adaptor assembly (242-9996-00) (fig. 77)
Adaptor assembly 242-9996-00 is used for mounting
the goniometers.

012.10.00
Page 124
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.8.11 Appliance for checking safety angles (8AT-9939-
200)
8AT-9939-200 appliance for checking safety angles
(fig. 78) is a set of tubes attached to adaptor and
a slider – the appliance is used for checking
safety angles of the armament system units.
2.8.12 Cover for left Exhaust Gas Shield (EGS)(8MT-9981-
100-1)and Cover for right Exhaust Gas Shield
(EGS)(8MT-9981-100-2)
Cover (fig.79) protects EGS (exhaust gas shield)
against atmosphere precipitations, dust, and
mechanical damage when there are no covers on the
parked helicopter.
The EGS bag-shaped cover is made of cotton
whipcord. Cover gusset has a shock cord (item 5).
Along the joining area the cord is stretched,
wrapped around with threads and covered by few
layers of AK-20 glue.
On EGS covers there are inscriptions made with
black KhV-16 paint - “8MT-9981-100-1” on the left
EGS cover and “8MT-9981-100-2” on the right one.
When putting the cover on start with rear EGS
section.
Cover weight is 3 kg.
2.8.13 EGS storage and shipping container (8МТ-9980-00)
The container (fig. 80) is suitable for all types
of transportation.
Main data:
Length, mm 1880
Width, mm 1360
Height, mm 1127

012.10.00
Page 125
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Weight, kg 100
The container consists of two basic parts –
container carcass and the lid.
Carcass (1) (fig. 80) is a welded structure made of
angle steel parts 32х32х3, implated with Л-1,2
sheets of Д16АТ material.
Longitudinal skids (5) with rings (4) on both sides
are welded to the carcass: using these rings you
can move the carcass for long distances. Inside the
carcass there are three cradles attached: front
cradle 6, middle cradle, rear cradle 15.
Middle cradle consists of wooden top (17) and
bottom (29) parts: supporting surfaces of these
parts are felted. Top and bottom parts are attached
to one another by means of stud (19), wing nut (20)
and washer (18).
Lid (11) is the carcass made of Д16АТ T-sections
with Л01,2 mm sheets of Д16АТ material riveted on
top.
The lid has a slope for water draining. Rubber
edging (25) around the lid perimeter makes the lid
waterproof. Support (16) riveted to the inner side
of the lid serves for attaching the pipe and the
box for storing the technical publications and
screws.
The lid is attached to the carcass by riveted
hinges (33). It also has tension shackles (23) and
padlocks (9).
Procedure for stowing and attaching EGS components
inside the container:
- Place the pipe (37) on lock pins (30) and
restrain it with belt (36). Proper tension of the
belt is ensured by buckle (38).

012.10.00
Page 126
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
- Put the pylon (7) on stud (28) and secure it with
wing nut (26) and washer (27). Put the top fitting
of pylon (8) into bracket (21) and secure it with
locking bolt (22).
- Follow the same procedure to install the second
pylon (8).
- Place the rod (12) into the recess on front
cradle (6) and secure the rod with Corbin clips
(31) and (32).
- Follow the same procedure to install rods (13),
(14).
- Put two EGS housings (2), (3) on cradles (15),
(29), (6), cover them with top section of the
middle cradle (17) and secure with washer (18) and
wing nut (20).
- Place the second pipe (10) on support (16)
attached on the container lid (11), and attach it
on the studs using nuts.
2.8.14 Lanyard for EGS
The lanyard (see fig. 83) is used for EGS
installation/removal.
The lanyard is a sling made of capron band in the
form of closed ring. The band joint is lined with
whipcord.
The lanyard weight is 0,73 kg.
2.8.15 Dolly for transportation of external store rack
adapters
The dolly (see fig. 84) consists of the welded
frame with cradles (1), tow bar (2), two rear
wheels and the front twin steering wheel.
Frame (1) is a welded structure made of pipes and
cradles. In the front section of the frame there is

012.10.00
Page 127
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
a pocket (cover) for storing the lanyards that are
used for installation/removal of external store
rack adapters. The cradles are made of metal sheet
section with a felt strip glued to it.
The adapters to be transported should be placed
into the dolly cradles.
The dolly weight is 109 kg

012.10.00
Page 128
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Boresight target
Fig. 70 (page 1 of 2)

012.10.00
Page 129
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Wheel
2 Trolley
3 Placard
4 Plate
5 Target assembly
6 Boresighting
gauge screen
7 Target
8 FWL (fuselage
water line)
screen
9 Boom
10 Target assembly
11 Mast
12 Truss
13 FWL (fuselage
water line)
screen
14 Brace
15 Target
16 Target
17 Brace strut
18 Datum point
screen
19 Plate
20 Plate
21 Brace strut
22 Brace strut

Boresight target
Fig. 70 (page 2 of 2)

012.10.00
Page 130
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh

1 Truss 10 Flat screw

2 Front bushing 11 Thin hexagon nut
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Rear bushing 12 Washer

5 Bolt 14 Eye splice
6 Nut 15 Placard
7 Safety pin

Appliance for boresighting

Fig. 71

March 31/11
012.10.00
Page 131
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Tripod 16. Disk

2 Tripod 19. Cotter pin
3. Brace strut 27. Pan head screw
5. Forked bushing 29. Hexagonal slotted nut
9. Hexagonal bushing 33. Washer
10. Bushing 38. Hex bolt
11. Stop screw 39. Hex bolt

Appliance for boresighting by datum point

Fig. 72

012.10.00
Page 132
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Target for leveling the goniometer reticle

Fig. 73. (page 1 of 2)

012.10.00
Page 133
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Mast 14 Clip
3 Bushing assembly 16 Cotter pin
5 Cable assembly 17 Shaft
7 Cord 19 Pan head screw
9 Plumb line 21 Washer
10 Pin 22 Washer
11 Stop screw 23 Hollow rivet
Target for leveling the goniometer reticle
Fig. 73 (page 2 of 2)

012.10.00
Page 134
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Mast
2 Cable assembly
3 Stop screw
4 Bushing
5 Clip
6 Stop screw

Appliance for leveling the goniometer reticle

Fig. 74

012.10.00
Page 135
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Gasket
2 Adaptor housing

8MT.9995.000 SB adaptor assembly

Fig. 75

012.10.00
Page 136
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Round-head screw
2 Spring
3 Adaptor housing
4 Gasket

242-9995-00 adaptor assembly

Fig. 76

012.10.00
Page 137
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Round-head screw
2 Spring
3 Adaptor housing
4 Gasket
242-9996-00 adaptor assembly
Fig. 77

1 Tube 5 Slider
2 Adaptor 6 Plug
3 Bushing 7 Screw
4 Bushing 8 Tubes
Appliance for checking safety angles
Fig. 78

012.10.00
Page 138
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Straps 3 EGS cover

2 Shock cord 4 Lining

EGS cover
Fig. 79

012.10.00
Page 139
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Truss 4 Wheel
2 BL-47M hoist 5 Frame
3 Tow bar 6 Detachable straps
Trolley
Fig. 81

012.10.00
Page 140
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Carcass
2 EGS housing
3 EGS housing
4 Ring
5 Skids
6 Front cradle
7 Pylon
8 Pylon
9 Lock
10 Pipe
11 Lid
12 Rod
13 Rod
14 Rod
15 Rear cradle
16 Support
17 Top section of the middle cradle
18 Washer
19 Stud
20 Wing nut
21 Bracket
22 locking bolt
23 Tension shackle
24 Hook
25 Rubber edging
26 Wing nut
27 Washer
28 Stud
29 Bottom section of the middle cradle
30 Lock pin
31 Corbin clip
32 Corbin clip
33 Hinge
34 Clamp
35 Hinge
36 Belt
37 Pipe
38 Buckle
40 Hinge
EGS container
Fig. 80

012.10.00
Pages 141/142
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Cargo lifting system

Fig. 82 (page 1 of 3)

012.10.00
Page 143
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Cargo lifting system

Fig. 82 (page 2 of 3)

012.10.00
Page 144
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Boom with BL-47M hoist

2 Lifting belt
3 Bracket
4 Fixed pulley
5 Clamp

Cargo lifting system

Fig. 82 (page 3 of 3)

012.10.00
Page 145
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Cover
2 Band

Lanyard for EGS

Fig. 83

012.10.00
Page 146
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 External store rack adapter with cradles

2 Tow bar
3 Rockshaft assembly
4 Cover
5 Lanyard for installation/removal of
external store rack adapters

Dolly for transportation of external store rack adapters

Fig. 84

012.10.00
Page 147
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 GROUND TEST FACILITIES (GTF)
3.1 Ground test facilities (GTF) used during maintenance
of the helicopter are stipulated into the «Task
Cards».
3.2 During maintenance of the helicopter, as related to
aircraft and electronic equipment, it is allowed to
use, together with standard ground test facilities
(GTF), КПК test systems, ИП testers, УИС-АТ universal
measuring systems and УПГ-8 gyro systems, developed
by closed JSC «NPO SPARK». These GTFs can be used for
test of the following equipment:

КПК-1 test Baklan-20 (Баклан-20), Orlan-85СТ (Орлан-

systems 85CT), Yadro-1Г1( Ядро-1Г1), A-037,
Almaz-УП (Алмаз УП), П-503Б, СПУ-7
КПК-2 test ДИСС-15, ДИСС-32
system
КПК-3 test APK-15M, APK-9, АРК-УД
system
КПК-4 Test АП-34Б, АУ, ПУ, КД, ИН-4, БУНПП 1479,
System БФ-34, БС-34, БСГ
KIIK-5 Test УС-450К, УС-350К, BAP-3OM (MK) BАP-10MK,
System ВД-10ВК 2 серия, УВИД-30-15, УВИД-30-15-2,
ВЭМ-72Ф, ДВК, ИКД-27Да-220-780,
ИКД-27Да-400-830, KB-11, КЗСП (БСГ),
K3B-0-15, ДВ-15МВ, ДАС, ДПСМ-1
КПК-6 Test ИВ-500, БЭ-9, УсС-6, МВ-03-1, ССП-ФК-БИ,
Systems ДПС, TCT-282C EGT, Т-822УТ-6К 2УЭ-6Б, ПК-6,
БУР-1-2, ПУ-25, БСПИ-4-2, М11А, 3БН-1, PT-
12-6 cep.2, ПТС-800БМ, САС-4 БАП-1, БУ-1
БК-7 или БК-4 БУР-1-2, МУ-615 A, МП-95,
АДИС-2-2(2-3) МСЛ-4

012.10.00
Page 148
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

КПК-7 Test ИТЭ-1, ИТЭ-2, Д-1M, Д-2М, СКЭС-2027А, СКЭС-

Systems 2027Б, СКЭС-2027В, БЭ-09К, П-8У, Н-402,
Н-210, Н-346, ИДП-1, ИР-117, УР-117,
ПМ-10МР, ЭМИ-ЗРИ, ЭМИ-ЗРВИ, УИ3-3, УИЗ-6,
ИД-3, ИД-8, ИМД-8, ДИМ-3, УИ-3, ИД-3,
ДИМ-8, УИ-8, ИД-8, ДИМ-100, УИ-100, ИД-100,
МВУ-100, МА-60, МСТ-25, МСТ-35, П-77,
ТУЭ-48, П-1
КПК-8 ГМК-1Г, АГБ-ЗК, АГР-74-15, АГК-77-15,
ВК-53Э-РШ (РБ, PB), БКК-18, СНП-1, ЭУП-53,
УП21-15, ДУС-1209Е, ДУС-1209Г, ДУС-1209К
КПК-9 СПО-9, ПО-500А, ПО-600С, ПО-750А, ПО-1500А,
ПТС-800БМ, ПТ-125Ц, ПТ-200Ц, ПТ-500Ц,
ПТ-1000Ц
ИП-1 Tester 2ИА-6 Exhaust Gas Temperature Indicating
System
ИП-2 Tester ИР-117, ПМ-10МР, УР-117
УИС-АТ Universal Measuring System for individual
System Application
УПГ-8 Gyro Test System
System
Test the above mentioned equipment in compliance with
the User’s Manual and Operation Manuel for КПК, ИП,
УИС-АТ и УПГ-8 systems.
3.3 8AT.9937.00 assembly or “SPARK-KONUS”/”СПАРК-КОНУС”
equipment are used to check MR blade tracking.
Description of “SPARK-KONUS”/”СПАРК-КОНУС” equipment
is included in Maintenance Manual for “SPARK-KONUS”
SPAN/СПАН.441460.306 RE/РЭ vision system.

012.10.00
Page 149/150
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIRFIELD SERVICING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Maintenance Practices includes the following Task Cards

TASK CARD No DESCRIPTION TC PAGE

012.10.00А Installation of cargo Ref. Collection 1
lifting system.
Attachment of cargoes
012.10.00B Inspection of cargo Ref. Collection 1
lifting system

012.10.00
Pages 301/302
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE OF HELICOPTER -

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The mass of each tools kit:

Tools kit, tools for main rotor blades 8,741
8МТ-10-00
Special tools, tools for vibration damper
(located in bag 380-235)
Special tools 8АТ-9104-00
Special tools 8АТ-9102-00 10,440
Multi-purpose tools 8АТ-9101-00 14,650
Bench tools 8АТ-9105-00 9,000
Tools for electrical equipment 8АТ-9Ю6-00 8,009
Tools for radio equipment 3AT-9107-00 5,792
Tools for instruments 8AT-9108-00 5,931
Armament maintenance tools 4V-9112-00
Armament maintenance tools 8TV-9112-00
Torque wrench rated at 1350 N·m (135 kgf-m) 3,115
8АТ-9103-10
Torque wrench rated at 3000 N·m (300 kgf-m) 20,000
3AT-9114-210
NOTE: Hereinafter in the text 1 kgf is taken
as 10 N for convenience
Airborne Tools Kit 8MT-9100-000
(Applied in set 1:1 to every helicopter in case 8АТ-9100-
00 with panels 8MT.9100.020, 8MT.9100.010)

1 8АТ-9100-30 screwdriver for

cowling locks
2 8АТ-9101-04 wrench, S - 7x9

012.11.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 8АТ-9101-05 wrench, S = 9x11

4 7811-0004 С1 Кд21 ГОСТ 2839-90 wrench S=10х12
5 8АТ-9101-07 wrench S=11х14
6 7811-0023 С1 Кд21 ГОСТ 2839-80 wrench S=17х19
7 8АТ-9106-50 wrench for
electrical
connectors
8 8АТ-9100-71 wrench for driving
in lock valve 8-
9220-70
9 6464/0020 special tongs for
installation of
door emergency
release
10 8АТ-9105-26 wrench for plugs
of feathering and
flapping hinges of
main rotor hub
11 8АТ-9101-39 wrench S = 55×60
12 7814-0092Кд21.хр ГОСТ 5547-86 combination
pliers,
L = 200 мм
13 7810-0911 3В Кд21.хр ГОСТ screwdriver, L=
17199-88 150 мм В = 3,5 мм
14 7810-0916 3В Кд21.хр ГОСТ screwdriver,
17199-88 L= 205 мм,
В= 4 мм
15 ПЛ-64-Р2 or НО-9101-8600 portable lamp
16 Vendor item multi-tool knife
17 8АТ-9101-45 pressure gauge
with adapter

012.11.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

18 6420/0120 hammer
19 6420/0130 duralumin hammer
20 ГОСТ 25703-83 x7 or x4
magnifying glass
21 РН-1В automatic pump
with hose
8AT-9101-48
Special Tools Kit 8AMT-9102-00
(Applied in set 1:5 in case 8АТ-9101-400 with panels
8MT-9102-10,8МТ-9102-20)

1 8АТ-9102-07 cone for

installation of
bolts attaching
main rotor blade to
hub
2 8АТ-9102-12 holder for washing
filter elements
3 8АТ-9102-26 safety cone for
installation of
tail rotor
4 8АТ-9102-27 feeler gauge
5 8АТ-9102-40 round-nose pliers
for disassembly of
filters
6 8АТ-9102-335 ring for crimping
diaphragm bulb
7 8АТ-9102-340 blade drooping stop
attachment insert
8 8АТ-9102-350 special rule for
measuring length of
vertical rods of

012.11.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
swash plate
assembly
9 8АТ-9102-360 screwdriver
(applied
separately)
10 8АТ-9102-370 cone for
installation of
tail rotor blade
attachment bolts
11 8АТ-9102-425 wrench-support for
attachment of fuel
box
12 8АТ-9102-530 wrench for nut of
hydraulic
accumulator
(applied
separately)
13 8АМТ-9102-550 special wrench,
S = 10, for
adjustment of
engine control
with Fr. No. 6
14 8АТ-9102-550 socket head
S = 36, a = 14
15 140.9102.030 special head for
tightening bolts
of exhaust pipe
clamp
16 8АТ-9101-19 socket head,
S = 10, a = 7
17 8АТ-9106-04 socket head,
S = 8, a = 7 for
removal of engine

012.11.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
inlet device
18 8АТ-9106-40 dielectric handle
19 6015/0044Б support with
indicator
20 6409/И-039 socket wrench for
external hexagon
S = 36
21 6442-56/И-175 torque wrench
rated at 4 kgf-m
22 6447-56/И-065 wrench for
tightening nut
56-0400-02
23 Номер шлица № 27810-0982 screwdriver for
Phillips slot
screws
24 8АТ-9102-14 socket head,
S = 46, a = 14
for attachment of
main rotor hub
damper
25 8АТ-9102-18 socket head,
S = 32, a = 14
26 8АТ-9102-390 socket head for
tightening nut of
shaft attaching
swash plate
assembly rod to
main rotor hub,
a = 10
27 8АТ-9102-330 wrench for
tightening two
upper gear box
attachment bolts

012.11.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

28 8АТ-9102-01 head, S = 17,

attaching tail
boom pylon to
tail boom
29 8АТ-9102-08 head, S = 14, for
nut attaching
transmission and
tail boom pylon
to tail boom
30 140.9102.005 head for bolt
attaching braces
to gear box,
S = 32
31 8АТ-9102-13 head, S = 17,for
nut attaching
transmission and
tail boom pylon
to tail boom
32 8АТ-9102-15 head, S = 14,
a = 10, for
tightening fuel
tanks straps and
tail boom pylon
to tail boom
33 8АТ-9102-17 head, S = 17,
a = 10, for
intermediate gear
box
34 8АТ-9102-19 head for
attachment of
intermediate gear
box
35 8АТ-9102-24 head, S = 10, for

012.11.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
attachment of
bearing of swash
plate assembly
36 8АТ-9102-380 head for
tightening
locknut of swash
plate assembly
rod
37 8АТ-9102-400 head for
tightening
attachment nuts
of brackets 8AT-
5104-305
38 8АТ-9100-25 head, S = 22
39 8ТВ-9112-11 socket head,
S = 22
40 8АТ-9102-415 head, S = 19, for
tightening
stabilizer nuts

012.11.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Multi-Purpose Tools 8AT-9101-00
(Applied in set 1:5 in case 8AT-9101-500 with panels 8АТ-
9101-00,8AT-9101-190)

1 8АТ-9101-02 wrench, S = 5×7

2 8АТ-9101-03 wrench, S = 6×8
3 8АТ-9101-04 wrench, S = 7×9
4 8АТ-9101-05 wrench, S = 9×11
5 7811-0004 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 10×12
ГОСТ 2839-80
6 8АТ-9101-07 wrench, S =11×14
7 7811-0022 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 14×17
ГОСТ 2839-80
8 7811-0023 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 17×19
ГОСТ 2839-80
9 7811-0024 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 19×22
ГОСТ 2839-80
10 7811-0025 С1 Кд21.хр ГОСТ wrench, S = 22×24
2839 80
11 7811-0043 С1 Кд21.хр ГОСТ wrench, S = 32×36
2839-80
12 7811-0045 С1 Кд21.хр ГОСТ wrench,S = 41×46
2839-80
13 7811-0047 С1 Кд21.хр ГОСТ wrench,S = 50×55
2839-80
14 8АТ-9101-18 socket head, S = 9,
а = 7
15 8АТ-9101-19 socket head,
S = 10, а = 7
16 8АТ-9101-21 socket head,
S = 11, а = 7

012.11.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

17 8АТ-9101-22 socket head,

S = 12, а = 7
18 8АТ-9101-23 socket head,
S = 14, а = 7
19 8АТ-9101-24 socket head,
S = 17, а = 14
20 8АТ-9101-25 socket head,
S = 19, а = 14
21 8АТ-9101-26 socket head,
S = 22, а = 14
22 8АТ-9101-27 socket head,
S = 24, а = 14
23 8АТ-9101-28 socket head,
S = 27, а = 14
24 7811-0288ГОСТ 2906-71 bent box wrench,
S = 14х17
25 7811-0289 ГОСТ 2906-71 bent box wrench,
S = 17×19
26 8АТ-9101-32 straight box wrench
S = 14×17
27 8АТ-9101-33 straight box
wrench, S = 17×19
28 8АТ-9101-35 adjustable box
wrench, S = 46×50
29 7811-01121 Кд21.хр ГОСТ 7283-86 round-nose pliers
30 8АТ-9101-37 box wrench,
S =10×12
31 8АТ-9101-38 box wrench,
S = 9×11
32 7811-0048 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 55×60
ГОСТ 2839-80

012.11.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

33 8АТ-9101-40 handle, 14x14, for

socket heads
34 8АТ-9101-60 tap wrench, 15 mm
in dia., L = 250 mm
35 8АТ-9101-70 universal joint,
14x14, for socket
heads
36 8АТ-9101-80 drift, dia. 11 mm
37 8АТ-9101-90 universal joint,
7x7, for socket
heads
38 8АТ-9101-100 tetrahedral awl
39 76-7804-1540 hammer with
replaceable head
40 8АТ-9101-150 mirror with magnet
41 8АТ-9101-450 inside caliper
42 74-7804-1060 cotter pin puller
43 Щуп набор № 2 ГОСТ 882-75 feeler gauge No.2
(0.02 to 0.5)
44 Щуп набор № 3 ГОСТ 882-75 feeler gauge No.3
(0.55 to 1.0)
45 7810-0320 3В Кд21.хр screwdriver,
ГОСТ 17199-88 L= 250 mm,
В = 6.5 mm,
46 8АТ-9101-130 hand brush
47 8АТ-9101-140 hand brush
48 7810-0916 3В Кд21.хр screwdriver,
ГОСТ 17199-88 L = 200 mm,
В = 4 mm,

012.11.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Tools for Electrical Equipment 8AT-9I06-00

(Applied in set 1:5 in case 8АТ-9101-500 with
panels 8АТ-9106-10, 8AT-9106-20)
1 8АТ-9106-22 special wrench for
electrical
connectors
2 8АТ-9106-30 support for
soldering iron with
soldering outfit
3 8АТ-9106-37 socket wrench,
S = 5,5×8
4 8АТ-9106-38 special
screwdriver
5 8АТ-9106-39 wrench, S = 5.5x8
6 8АТ-9106-40 dielectric handle
7 8АТ-9106-50 wrench for
electrical
connectors
8 8АТ-9106-60 swaging tool
9 7814-0132 1 Кд21.хр side-cutting
ГОСТ 22308-77 pliers, L = 125мм
10 8АТ-9101-02 wrench, S = 5×7
11 8АТ-9101-03 wrench, S = 6×8
12 8АТ-9101-05 wrench, S= 9×11
13 7811-0004 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S =10×12
ГОСТ 2839-80
14 7811-0022 C1 Кд21.хр wrench, S == 14×17
ГОСТ 2879-80
15 7811-0024 C1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 19×22
ГОСТ 2839-80

012.11.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

16 8АТ-9101-23 socket head,

S = 14, а = 7
17 8АТ-9105-10-13 hand file,
L = 150мм
18 8АТ-9105-10-15 hand file,
L= 150 мм
19 8АТ-9107-40 electrical
soldering iron
rated at 24 to
26 V, with straight
tip
20 7814-0003 tweezers,
L = 150 to 200 mm
21 7810-0916 3В Кд21.хр screwdriver,
L= 205 мм, В = 4 мм
22 7810-0928 3В Кд21.хр ГОСТ screwdriver,
17199-71 L = 240 мм,
В = 6,5 мм
23 ГОСТ 10597-87 flat brush КФ-60
24 ГОСТ 10054-82 emery cloth No. 6
25 7814-0508 Х9 ГОСТ 5547-86 combination pliers,
L = 160 mm
26 Vendor item multi-tool knife

Tools for Instruments 8AT-9108-00

(Applied in set 1:5 in case 8АТ-9100-500 with panels
8AT-9108-l0, 8АТ-9108-40)

1 8АТ-9108-20 brass screwdriver,

В = 2 mm
2 8АТ-9108-25 rubber suction cup

012.11.00
Page 12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 8АТ-9108-30 wrench for

electrical
connectors
4 8АТ-9101-02 wrench, S= 5x7
5 8АТ-9101-04 wrench, S = 7×9
6 8АТ-9101-05 wrench, S = 9×11
7 7811-0004 С1Кд21.хр wrench, S= 10×12
ГОСТ 2839-80
8 7811-0022 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 14×17
ГОСТ 2839-80
9 7811-0024 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 19×22
ГОСТ 2839-80
10 8АТ-9106-23 special wrench for
electrical
connectors
11 8АТ-9106-39 wrench, S = 5,5×8
12 7810-0081 МН 491-60 instruments
screwdriver,
В = 2 мм
13 8АТ-9108-50 special
screwdriver for
adjustment of
potentiometers
14 7810-0911 ЗВ Кд21.хр ГОСТ screwdriver,
17199-71 L = 155 мм,
В=3,5 мм
15 Vendor item shears,
120...200 мм
16 7814-0253 Х9 ГОСТ 5547-86 combination pliers
17 8АТ-9108-45 wrench for
screwing out hold-

012.11.00
Page 13
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
down nut
18 Vendor item multi-tool knife
19 7814-0003 tweezers,
150 to 200 mm

Tools for Radio Equipment 8АТ-9107-00

(Applied in set 1:5 in case 8AT-9107-500 with
panels 8АТ-9107-10,8AT-9102-20)

1 8АТ-9107-01 metallic mirror

2 7810-0081 instrument
screwdriver
3 8АТ-9107-40 electrical
soldering iron
with straight and
L-shaped tip
4 8АТ-9101-02 wrench, S = 5×7
5 8АТ-9101-03 wrench, S = 6×8
6 8АТ-9101-04 wrench, S = 7×9
7 8АТ-9101-05 wrench, S = 9×11
8 7811-0004 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 10×12
ГОСТ 2839-80
9 7811-0024 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 19×22
ГОСТ 2839-80
10 8АТ-9106-03 socket head,
a = 7, S = 7
11 8АТ-9106-30 support for
soldering iron
with outfit
12 8АТ-9106-40 dielectric handle
13 7814-0132 1 Х9 ГОСТ 22308-77 side-cutting

012.11.00
Page 14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
pliers,
L = 125 mm
14 8АТ-9108-20 brass screwdriver
В = 2 mm
15 8АТ-9108-30 wrench for
electrical
connectors
16 7814-0508 Х9 ГОСТ 5547-86 combination
pliers,
L = 160 mm
17 7810-0928 Кд21.хр ГОСТ 17199-88 screwdriver,
L = 190 mm,
В = 6.5 mm
18 7814-0111 Кд21.хр ГОСТ 7283-86 round-nose pliers
19 7814-0101 Кд21.хр ГОСТ 17440-86 flat-nose pliers
with elongated
thin jaws
20 ГОСТ 427-75 metal rule,
L = 300 mm
21 Vendor item multi-tool knife
22 Vendor item tweezers, L = 150
to 200 mm
Bench Tools 8АТ-9105-00
(Applied in set 1:5 in case 8AT-9101-500 with
panels 8АТ-9105-50,8AT-9105-60)

1 2810-0192 Кд21.хр ГОСТ 7211-86 benchwork chisel,

L = 160 mm
2 7843-0036 Кд21.хр ГОСТ 7213-72 center punch,
L = 100 mm
3 7840-1007 Х9 ГОСТ 24473-801 scriber,

012.11.00
Page 15
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L = 100 mm
4 7851-0155 Н12 XI ГОСТ 7214-72 benchwork punch
5 8АТ-9105-10-3 hand file,
L = 200 mm
6 8АТ-9105-10-5 square file,
L = 200 mm
7 8АТ-9105-10-7 half-round file,
L = 150 mm
8 8АТ-9105-10-9 round file,
L = 150 mm
9 8АТ-9105-10-11 triangular file,
L = 150 mm
10 8АТ-9105-20 box with drills
∅1.2, ∅1.5,
∅2.6, ∅4.0, ∅3.6
11 8АТ-9105-2 6 wrench for plugs
of main rotor hub
feathering and
flapping hinges
12 2809-0001 Кд21.хр ГОСТ 7210-75 shears for metal
13 8АТ-9105-75 radius center
punch, R = 1.5 mm
14 781 1-0026 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 24×27
ГОСТ 2839-80
15 7811-0041 С1 Кд21.хр wrench, S = 27×30
ГОСТ 2839-80
16 7811-0044 С1 Кд21.хр box wrench,
ГОСТ 2839-80 S = 36x41
17 8АТ-9105-80 universal-joint
wrench, S = 22,
for tail rotor
gear box

012.11.00
Page 16
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
temperature
pickup (supplied
separately)
18 348с/069 syringe for
washings
assemblies
19 Vendor item metal rule,
L = 300 mm
20 Vendor item ДР-10А hand double-rate
ТУ 2-11-127-74 drill, up to
10 mm (supplied
separately)
21 7850-0117 fitter's hammer
22 7814-0092 Х2 ГОСТ 5547-86 combination
pliers,
L = 200 mm
23 7827-0033 ГОСТ 7226-72 hand vice,
L = 200 mm
24 8АТ-9105-70 wrench for elbow
plugs of
articulated
pendulum
mechanism
Special Tools
(Applied in set 1:1 in bag Э80-235 expect wrench
8АТ-99114-210)

1 НО-9102-20 torque wrench,

M tg = 67 kgf·cm
2 8АТ-9101-18 socket head, S = 9,
а = 7

012.11.00
Page 17
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 8АТ-9101-19 socket head, S= 10,

а = 7
4 8АТ-9101-22 socket head, S= 12,
а = 7
5 8АТ-9101-23 socket head,
S = 14, а = 7
6 8АТ-9101-24 socket head,
S = 17, а = 14
7 8АТ-9101-25 socket head,
S = 19, а = 14
8 8АТ-9102-550 head to torque
wrench 8АТ-9102-80
9 8АТ-9102-12 holder for washing
filtering elements
10 8АТ-9102-80 torque wrench up to
2000 kgf·cm
11 8АТ-9102-130 torque wrench up to
7 kgf·m
12 8АТ-9101-10 wrench
13 24-9102-80 wrench
14 8АТ-9101-11 wrench, S = 19×22
15 8АТ-9101-12 wrench, S = 22×24
16 16. 8АТ-9101-15 wrench, S = 32×36
17 8АТ-9101-16 wrench, S =41×46
18 8АТ-9102-01 head, S = 17, for
securing tail boom
pylon to tail loom
19 8АТ-9102-03 head, S = 19, for
securing tail rotor
to tail rotor gear
box, securing swash

012.11.00
Page 18
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
plate assembly arm
20 8АТ-9102-08 head, S = 14, for
transmission
attachment nut
21 8АТ-9102-13 head, S = 17, for
nut securing
transmission and
tail boom pylon to
tail boom
22 8АТ-9102-22 head for securing
universal joint
shaft to drive
flange on gear box
23 8АТ-9102-24 head, S = 10, for
securing swash
plate assembly
bearing
24 8АТ-9102-21 head S = 9, for
securing fuel tank
straps
25 140-9100-17 head, S = 10,
a = 7, for complete
tightening of clamp
of engine
26 8АТ-9114-210 torque wrench,
Mtq = 0 to
3000 kgf·m
(supplied
separately)
27 НО-9102-25 torque wrench up
to150 kgf·cm
28 8АТ-9101-19 socket head
29 8АТ-9101-28 socket head for

012.11.00
Page 19
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
wrench 8AT-9102-80
30 8АТ-9102-15 adapter for wrench
HO-9102-25

Special Tools
(Applied in set 1:5 in case 8AMT-9104-00)

1 8АТ-9102-06 tap wrench, dia.

20, L = 400
2 8АТ-9102-23 socket head,
S = 10, for
driving roller of
blower blades
turning cable
3 8АТ-9102-111 socket head,
S = 46, for nut
securing braces
of under gear box
mount to fuselage
4 8АТ-9102-312 socket head for
КО-50 plug
5 8АТ-9102-80 torque wrench up
to 20 kgf·m
6 8АТ-9102-130 torque wrench up
to 7 kgf·m
7 8АТ-9102-50 textolite mallet
8 8АТ-9102-03 head, S = 19, for
nut securing the
tail rotor hub to
gear box
9 8АТ-9102-04 head, S = 19, for
landing gear

012.11.00
Page 20
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

wheel tightening
nut
10 8АТ-9102-21 head, S=9, for
securing straps
of extra fuel
tanks
11 8АТ-9102-22 head, for
securing shaft
universal joint
to drive flange
on gear box
12 8АТ-9102-200 head for main
rotor hub hinge
13 8АТ-9102-580 head-support for
head of bolt
securing under
gear box mount to
fuselage

012.11.00
Page 21
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Armament maintenance tools

4V-9112-00 (fig.1)
1 7810-0911 3V1 Kh9 Screwdriver
2 Knife
3 7814-0264 Ikh9 Pliers
4 8АТ-9105-10-13 File with holder
5 8АТ-9101-02 Wrench 5x7
6 8АТ-9101-05 Wrench 9х11
7 8АТ-9101-06 Wrench 10х12
8 8АТ-9101-08 Wrench 14х17
9 8АТ-9100-500-5 Instrument case

012.11.00
Page 22
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Armament maintenance tools

8TV-9112-00 (fig. 2)
1 8АТ-9106-50 Connector pliers
2 8АТ-9112-12 Bronze cotter-driver
3 7814-0264 IKh9 Pliers
4 8АТ-9108-30 Connector pliers
5 8ТВ-9112-01 Rotary wrench
6 8АТ-9101-210 Mirror
7 7850-0117-Ts15 KhR GOST 2310- Steel bench hammer
77
8 8АТ-9102-130 Torque wrench
9 7811-0023S1-Kh9 GOST 2839-71 Wrench 17x19
10 KF-60-2 Grainer brush
11 7811-0043S1-Kh9 GOST 2839-80 Wrench 32x36
12 8АТ-9101-500-5 Instrument case

012.11.00
Page 23
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Screwdriver
2 Knife
3 Pliers
4 File with holder
5 Wrench
6 Wrench
7 Wrench
8 Wrench
9 Instrument case
4V-9112-00 armament maintenance tools
Fig. 1.

012.11.00
Page 24
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Connector pliers 7 Bench hammer

2 Bronze cotter-driver 8 Torque wrench
3 Pliers 9 Wrench 17x19
4 Connector pliers 10 Grainer brush
5 Rotary wrench 11 Wrench 32x36
6 Mirror 12 Instrument case
8TV-9112-00 armament maintenance tools
Fig. 2.

012.11.00
Page 25/26
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIRFIELD SERVICING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
The airfield servicing incorporates fueling, oiling,
filling hydraulic liquid, charging with air, gases, the
methods and procedure for draining working liquids and
discharging the systems as well as the features of
maintenance of the helicopter in different climatic
conditions.
1.1 Layout of NО STEP Areas
1.1.1 The layout of areas which cannot be treaded upon
during maintenance of engines, main gear box and
all the items arranged on the upper part of the
helicopter is shown in Fig. 1.
1.1.2 Besides, never tread on the external fuel tanks and
the stabilizer.
2 FEATURES OF OPERATION OF HELICOPTERS IN DIFFERENT
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
2.1 Preparation of Helicopter and Engines for Winter
Operation
2.1.1 Repair and adjust the slip covers.
2.1.2 Clean the helicopter of dust and dirt washing it
with water and soap.
2.1.3 Inspect the helicopter in the scope of the periodic
inspection and draw up the list of defects. Correct
the revealed defects.
2.1.4 Lubricate the mechanisms of locks of the RH and LH
blisters, blister emergency release pins,
mechanisms of upper guides.
2.1.5 Lubricate the upper guide, emergency release
mechanism, rollers of the lock mechanisms and cargo
compartment door hinges.

012.20.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Cover of Engine Compartment Cowling

2 Cover of Blower Compartment Cowling
3 Cover of Gear Box Compartment Cowling
4 Cover of Cowling of АИ-9В Engine Compartment
5 Not to Be Stepped

I Not to Be Stepped
II Two Persons Are Allowed to Step
III One Person Is Allowed to Step

Cowling of Engines and Gear Box Compartment

Figure 1

012.20.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.1.6 Lubricate the articulated joints, hinges and lock

of the flight compartment door.
2.1.7 Lubricate the mechanism of the emergency release
mechanism of the opening panels at the starboard
side and the mechanism fixing the lock, the cargo
compartment swinging door panels.
2.1.8 Check the anti-icing system of the main and tail
rotors.
2.1.9 At an ambient temperature of 5 °C and below, drain
oil from the intermediate and tail rotor gear boxes
and fill them with thinned oil consisting of 2/3 by
volume of oil for hypoidal gears and of 1/3 of oil
АМГ-10. At a sudden variation of temperature, it is
allowed, if need be, to operate the gear boxes on
thinned oil at a temperature of up 25 °C. To
facilitate draining of thick oil, heat up the gear
boxes to a temperature range of 30 to 40 °C; in so
doing, protect the tail rotor hub against the hot
air jet.
Allowed for application is all-season oil mix
"50/50" (50 % by volume of oil for hypoidal gear's
ТС hyp and 50 % of oil АМГ-10 within the entire range
of outside air temperature for the helicopter
operation. As the air temperature goes below minus
45 °C, heat up the oil to a temperature of not
below minus 40 °C.
2.1.10 In winter, at the ambient air temperatures range
from plus 5 °C to minus 50 °C or at a short-time
(of up to 10 days) temperature rise of plus 10 °C,
the feathering hinges of the main and tail rotors
hubs are lubricated with oil- ВНИИ НП-25.
In above-zero ambient air temperatures or at a
short-time (of up to 10 days) temperature drop down

012.20.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
to minus 10 C, the feathering hinges of the main
and tail rotors hubs are lubricated with oil MC-20.
In winter at the ambient air temperatures range of
plus 5 to minus 50 ºС the drag and flapping hinges
are lubricated with oil mix CM-9 (2/3 by volume of
oil for hypoidal gear trains TO, and 1/3 by volume
of oil AMГ-10).
Tolerated is the application of oil for hypoidal
gear trains TO, down to temperatures of minus
15 °C.
NOTE: At a short-time (of up to 10 days) rise of
ambient air temperature up to plus
10 °C, it is allowed to use oil mix CM-9 in
the drag and flapping hinges of the main rotor
hub.
While changing oil, drain oil from the feathering
hinges to the full. To facilitate oil drain, it is
allowed to heat up the feathering hinges with hot
air from the airfield heater. After draining used
oil through the hinges of the main rotoi hub, fill
in clean oil heated to a temperature of 60 to
70 °C.
CAUTION; IN HEATING THE FEATHERING HINGES OP THE MAIN
AND TAIL ROTORS HUBS, CHECK TO SEE THAT THE
TEMPERATURE AT THE HEATER OUTLET IS NOT HIGHER
THAN 60 °C. IN SO DOING, DO NOT FAIL TO DRIVE
OUT THE FILLER PLUGS IN THE SHELLS OF
FEATHERING HINGES AND PROTECT THE CHECK CUPS OF
THE FEATHERING HINGES OF THE TAIL AND MAIN
ROTORS HUBS AGAINST HOT AIR.
The total service life of the main and tail rotors
hubs lubricated with oil ВНИИ НП-25 (for the
feathering hinges) and oil mix CM-9 (for the drag
and flappir hinges) should not exceed half the

012.20.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
overhaul period and half of the time between
overhauls.
Operate the rest of the service time on oils MC-20
for the feathering hinges and on oil for hypoidal
gear trains for the drag and flapping hinges.
At an ambient air temperature of below minus 10 °C,
remove grease from the axle of the pawl of the main
rotor blade droop stop (by heating from the
airfield heater), since at this temperature as the
main rotor rotates after the selection of low
speed, the centrifugal droop stop can fail to
operate owing to thickening of the grease which can
result in striking of the main rotor blades against
the tail boom.
Remove the grease from the pawl assembly by forcing
clean oil АМГ-10 into the assembly by the grease
gun until oil comes from under the seals. First
heat up the assembly with hot air at a temperature
range of 60 to 80 °C for 15 to 20 min from the
airfield heater.
2.1.11 Check the operation of kerosene combustion heater
KO-50. After the test, drain fuel from the drain
tank.
2.1.12 Check the pull-up (for the winter) and lubricate
the control cables.
2.1.13 Drain condensate from the air bottles.
2.1.14 Check the pressure in the fire-fighting system
bottles.
2.1.15 Check the quality of the hydraulic fluid (oil
AMГ-10) in the main and duplicating hydraulic
systems.
2.1.16 Change oil in all the hinged control joints.

012.20.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.1.17 Check, blow the engine and main gear box oil
coolers.
2.1.18 Check the vent pipes of the fuel and hydraulic
systems.
2.1.19 Check the presence of extreme marks on the wheels,
tail rotor cable, vertical rods of the swash plate
assembly. In case the marks are absent, apply them.
2.1.20 Set the mark on the blower cone shaft opposite to
mark "3".
2.1.21 During the engine test, perform functional check
of all the units and leak test of all the systems.
2.1.22 The operations over, check the helicopter for
absence of foreign objects.
2.1.23 Remove the landing gear wheels for inspection and
change oil in the bearings.
2.1.24 Make an entry in the Log Book on readiness of the
helicopter for operation in winter.
2.2 Preparation of Helicopter Airborne Equipment for
Winter Operation
2.2.1 Carry out preparation of the airborne equipment
for operation at low temperatures when the ambient
air temperature goes below 5 °C.
2.2.2 Inspect the airborne equipment in the scope of the
periodic inspection. Draw up the list of defects
and correct the defects.
2.2.3 Check the modifications performed according to the
bulletins and enter the information on the
modifications into the helicopter Log Book.
2.2.4 Check to see that the numbers of items installed on
the helicopter are the same as the numbers
specified in the Log Books. Check marking of the
tools.

012.20.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.2.5 Check the storage batteries for condition and the
plugs for operation.
2.2.6. Carry out a test cycle with the purpose of
determining the capacitance of storage batteries.
2.2.7 Check the condition of storage batteries cells on
the helicopter. Repair the damaged cells
2.2.8 Check the resistance of each section of heating
elements of the main rotor blades (it should be
8+ 0.3
− 0.2 ) ohms.
2.2.9 Restore the identification marks on the pipelines
and durite hoses of the static and full pressure of
the pitot static tube, as well as the marks on the
instruments near the pipe connection.
2.2.10 Check airtightness of the pitot static tube, blow
it. Check serviceability of the pitot static tube
heater.
2.2.11 Check serviceability of the slip covers of the
pitot static tube.
2.2.12 Check tightening of the nuts on the instruments
connections and coat them with paint.
2.2.13 Check the presence of limit marks on the pressure
instruments.
2.2.14 Check the condition and attachment of fuses in the
AC junction box.
2.2.15 Check the insulation resistance of the heaters of
the main and tail rotors, the operation of the
anti-icing system.
2.2.16 Check adjustment of temperature resistor ТЭР-1М.
2.2.17 Check serviceability of ice detector CO-121.
2.2.18 Check the condition of the electrical cable of the
main and tail rotors heaters.
2.2.19 Pill in the relevant technical documentation.

012.20.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.3 Preparation of Radio Equipment for Winter Operation
2.3.1 Carry out the preparation of radio equipment for
operation at low temperatures when the ambient air
temperature goes below 5 °C.
2.3.2 Inspect the electronic and radio equipment of the
helicopter in the scope of the periodic inspection,
draw up a list of troubles and correct the revealed
troubles.
2.3.3 Check the modifications performed according to the
bulletins and instructions, availability of entries
in the Log Books.
2.3.4 Compare the designation of items installed on the
helicopter with the those put down in the Log
Books.
2.3.5 Check the condition of shielding of cables,
intactness of equipment bonding.
2.3.6 Check to see that fuses installed in the radio
equipment meet with the required ratings.
Check the intactness of strands of the cable
antennas.
2.3.8 Coat the shock absorbers of the cable antennas of
radio set ЯДРО-1Г1 with grease ЦИАТИM-201
2.3.9 Recondition the paint-and-varnish coating of the
antennas.
2.3.10 Draw up the relevant technical documentation.
2.3.11 Check the insulation resistance of the antenna-
feeder system of the radio communication equipment.
2.4 Preparation of Conveying Equipment for Winter
Operation
2.4.1 Carry out the inspection of conveying equipment in
the scope of the periodic inspection and correct
the revealed defects.

012.20.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.4.2 Check the record in the helicopter Log Book on the
installation of squibs ПП-3 in the heads of the
fire-extinguishing bottles (the date of
installation, year, plant, lot). In case the record
is absent, replace the squibs with new ones and
make the entry in the Log Book.
2.4.3 Check serviceability of the load external
suspension system.
2.4.4 Clean and lubricate the items of the conveying
equipment.
2.4.5 Check reliable locking of the caps of the emergency
control systems of the conveying equipment.
2.4.6 Check to see that conveying equipment systems are
deenergized with the engines started and with
circuit breakers and switches in the helicopter
cabin concerning the air traffic, airborne
equipment, radio equipment are closed.
2.4.7 Draw up the relevant technical documentation.
2.5 Features of Maintenance and Operation of Helicopter
and Engines in Winter
2.5.1 In the course of engines operation at low ambient
air temperatures, add fluid И in the fuel as
described in the relevant operating instructions.
NOTES: 1 In case frozen fuel is used without additive
И, in draining sediment, pay particular
attention at ice crystals in fuel. On the
detection of ice or snow (water), change the
fuel, wash the tank and filters.
2 In fuelling through the tank filler necks, do
not allow water, snow or ice into the tanks.
2.5.2 It is allowed to start engines АИ-9В and ТВ3-117ВM
in winter without heating at the oil temperature in
the engines and in the main gear box of not below

012.20.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
minus 40 °C. At the ambient air and oil temperature
in the engines and main gear box of below 40 °C
before starting the engines, warm up the engines,
main gear box, oil tanks and oil coolers with hot
air with the temperature of no higher than 80 °С
from the ground heater (install the ground heater
as minimum 3 m away from the helicopter).
Supply hot air from the ground heater for engines
TB3-117BM into the under-cowling space and gas
passages during as minimum 20 minutes, for engine
АИ-9В into the under-cowling space with blanked off
slots and exhaust pipe or into the exhaust pipe
with the closed cowlings during 25 to 30 minutes
and for the main gear bох - into the under-cowling
space in the lower part of the gear bох (pan)
during as minimum 20 minutes until the oil
temperature goes as high as minus 15 °C.
2.5.3 If the operating conditions suppose parking time
longer than 5 hours at an ambient air temperature
of below minus 50 °C, drain oil from the oil tanks,
oil coolers, main gear box and its systems; in so
doing, blank off all the gas flow ducts of the
engines, protect the helicopter with the slip
covers. In this case, drain oil from the oil
systems of the engines and main gear box after
warming up the engines or right after their
shutdown. Before filling, heat up oil to a
temperature range of 60 to 70 ºC. It is allowed to
crank the engine only after warming up the engines
and main gear box with hot air from the ground
heater.
2.5.4 At an ambient air temperature of below 25 °C it is
allowed to remove and install hoses only after
heating them to an above-zero temperature (of not
higher than 70 C). Check heating of hoses by touch.

012.20.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
To avoid cracking of hoses removed from the
helicopter at a temperature of below minus 25 ºC,
protect them against bends, pinchings and other
deformations.
2.5.5 Before starting the engines at parking, remove the
slip covers from the dust protection device and the
plugs, make sure the inlet ducts of the dust
protection device are -free from ice, the blower
inlet duct surface is free from ice, the blades of
the compressor rotors and of free turbines are free
from freezing, the inner elements of the inlet duct
of engine AИ-9B are free from ice by cranking by
hand the compressor of engine АИ-9В.
2.5.6 At an ambient air temperature from 5 °C and below,
gently, without applying heavy forces (to avoid
damage to the compressor blades) crank the
TB3-117BM engine compressor rotors by the crank,
crank the free turbine rotors manually by the
blades. In cranking the compressor rotor, remove
the crank after a full shutdown of the rotor. In
case of freezing of the blades of the compressor
rotor or free turbine or in case of icing of the
engine parts or dust protection device ducts, heat
the engine and dust protection device with hot air
from the ground heater. After that, make sure that
the rotors easily rotate and that the parts are
free from ice. Supply hot air into the engine gas
passage.
CAUTION: NEVER START THE ENGINES IF THE DUST PROTECTION
DEVICES ARE COVERED WITH ICE.
2.5.7 When testing the engines on the ground under icing
conditions, switch on the engine anti-icing system
without waiting for coming up of annunciator ICING
(ОБЛЕДЕНЕНИЕ). Icing is especially dangerous if at
the ambient air temperature close to zero

012.20.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(approximately in the range of plus 5 to minus 10
°C) there is precipitation such as a drizzling fog,
rain or wet snow.
2.5.8 In winter, pay attention to engines cooling before
shutdown to avoid warpage of parts of the engines
hot sections; for this purpose, before shutting
down the engines, run them at idle power for 2 to
3 min.
2.6 Features of Operation of Airborne Equipment in Winter
2.6.1 In the course of operation of the electrical
equipment at low and severely low temperatures, a
more attentive care of all the items and units is
demanded. It is necessary to remove ice (moisture),
snow, hoar frost from the parts and units of the
electrical equipment in time, check serviceability
of the heat insulation and heating elements.
2.6.2 At an ambient air temperature down to minus 40 °C
the time of heating of recorder БУР-1-2 is not more
than 3 min, and at a temperature range of minus
40 °C to minus 60 °C, for no longer than 15 min.
2.6.3 At low temperatures the rubber items loose their
elasticity and cracks can occur on them. Therefore,
pay particular attention to the shock absorbers and
other rubber parts of the items of the airborne
equipment.
2.6.4 At sub-zero temperatures moisture in the pipelines
of the systems of the pitot pressure tubes and in
the pressure instruments is likely to freeze.
Moisture can accumulate owing to misting or get
into pipes due to untimely protection of the pitot
static tubes with the slip covers.
To avoid moisture accumulation in the system:

012.20.00
Page 12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
disconnect the full and static pressure pipes
from the pitot static tubes and from the
instruments;
blow the pipelines with compressed air at a
pressure of 50 to 150 kPa (0.5 to 1.5 kgf/cm ).
For avoiding ingress of water into the system
from the compressed air bottle, install the
bottle askew at an angle of no less than 30° with
the connection looking up;
after blowing, connect the pipes to the pitot
static tubes and to the instruments, check
correct connection and airtightness of the
system;
in the course of operation in autumn and in
winter, blow the pipes of the pitot static tubes
before each flying day, at least once a month,
check the heating elements of the pitot static
tubes. In the pre-flight preparation, use test
set КПУ-3 to make sure that the pipes are not
clogged;
at parking, reliably protect the pitot static
tubes with the slip covers.
2.6.5 IT IS PROHIBITED to open up the instruments after
bringing them in a warm room. Allow the equipment
to warm up to the room temperature.
2.6.6 Use storage batteries in compliance with storage
battery Description and Operating Instructions.
2.7 Features of Operation of Radio Equipment in winter
2.7.1 In the course of operation of the radio equipment
at low and particularly low temperatures, a more
attentive care of all the items and units is
required.

012.20.00
Page 13
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.7.2 It is necessary to remove ice (moisture), snow,
hoar frost from the parts and items of the radio
equipment in time.
2.7.3 At low temperatures rubber items loose elasticity
and cracks can occur on them.
Therefore, pay particular attention to the shock
absorbers and other rubber parts of the radio
equipment items.
2.7.4 Thoroughly examine the cables, since at low sub-
zero temperatures, the insulation of the adapter
and RF cables, unit cables of the assemblies and
the equivalents becomes fragile and can break at
sudden bends.
2.7.5 Pay particular attention to stretching of the
antenna cables and, if necessary, adjust their
stretching.
2.7.6 IT IS PROHIBITED to open or switch on the radio
equipment after bringing it in a warm room. Allow
the equipment to warm up to the room temperature.
2.7.7 Bear in mind that at low temperatures the radio
equipment can be ready for operation some 5 to 10
min after switching on.
2.7.8 In the course of operation of automatic direction
finders APK-15M and АРК-УД at especially low
temperatures, allow for some deterioration of
sensitivity and other main parameters of the
direction finders which is revealed in a sluggish
approach of the course deviation bar to the bearing
position.
2.8 Preparation of Helicopter and Engines for Operation
in Summer
2.8.1 Clean the helicopter of dust and dirt by washing it
with water and soap.

012.20.00
Page 14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.8.2 Inspect the helicopter in the scope of the periodic
inspection and draw up the list of defects. Correct
the revealed defects.
2.8.3 Carry out the scheduled maintenance operations.
2.8.4 Carry out modifications according to the bulletins.
2.8.5 Restore the heat-insulation of the pipes, if any
and if it is necessary.
2.8.6 Drain oil from the intermediate and tail rotor gear
boxes, fill in thick oil (in case the gear boxes
are filled with mix "50/50", do not drain oil).
2.8.7 Change the oil with oil MC-20 in the feathering
hinges of the main and tail rotors hubs. Oil
MC-20 is used in the feathering hinges of the main
and tail rotors hubs at above-zero ambient air
temperatures or at a short-time (up to 10 days)
temperature drop a down to minus 10 °C.
2.8.8 Check stretching (against the summer schedule) and
lubricate the tail rotor control cable.
2.8.9 Drain sediment from the compressed air bottles.
2.8.10 Check pressure in the bottles of the fire-fighting
system.
2.8.11 Check the operation of the tail rotor hinges:
the universal joint hinge by swinging the blade;
the feathering hinge by pushing the pedals.
2.8.12 Check to see that the designations of items are
the same as those entered in the Log Books.
2.8.13 Check the tools for availability. Replace the
defective tools and apply marking.
2.8.14 Check the quality of hydraulic fluid АМГ-10 in the
main and duplicating hydraulic systems.
2.8.15 Change grease in all the hinged joints of the
control system.

012.20.00
Page 15
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.8.16 Wash, blow the oil coolers of the engine and gear
box.
2.8.17 Check pressure in the landing gear wheel tires
using the pressure gauge.
2.8.18 Check the vent pipes of the fuel and vent systems.
2.8.19 Check the presence of red marks: on the wheels,
tail rotor cable, vertical rods of the swash plate
assembly. In case of absence, apply new marks.
2.8.20 Check the reliable operation of the emergency
release mechanisms of the door, emergency hatches-
ports and blisters. Change oil.
2.8.21 Set the mark on the blower cone shaft opposite to
mark "JI".
2.8.22 Check the slip covers and plugs and if need be,
repair them.
2.8.23 In the course of operation of engines, check
serviceability of all the items and airtightness of
systems.
2.8.24 All the operations over, check the helicopter for
foreign objects.
2.8.25 Inspect the flight compartment glass panels.
2.8.26 Make an entry in the Log Book on the helicopter
readiness for operation in summer.
2.9 Preparation of Airborne Equipment for Operation in
Summer
2.9.1 Inspect the airborne equipment in the scope of the
periodic inspection, draw up the list of defects
and correct the defects.
2.9.2 Check the storage batteries and the plugs for
operation.

012.20.00
Page 16
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.9.3 Carry out a test cycle with the purpose of
determining the capacitance of the storage
batteries.
2.9.4 Recondition the identification marks on the
pipelines and durite hoses of the static and pitot
pressure in the pitot static tube, as well as the
marks on the instruments near the connections.
2.9.5 Check the correct setting of the atmospheric
pressure using altimeter ВД-10ВК.
2.9.6 Check serviceability of the slip covers of the
pitot static tube, make new streamers.
2.9.7 Check reliable tightening of the nuts on the
instrument connections, coat them with paint.
2.9.8 Recondition the identification marks on the glasses
and instrument cases in the flight compartment.
2.9.9 Check the presence of correction charts.
2.9.10 Check the attachment and condition of fuses in the
AC junction box.
2.9.11 Inspect the remote control mechanisms.
2.9.12 Inspect the limit switches.
2.9.13 Draw up the relevant technical documentation.
2.10 Preparation of Radio Equipment for Operation in
Summer
2.10.1 Inspect the electronic and radio equipment of the
helicopter in the scope of a preliminary
preparation, draw up the list of defects and
correct the revealed defects.
2.10.2 Check to see that the operations according to the
bulletins and instructions have been performed,
that entries have been made in the Log Books.

012.20.00
Page 17
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.10.3 Check to see that the designations of items
installed on the helicopter are the same as those
specified in the Log Book.
2.10.4 Check the cables shielding, intactness of bonding
of the radio equipment.
2.10.5 Check to see that the fuses installed in the radio
equipment correspond to the specified ratings.
2.10.6 Check intactness of strands of the cable antennas.
2.10.7 Coat the shock absorbers of the cable antennas
with grease ЦИАТИМ-201.
2.10.8 Check paint-and-varnish coating of radio
equipment. Restore paint in case of any defects.
2.10.9 Draw up the relevant technical documentation.
2.11 Preparation of Lifting and Conveying Equipment for
Operation in Summer
2.11.1 Inspect the lifting and conveying equipment in the
scope of the periodic inspection and correct the
revealed defects.
2.11.2 Check to see that the Log Books of the helicopter
have the entry about squibs ПП-3 in the heads of
the fire-extinguishing bottles (the date of
installation, year, plant, lot).
2.11.3 If the entry is absent, replace the squibs with
new ones and make the entry on the operations
performed in the Log Books.
2.11.4 Check serviceability of the external suspension.
2.11.5 Check serviceability of system ЭKСР-46.
2.11.6 Check reliable locking of the caps of the
emergency control system.
2.11.7 Check to see that the paratroop equipment is
deenergiaed with the engines running and that all
the circuit breakers and switches in the helicopter

012.20.00
Page 18
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
flight compartment connected with the traffic
control, airborne and radio equipment are closed.
2.11.8 Draw up the relevant technical documentation.
2.12 Features of Operation of Helicopter and Engines at
High Temperatures and Elevated Humidity
2.12.1 High ambient air temperature and elevated solar
radiation are the cause for minor cracks on the
helicopter external windows. Therefore, with the
helicopter at parking, do not fail to protect the
flight compartment with the slip covers.
2.12.2 At a prolonged parking of the helicopter, protect
the wheel tires against sun rays.
2.12.3 High temperature, elevated humidity and dust
create favorable conditions for corrosion.
During the post-flight inspections, thoroughly
inspect the external surface of the helicopter
airframe and at least once in five days in all
kinds of helicopter preparation, thoroughly wash
the airframe external surface with fresh water with
a subsequent drying with hot air or wiping with dry
clean cloths. Act in the same way as in case of
basing near a sea.
In case of heavy contamination of the surface,
carry out washing with the use of neutral soap.
2.12.4 In case of deterioration of the paint-and-varnish
coating of the airframe surface, carry out the
retouching of the defective surfaces in compliance
with the Maintenance Manual. For a short-time
period, prior to retouching, it is allowed to coat
the defective surface with grease AMC-3 or with the
gun grease.
2.12.5 To avoid deterioration of the paint-and-varnish
coating and corrosion, in hot and dry weather carry

012.20.00
Page 19
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
out airing of the flight compartment by opening the
doors and hatches.
In time, perform greasing of the articulated and
hinged joints of the helicopter airframe.
Inspect the magnesium alloy parts of the helicopter
control system, of the airborne derrick
installation, sliding blisters and other points
during all kinds of scheduled maintenance checks.
2.12.6 The scheduled maintenance checks provided to be
carried out every 30 days of parking should be
performed every 15 days using, if possible, the
days with favorable weather for airing of the
helicopter.
During preventive inspections of the helicopter,
pay particular attention to checking the parts in
hard-to-reach for airing places where moisture is
likely to accumulate (such as under-floor space,
cells of the storage batteries, etc.), load-bearing
parts, frames, stringers, bolted joints of the tail
boom and tail boom pylon and of the fuselage, shock
struts, magnesium parts of the control system.
2.12.7 At high temperature and elevated humidity, meet
the following requirements:
in carrying out the internal preservation of
engine TB3-117BM before a false start, perform
the inspection and washing of the oil filter;
carry out an additional inspection and washing of
the oil filters of engines and main gear box
every 25+5 flying hours;
in a humid tropical climate with sea fogs, at a
prolonged parking, inspect every 2 or 3 days the
engines and main gear box to spot fungus and
corrosion, moreover, in the magnesium-alloy
parts, and every 5 days of parking start engines

012.20.00
Page 20
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TB3-117BM with warming up for 5 to 10 rain at
idle power.
2.12.8 Before the season of continuous rains and mists
(but at least twice a year) be particularly careful
in examining the paint-and-varnish coating of the
helicopter. On the detection of deterioration of
the paint-and-varnish coating or corrosion, remove
the corrosion and recondition the paint-and-varnish
coating.
2.13 Features of Operation of Airborne Equipment at High
Temperatures and Elevated Humidity
2.13.1 In the course of operation of the helicopters at
high ambient air temperature, elevated humidity and
heavy precipitation, metal parts and units are
likely to be attacked by corrosion, rubber parts
are likely become prematurely aged and cracked, the
contacts of switching devices and airborne
equipment units turn oxidized.
2.13.2 The scheduled maintenance checks for the airborne
equipment to be performed every seven days of
parking will be performed every five days using the
days having favorable atmospheric conditions for
airing and drying the equipment items.
Open the covers of the Junction boxes and boards,
the faces of the electrical panel and instrument
boards, detachable strips of electrical cables,
blow the inner spaces and wiring with dry
compressed air at a pressure of 150 to 200 kPa (1.5
to 2 kgf/cm2).
2.13.3 Before and after the season of continuous rains
and fogs (but at least twice a year) thoroughly
inspect the paint-and-varnish coatings of the
airborne equipment items, as well as the wiring.
Thoroughly clean the spotted surfaces with

012.20.00
Page 21
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
defective coatings of corrosion and dirt, degrease,
recondition the coatings. At the same time, perform
the operations as per Para. 2.13.2.
2.13.4 Keep the storage batteries in closed premises at a
temperature of minus 60 °C to plus 30 °C. The
storage at higher temperatures and direct
atmospheric precipitation and sun rays is not
tolerated. This shortens the service life of the
battery.
2.14 Features of Operation of Radio Equipment at High
Temperatures and Elevated Humidity
2.14.1 In the course of operation of the helicopter at
high temperature, elevated humidity, heavy dust,
carry out special preventive checks which will
provide a fail-free operation of instruments and
items of the radio equipment under those
conditions.
In the course of operation in hot climate, bear in
mind that the temperature inside the helicopter
subject to sun rays is somewhat higher than the
ambient air temperature.
2.14.2 The scheduled maintenance checks for the radio
equipment to be performed every seven days of
parking should be carried out every five days
using, if possible, the days having a favorable
weather for airing and drying of the equipment
items. In so doing, blow the units and wiring
(without opening the units) with dry compressed air
at a pressure of 100 to 150 kPa (1 to 1.5 kgf/cm2).
2.14.3 Before and after the season of continuous rains
and fogs (but at least twice a year) particularly
thoroughly inspect the paint-and-varnish coatings
and wires and cables of the radio equipment items.
On detection of deterioration of the paint-and-

012.20.00
Page 22
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
varnish coating and corrosion, remove the corrosion
and recondition the paint-and-varnish coating.
CAUTION: NEVER PAINT THE ANTENNA INSULATORS AND COVERS
OF HORN ANTENNAS A-037 WITH ANY PAINT, AS WELL
AS PAINT THE RADOMES OF APK-15, АРК-УД AND
ДИСС-32-90A ANTENNAS WITH NON-TRANSPARENT
PAINTS.
2.14.4 At sub-zero temperatures, strictly observe the
operating conditions for the radio set and shorten
the time of transmission, if possible.
2.14.5 When handing item 8A813K (Ц) in humid tropical
climate, perform the following operations:
if the helicopter is parked, switch on the item
every five days of parking. If the item is out of
operation during a month and longer, remove the
units from the helicopter and handle them over to
the depot or other room provided with air
conditioning unit or subject it to preservation.
Blank off all the waveguide flanges opened during
the removal, moreover, those installed in the
helicopter, with the plugs removed during
unpacking of the item.
CAUTION: IT IS PROHIBITED TO BLANK OFF THE WAVEGUIDES
WITH PAPER OR OTHER STUFF, AS WELL AS TO GLUE
OFF THE FLANGES WITH STICKY MATERIALS RIGHT
OVER THEIR OPERATING (MATING) FACES.
In case of regularly performed flights at a
period of no shorter than one flight per five
days, the above-operations can be neglected;
with the purpose of stipulating the favorable
conditions for evaporation of moisture
accumulated in the units, as well as for
prevention of fungus development irrespective

012.20.00
Page 23
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
of duration of basing in the area with humid
climate, once in three days, free from
precipitation, air the service compartment. It is
also necessary to swing aside the radome, shield
it against direct sun rays and allow it to air.
In the course of operation of item 8А813К(Ц) in
dust-laden environment, clean the removed units
of dust during the scheduled maintenance check.
At parking in the dust-laden area, protect the
nose fairing with the slip cover and remove the
cover as rare as possible.
2.15 Features of Operation of Helicopter on Dusty and
Sandy Grounds and Airfields
2.15.1 In the course of operation of helicopters on dusty
or sandy ground, before starting the engines, clean
the ground of hard particles which can get into the
engine air intakes and, if possible, sprinkle it
lavishly with water. Besides, choose the parking
area for the helicopter for starting and testing
the engines, so that to keep dust and hard
particles raised bу the rotors of the neighboring
helicopters with running engines from getting into
the engines.
2.15.2 After starting the engines and reaching the idle
power, actuate the dust protection device. In so
doing, a respective annunciator should come on. As
soon as the helicopter abandons the dusty (sandy),
ground, cut out the dust protection device.
With the helicopter at parking, protect the engines
dust protection devices with special slip covers.
2.15.3 With the view of timely detection of wear of the
guide vane assembly and compressor stage 1 blades,
measure the wear of blades with test instruments
У6300-0769 with the dust protector fairing removed.

012.20.00
Page 24
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.15.4 In the course of helicopter operation on dusty and
sandy grounds and airfields, pay particular
attention to the blade surfaces, namely:
abrasive wear of blade edge tippings;
dents on the surface of the blade edge tippings
from impacts of small particles of soil and
crushed stone at the helicopter takeoff and
landing;
damage, abrasive wear and cracks of rubber of the
heater strip. Besides, the following can occur on
the tail rotor blades: abrasive wear of the
leading edge tip;
local deterioration and chipping out of glue K-
153 with rubber powder in the places of
attachment of the heater strip to the tail
section skin }
local separation and deterioration of sealing
compound over the contour of butt Jaws.
In case of detection of the said wears and damage
falling out of tolerances, repair the blades.
2.16 Features of Operation of Helicopter in Seaside and
Solonchak Areas
2.16.1 When the helicopter is based in the seaside and
solonchak areas, observe the following
requirements:
protect the blades against sea water;
protect the blades against a salt film}
pay particular attention to the paint-and-varnish
coating. On the detection of deterioration,
recondition the paint-and-varnish coating right
away.

012.20.00
Page 25
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Before reconditioning the paint-and-varnish
coating, thoroughly examine the defective
surfaces with x4 to x7 magnifying glass with the
purpose of detection of corrosion of the
longeron;
after a storm or other phenomena which can bring
sea water or salt on the blades, wash the blades
with fresh water without delay. After washing,
thoroughly dry the blades with hot air and wipe
with a dry clean cloth;
in areas where a salt film is likely to occur on
the blades, regularly (but at least once every
ten days) thoroughly wash the external surfaces
of blades with fresh water, after that dry the
blades with hot air or wipe with a dry clean
cloth. For washing, use fresh water heated to 30
to 40 C, do not remove the blades from the
helicopter.
Washing can be also performed by a small jet from
a hose at a pressure of up to 50 kPa
2
(0.5 kgf/cm ).
After every washing, rotate the blades with the
engines-running during 5 min.
3 CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCE
3.1 Make sure that the helicopter is reliably grounded.
3.2 Install the storage batteries in the helicopter.
3.3 Open the cap of connector ШРАП-400-3Ф at the port
side between Frames Nos 4H and 5H.
3.4 Connect the external electrical power source to the
helicopter electric system, couple the cable socket
with ШРАП-400-3Ф plug in the helicopter and turn on
switches STORAGE ВАТТ 1 (АККУМУЛЯТОРЫ-l), ВАТТ 2
(АККУМУЛЯТОРЫ -2) on the electrical board of the

012.20.00
Page 26
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
electrical panel. Annunciator EXTERNAL POWER IN USE
(АЭР. ПИТ/ ПОДКЛ) should come on.
3.5 Check the voltage of the external power source
against helicopter voltmeter ВФ-0,4-150 by setting
the AC voltage wafer selector switch in positions EXT
PWR (АЭР. ПИТАН.) - А (В, С) in turn. The helicopter
voltmeter should read a voltage of 115 to 119 V in
all the positions.
3.6 Turn on switch EXT PWR (АЭР. ПИТАНИЕ) on the
electrical board of the electrical panel.
3.7 Check the connection of the external power source to
the helicopter electrical system by the voltage
across the buses, for this purpose, set the AC
voltage wafer selector switch to positions GEN No. 1
- А (В, С) (1 ГЕНЕРАТОР - А, В, С), GEN No. 2 - А
(В, С) (2 ГЕНЕРАТОР - А, В, С) in turn. The
helicopter voltmeter should read a voltage of 115 to
119 V in all the positions.
3.8 All the required operations performed, disconnect the
storage batteries, disconnect the cable socket of the
external power source from ШРАП-400-3Ф plug and stop
the connector with its cap.
4 FILLING HELICOPTER SYSTEMS
4.1 Grades of oils and fuels used for filling the
helicopter systems are given in Table 1 and Manuals
of respective vendor completing items.
Table 1
Description
Grade Application
of material
Fuels
Kerosene TC-1, T-1, PT and Fuel system of engines
their mixtures TB3-17BM and АИ-9В

012.20.00
Page 27
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 1, continued
Description
Grade Application
of material
Oils
Oil Б-3В acc. Oil systems of engines
Specifications, TB3-117BM, АИ-9В and main
their mixtures. gear box
For hypoidal Intermediate and tail rotor
gear trains gear boxes, flapping and drag
TC hyp hinges of main rotor hub
MC-20 Feathering hinges of main and
tail rotors hubs at ambient
air temperature above minus
5 ºC
ВНИИ НП-25 Feathering hinges of main and
АМГ-10 tail rotors hubs at ambient
air temperature from minus 25
ºC and below Helicopter
hydraulic system, nose and
main landing gear shock
struts, tail bumper
Oil mixtures Intermediate and tail rotor
MC-9 (2/3 by gear boxes
volume of oil
TC hyp and 1/3 of
oil АМГ-10),
oil mixture
"50/50" (50 %
by volume of
oil TC hyp and 50
% of oil АМГ-
10)
Gases
Commercial ГОСТ 9293-74 Hydraulic accumulators, nose
nitrogen and main landing gear shock
Air struts, tail bumper
Helicopter air system and
landing gear wheel tires

012.20.00
Page 28
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4.2 Helicopter Systems Tanks

4.2.1 Capacity of fuel tanks, ltr:
service tank 445+10
starboard external fuel tank of enlarged 1110± 10
capacity without item ППУ
left external fuel tank of enlarged 1140+10
capacity without item ППУ
extra fuel tank 915+10
4.2.2 Capacity of items of oil system, ltr:
engine TB3-117BM . 17
including:
oil tank 11
pipelines 2.3
oil cooler 2.3
engine lines. 1.4
NOTE: The minimum permissible amount of oil in the
oil tank of each engine is 8 ltr. The
operation of engine with the oil amount of
less than 8 ltr is not tolerated.
main gear box BP-14 47
including:
main gear box 37
oil cooler (each) 3.7
pipelines 2.6
NOTE: The trapped oil in the main gear box is 5 to
6 ltr.
engine АИ-9В 2.4 to 2.6
intermediate gear box 1.3

012.20.00
Page 29
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

tail rotor gear box 1.7

4.2.3 Capacity of hydraulic system, ltr:
main and duplicating hydraulic systems 22
including:
hydraulic tank of main system 10
hydraulic tank of duplicating system 10
pipelines and items 2
4.2.4 Capacity of landing gear shock struts, ltr:
main landing gear 2x3.51
including:
LP tires 2x1.11
HP tires 2x2.4
nose landing gear 2.08
tail bumper 0.3
4.2.5 The layout of filling points in the helicopter is
shown in Fig. 2.
4.3 Helicopter Fuelling. Preparation for Tank Fuelling
4.3.1 Before fuelling, check against the Certificate the
fuel grade. Make sure that the engineer's approval
of the helicopter fuelling with this grade of fuel
is authorized by the Certificate. Check the seals
of the refueller, the screen filter in the
dispensing gun and timely replacement of the cloth
filter.
4.3.2 Ground the helicopter and the refueller.
4.3.3 Drain sediment from the refueller sump. Make sure
the sediment is clean.
4.3.4 Make sure that all the electrical power consumers
on the helicopter but for the fuelling instruments
are OFF.

012.20.00
Page 30
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Connection for Charging Nose

Landing Gear Shock Strut
2 Filler Neck of Engine Oil
Tank
3 Filler Neck of Main Gear Box
4 Air Charging Connection of
Duplicating System
5 Filler Neck of Hydraulic
Tank
6 Filler Neck of Service Tank
7 Air Charging Connection of
Main System Hydraulic
Accumulator
8 Filler Neck (Breather) of
Tail Rotor Gear Box
9. Filler Heck of Oil Tank of
Engine АИ-9В
10 Filler Neck of Intermediate
Gear Box
11 Skid Block Shock Absorber
Charging Connection
12 Oil Filling Valve (A - of
main hydraulic System, В - of
duplicating hydraulic system)
13 Air System Charging
Connection
14 Tire Charging Connection
(A - LP shock strut of main
landing gear;
В - HP shock strut of maing
landing gear)
15 Filler Keck of Extra Fuel
Tank
16 Filler Heel; of External
Fuel Tank

Helicopter Fuelling Diagram

Figure 2

012.20.00
Pages 31/32
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.3.5 Check the fire-fighting facilities (fire
extinguishers, containers with sand, etc.) for
availability.
4.3.6 Before opening the filler neck covers of the tank,
wipe them with a clean cloth.
Safety Precautions to Be Observed in Fuelling
4.3.7 Fuel the helicopter only at parking areas equipped
with the fire-fighting facilities.
4.3.8 The fuelled helicopter should be positioned at
least 25 m away from other flying vehicles with the
running engines.
4.3.9 Check reliable grounding of the helicopter and
refueller. The refueller cable for equalizing the
electrical potentials will be connected with metal
unpainted landing gear shock strut
4.3.10 In fuelling, the refueler should be positioned at
least 3 m away from the helicopter and so as to be
capable to depart from the helicopter without
maneuvering.
4.3.11 The drivers of the refueler should study and
observe safety precautions and fire-fighting rules.
4.3.12 In fuelling from-the refueller having an
autonomous drive of the pump, the truck engine
should be shut down. In all cases of fuelling, the
refueller driver should stay at the refueller
pumping bay and check the preset fuelling
condition.
4.3.13 The persons who do not belong to the helicopter
crew or to the attending personnel are not allowed
to stay at the helicopter being refuelled.
4.3.14 IT IS PROHIBITED to run refuelling: with the
engines running; during a thunderstorm; if the

012.20.00
Page 33
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
fire-fighting facilities are not available earlier
than in 5 min after shutting down the engines.
4.3.15 In refueling, NEVER:
start the helicopter engines;
carry out the operations on maintenance of the
electronic, radio and instrument equipment;
switch on or off current power sources or
consumers; use dome lights without protective
devices; warm up the engines;
carry out any operations on the helicopter or in
the range of less than 25 m about the helicopter
which are likely to form sparkles,-
spill fuel on the ground or on the helicopter.
4.3.16 Drain the sediment in a special clean glass vessel
and after check, pour it in a container specially
intended for the purpose.
WARNING: IT IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED TO DRAIN SEDIMENT
ONTO THE GROUND.
4.3.17 Before refuelling, touch the helicopter skin with
the dispenser gun at a minimum distance of 1.5 m
from the filler neck to equalize the electrical
potentials.
4.3.18 The attending personnel should exercise care to
avoid a direct contact with the aviation fuel,
inhalation of its fumes.
4.3.19 IT IS PROHIBITED to suck fuel with the mouth for
its transfer with the help of a hose from the tank
into tank.
4.3.20 Exercise all the safety precautions for refuelling
the helicopter during fuel draining.
Time Required for Fuelling

012.20.00
Page 34
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.3.21 Time for fuelling the service, external and extra
fuel tanks from the refueller is 26 min.
4.3.22 Time required for fuelling each tank separately,
mins:
for service tank 4
for starboard external fuel tank 8
for port side external fuel tank 8
for extra port side tank 6
General Instructions on Filling Fuel Tanks
4.3.23 Before opening the filler neck covers of the
tanks, wipe them with a clean cloth.
4.3.24 For a full tank fuelling, leave some vacant space
to allow for a possible fuel expansion. The fuel
level should not exceed the lower cut of the filler
neck.
4.3.25 Check a full fuelling against annunciator TANK
FULL (БАК ПОЛОН) arranged near the tank filler
necks. The service tank has no annunciator TANK
FULL. The check of fuelling of the service tank is
performed against the fuel quantity indicator.
4.3.26 The tanks can bе fuelled both from the refueller
and from the ground containers with the help of a
hand or an electric pump.
4.3.27 After fuelling the tanks, proceed as follows:
tightly, without skewings, close the filler neck
covers and lock them; wipe the external surfaces
on which fuel has got; check the position of the
valves; close the filler necks hatch covers.
Filling Fuel System Without Extra Fuel Tanks/
4.3.28 Open the hatch covers (in the floor of the cargo
compartment) providing access to the rear and front

012.20.00
Page 35
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
shut-off cross-feed valves of the external fuel
tanks and by-pass valve of the extra fuel tanks.
Make sure that the shut-off valves are in position
OPEN (ОТКРЫТО), the by-pass valve in position
CLOSED (ЗАКРЫТО).
NOTES: 1 The shut-off cross-feed valves of the
external fuel tanks should always be in the
open position but for the cases when it is
necessary owing to some reason or other to
disconnect cross feeding of the external
fuel tanks (in a separate drain (fuelling)
or before the removal of one of the tanks);
in this case, the valves should be closed.
2 The by-pass valve should be always closed.
4.3.29 In turn, unlock and open the covers of the filler
necks of the external fuel tanks and fill then with
fuel. Determine the full fuelling against coming up
of the annunciator arranged, at the port and
starboard sides of the fuselage opposite to the
filler neck.
4.3.30 Open the hatch cover of the service tank filler
neck. Unlock and open the filler neck cover. Fuel
the service tank.
4.3.31 Read the fuel quantity indicator arranged on the
RH instrument board to check the fuel amount, for
this purpose, in turn, set the fuel quantity
indicator selector switch to positions TOTAL
(СУММА), F port (П Л ), F stbd (П пр ), FLOW (РАСХ). After
the check, switch off the fuel quantity indicator.
4.3.32 Close the hatch covers of the shut-off and bу-pass
valves.
CAUTION: IF A DOUBT ARISES THAT WATER HAS GOT INTO
FUEL, RUN THE CHECK INTRODUCING 3 OR 4

012.20.00
Page 36
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CRYSTALS OF POTASSIUM MANGANATE INTO THE

FUEL DRAINED FROM ANY POINT IN AMOUNT OF
0.5 ltr. IF WATER IS PRESENT, THE
POTASSIUM MANGANATE WILL TURN VIOLET, IN
THIS CASE, NEVER USE THE FUEL.
Fuelling Systems with Extra Fuel Tanks
4.3.33 Open the hatch cover of the bу-pass valve and set
the valve to position CLOSED (ЗАКРЫТО).
4.3.34 In turn, open the hatch cover of the filler necks
of the LH and RH extra tanks. Unlock and open the
filler necks covers. Fuel the extra tanks.
Determine a full fuelling against coming up of the
annunciators arranged above the filler necks
hatches.
4.3.35 Fuel the external fuel tanks.
4.3.36 Set the bу-pass valve to a position corresponding
to a simultaneous fuel useup from the LH and RH
extra fuel tanks.
NOTE: If one extra fuel tank is installed, set the
by-pass valve to a position corresponding
fuel useup from the installed tank.
4.3.37 Close the hatch cover of the by-pass valve.
4.3.38 Fuel the service tank.
4.3.39 Check the amount of fuel against the fuel quantity
indicator, for this purpose, in turn, set the fuel
quantity indicator selector switches to positions
TOTAL, F port , F stbd , FLOW, P (Д). After the check,
switch off the fuel quantity indicator.
NOTE: The amount of fuel of the RH extra fuel tank
is not indicated in the check of total fuel
amount against the fuel quantity indicator.

012.20.00
Page 37
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.4 Filling Oil Systems of Engines and Main Gear Box
4.4.1 Ground the oil servicing tank and the helicopter.
4.4.2 Check to see that the grade and quality of the oil
taken from the oil servicing tank corresponds to
the grade and quality put down in the Certificate.
4.4.3 Fill oil into the oil tanks of engines TB3-117BM
through the oil filters with the screen size of up
to 63 µ. Fill in the oil tank of each engine with
oil through the filler neck up to the mark on the
oil level sight gage inscribed FULL - 11 LTR (ПОЛНО
- 11 Л). The minimum oil quantity in the tank is В
Itr which corresponds to mark MINIM - 8 LTR (МИНИМ
- 8 Л) on the oil level sight gage.
The initial oil filling in a "dry" engine is
performed in two stages:
fill oil into the engine tank to mark FULL - 11
LTR on the oil level sight gage;
crank the engine. At the moment of cranking, check
the oil pressure which should not be less than 50
kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2). Replenish the tank up to mark
FULL -11 LTR on the oil level sight gage.
NOTE: In case oil pressure is zero in cranking,
release air from the lower engine oil pump
block by driving out the cap arranged on the
opposite side of the pressure reducing
valve;
close the filler neck with the cover and lock it.
4.4.4 Fill in the main gear box with oil through the
filler neck using the oil filter with the screen
size of up to 63 µ. Check the amount of oil in the
main gear box against marks on the oil level sight
gage installed on the filler neck.
The oil level in the main gear box should be:

012.20.00
Page 38
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
at a single-scale oil level sight gage, not above
mark FULL - between mark FULL and the frame of the
oil level sight gage;
at a double-scale oil level sight gage, between
the lower and upper marks of scale 80MT.
NOTE For determining the oil level in the main gear
box, position the helicopter on a level
horizontal surface.
Fill oil into a "dry" gear box in two stages:
fill 39 Itr of oil, start the engines and select
idle power for 4 to 5 min; fill in oil up to the
recommended level.
CAUTION: IT IS PROHIBITED TO OPERATE THE MAIN GEAR
BOX WITH THE OIL AMOUNT BELOW THE "FULL"
MARK AND BEYOND THE FRAME CUTOUT AT A
SINGLE-SCALE OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAGE AND
BELOW THE LOWER MARK AND BEYOND THE UPPER
MARK OF SCALE "80MT" AT THE DOUBLE-SCALE
OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAGE;
close the filler neck with the cover and lock it.
4.4.5 Fill oil into the oil system of engine АИ-9В
through the filler neck of the oil tank using the
oil filter with the screen size of up to 63 µ.
Check the amount of oil inthe oil tank of engine
АИ-9В against the marks on the oil level sight gage
of the tank. The recommended oil level in the oil
tank should be in between marks FULL and REPLENISH
(ДОЛЕЙ). The oil level can reach upper mark FULL
if the oil level before filling was checked right
after engine operation (oil in the tank is hot).
At the first filling of the oil system of a "dry"
engine, after filling oil into the oil tank, carry
out cranking, after that, check the oil level in

012.20.00
Page 39
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the oil tank and, if necessary, replenish the tank.
Close the filler neck cover and lock it.
4.5 Filling Intermediate and Tail Rotor Gear Boxes
4.5.1 For filling the intermediate and tail rotor gear
boxes, use a maintenance stand or an airborne
multi-purpose ladder.
4.5.2 In filling the gear boxes with oil, position the
helicopter on a level horizontal ground.
4.5.3 Before filling the intermediate and tail rotor gear
boxes in winter, first heat up oil to a temperature
of 60 to 80 °С.
4.5.4 Fill in oil into the intermediate gear box through
the hole for the oil dip stick with the help of oil
can 8AT-9129-00 with a flexible hose after opening
the hatch cover providing access to the oil dip
stick.
4.5.5 Fill oil into the tail rotor gear box through the
hole closed with the upper plug with the help of
oil can 8AT-9129-00 with a flexible hose.
4.5.6 Check filling the gear boxes with oil only against
the marks on the oil level sight gages.
The oil level should be against mark "Т" ("B").
4.5.7 After filling the gear boxes, reinstall the oil dip
stick of the intermediate gear box. Lock the oil
dip stick of the intermediate gear box and the plug
of the tail rotor gear box. Lock the oil dip stick
and the plug. Clean the oil streaks with a cloth
moistened with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-00 and squeezed
out.
4.5.8 Close the hatch covers providing access to the oil
dip stick and oil level sight gage of the
intermediate gear box.

012.20.00
Page 40
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.6 Filling Hydraulic System
4.6.1 Connect the AC and DC external power sources to the
helicopter electrical system,
4.6.2 Read indicator УИ1-100 installed on the middle
panel of the electrical panel to make sure there is
no pressure in the main and duplicating hydraulic
systems.
If one of the systems is pressurized, release
pressure to zero operating the controls after
switching on the hydraulic system.
4.6.3 For filling the helicopter hydraulic system, use
oil АМГ-10 ГОСТ 6794-75.
4.6.4 Normal filling of the helicopter hydraulic system
is 22 ltr.
4.6.5 Fill in the helicopter hydraulic system only by a
pressure fueling method with the help of the ground
test rig, type УПГ-300 (УПГ-250ГМ).
CAUTION: PRIOR TO CONNECTING THE GROUND TEST RIG,
CHECK: FINE FILTERS OF THE TEST RIG FOR
CLEANNESS;
OIL АМГ-10 FILLED IN THE HYDRAULIC TEST
RIG FOR PRESENCE OF WATER AND MECHANICAL
ADMIXTURES.
4.6.6 Fill in the helicopter hydraulic system as follows:
open the hatch cover of the airborne hydraulic
system panel at the helicopter port side;
wipe the suction valve of the filled system with
a clean cloth, unlouk and remove the cap from it;
make sure the АМГ oil delivery unit of the test
rig is clean;

012.20.00
Page 41
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
connect the ground test rig delivery hose to the
suction valve of the main hydraulic system using
an adapter from the test rig set;
switch on the ground test rig and check the oil
level in the tanks of the main and duplicating
hydraulic systems against the oil level sight
gages.
As the oil level reaches the upper marks on the oil
level sight gages which corresponds to filling of
about 20 ltr into the tank, switch off the ground
test rig.
4.6.7 After filling the hydraulic system from which oil
has been fully drained, remove air bubbles, for
this purpose:
undo the nut of the suction hose of pump НШ-39М
by 2 to 5 threads to release air and screw it on
again after a stream of oil coming out of the
hose into a prepared container becomes full, free
from air bubbles and splashes,-
connect the hose with the special unit to the
suction connection of the duplicating hydraulic
system on the airborne hydraulic panel and drain
oil into a container until the stream becomes
free from air bubbles.
4.6.8 Check serviceability of the hydraulic system (main
and duplicating, Ref. 029.10.00). After functional
check of the hydraulic system, check the oil level
and, if necessary, replenish the hydraulic system.
4.6.9 Replenish the helicopter hydraulic system by a
pressure method as described in Para 4.6.6.
4.6.10 In extra cases, in the course of autonomous
operation of the helicopter before the development
and introduction into serial production of the

012.20.00
Page 42
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
small-size test rig, it is allowed to replenish the
hydraulic systems by gravity, for this purpose:
open the cowling covers of the tail compartment,
remove the protective cap, unlock and open the
cover of the tank filler neck;
install funnel 8AT-9904-100 with cambric or silk
filter into the tank filler neck and pour oil
into the tank up to the upper marks on the oil
level sight gages;
take the funnel from the tank filler neck, check
the oil level in the hydraulic systems (which
should reach the upper mark of the oil level
sight gage), close the filler neck cover and
lock it after that install the protective cap;
remove the streaks of oil with a cloth moistened
with gasoline or kerosene and squeezed out,
close the cowling covers of the tail
compartment.
4.6.11 Make an entry in the helicopter Log Book on each
replenishment of the helicopter hydraulic systems
bу gravity (via the tank filler neck).
CAUTION: 1 IT IS PROHIBITED TO PERFORM ANY
OPERATIONS CONNECTED WITH ENGINE
CRANKING WHEN THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM IS
FREE FROM OIL АМГ-10 LEST HYDRAULIC
PUMPS НШ-39М GET DAMAGED.
2 IT IS PROHIBITED TO CHECK THE OPERATION
OF THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS FROM THE GROUND
TEST RIG WHEN THE HOSE UNITS ARE DIRTY
AND OPEN.

4.7 Charging Airborne Bottles with Compressed Air

4.7.1 Charge the airborne bottles (the spaces in the main
landing gear brace struts) on the ground through

012.20.00
Page 43
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the airborne charging valve installed on the
fuselage port side between Frames Nos 12 and 13.
4.7.2 Before charging the airborne bottles, make sure the
wheeled up airfield bottle is in good repair. The
bottle valve must be reliably closed with the cap.
4.7.3 Charge the airborne bottles as follows:
undo the protective cap of the airfield bottle
valve, tilt the bottle through 10 to 15° with the
valve looking down and for a short time, open the
valve to make sure there is no moisture in the
bottle;
connect charging hose 8НУ-9902-150М to the bottle
and blow the hose by carefully opening the bottle
valve for a-short time (in so doing, hold the
hose in the hand by its free end);
open the hatch cover of the airborne charging
valve and remove the cap from it by turning it
90° counterclockwise;
connect the hose with unit (НУ-9902-60) to the
airborne charging valve after draining condensate
from the airborne bottles;
position the bottle at an angle of 15 to 20° with
the valve locking up and smoothly open the valve.
4.7.4 Charge the airborne bottles to a pressure of
(5000+400) kPa (50+4 kgf/cm2). Check the charging
against the pressure gauge arranged on the pilots'
electrical panel, LH side panel or against the
pressure gauge of the air bottle pressure
regulator.
4.7.5 Close the airfield bottle valve and disconnect the
charging hose from the airfield bottle and from the
airborne charging valve. Close the charging valve

012.20.00
Page 44
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
with the cover and close the cover of the airborne
air charging system.
4.8 Charging Hydraulic Accumulators
4.8.1 Charge the hydraulic accumulators with commercial
nitrogen which should meet the requirements of
ГОСТ 9293-74.
4.8.2 Carry out charging when the hydraulic system is
discharged.
4.8.3 Wheel up the airfield bottle with nitrogen to the
helicopter port side.
4.8.4 Remove the plugs from hose НУ-9902-150М and unit
8A-9910-40. Blow the hose with nitrogen from the
airfield bottle.
4.8.5 Open the hatch providing access to the engines in
the flight compartment. Open the cowling doors of
the engine and gear box compartments and cowling
doors of the tail compartment.
4.8.6 Unlock and undo the cap of the charging connection
of the charged hydraulic accumulator.
4.8.7 Close the shut-off needle of unit 8AT-9910-40,
install the unit on the hydraulic accumulator
charging connection and secure with the union nut
using wrench, S = 14x17.
4.8.8 Connect hose НУ-9902-150М to the unit. Connect the
other hose end to the airfield bottle.
4.8.9 Smoothly open the airfield bottle valve to charge
the hydraulic accumulator to a pressure of
2
(3000+200) kPa (30+2) kgf/cm .
4.8.10 Adjust the nitrogen supply by the shut-off needle
of the unit.
4.8.11 Check the nitrogen pressure in the hydraulic
accumulator against the unit pressure gauge.

012.20.00
Page 45
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.8.12 Close the unit handle and the bottle valve. With
the help of the shut-off needle release the
nitrogen pressure in the hose and disconnect the
hose. Check air-tightness of the charging valve of
the hydraulic accumulator with the help of soap
suds.
4.8.13 Install the cap on the charging connection of the
hydraulic accumulator and lock it with wire
КС-0,8 Кд.
4.8.14 Close the cowling doors of the gear box, engine,
tail compartments and the hatch in the flight
compartment ceiling.
4.9 Charging Landing Gear Shock Struts with Nitrogen.
Charging Hose Landing Gear Shock Strut
4.9.1 Jack up the helicopter and lift it to a height so
as the wheels are 50 mm clear of the ground.
4.9.2 Open the hatch cover providing access to the
charging valve and remove the cap from it.
4.9.3 Connect unit 8A-9910-40 to the charging valve of
the shock strut and with the help of hose
НУ-9902-150М connect it to the airfield bottle.
4.9.4 Turn the unit handle to the right to open the
charging valve. Smoothly opening the valve and
regulating the nitrogen supply bу the unit needle
build up the pressure in the shock strut up to
3200+100 kPa (32+1 kgf/cm2) with the rod fully
extended. Check the pressure against the pressure
gauge.
4.9.5 Close the airfield bottle valve, set the shut-off
needle to the close position and close the shut-off
valve of the charging connection, release the
pressure in the hose by the needle.

012.20.00
Page 46
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.9.6 Disconnect the hose, check airtightness of the
charging valve bу the soap suds and slip the
protective cap over it.
4.9.7 Close the hatch cover.
Charging Main Landing Gear Shock Struts
4.9.8 Jack up the helicopter so that its wheels are
approximately 50 mm clear of the ground.
4.9.9 Remove the cap from the charging valve of the LP
chamber.
4.9.10 Connect unit 8A-9910-40 to the charging valve of
the landing gear shock strut and with the help of
hose НУ-9902-150М connect it with the airfield
bottle.
4.9.11 Turn the handle to the right to open the shut-off
valve of the charging connection. Smoothly open the
valve and regulate the nitrogen supply by the
needle to build up the pressure in the LP chamber
up to 2600+100 kPa (26+1 kgf/cm2 ). Check the pressure
against the pressure gauge.
4.9.12 Close the airfield bottle valve, unit shut-off
needle and the charging valve, release the pressure
in the hose using the needle.
4.9.13 Disconnect the hose, check airtightness of the
charging valve, slip the cap over it and lock.
4.9.14 Charging of the HP chamber will be performed in
much the same way as charging of the LP chamber.
Carry out charging of the HP chamber to a pressure
of 6000+100 kPa (60+1 kgf/cm2) as read off the
pressure gauge.
4.10 Replenishment of Landing Gear Shock Struts with Oil
АМГ-10.
Replenishment of Nose Landing Gear Shock Struts.

012.20.00
Page 47
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.10.1 Jack up the helicopter until its wheels are
approximately 50 mm clear of the ground.
4.10.2 Open the hatch cover providing access to the
filling valve and install unit 8A-9910-40.
4.10.3 Smoothly turn the unit handle to release the
nitrogen pressure from the shock strut to zero, in
this case, hose НУ-9902-150М connected to unit
8A-9910-40 should be brought outside the fuselage.
4.10.4 Remove the unit and drive out the filling valve.
4.10.5 Smoothly compress the rod up to the stop.
4.10.6 Determine the oil level against the cut of the
filling pipe end. If the oil level is below the cut
of the pipe end, replenish the oil, for this
purpose:
extend the rod;
remove the filling pipe;
replenish the oil to- the level of the filling
connection via funnel 4639A-1 and wait for 90 min
to allow the foam caused by commercial nitrogen
dissolved in oil AMГ-10 to settle down;
install the filling pipe and compress the rod to
the full. The excess of oil AMГ-10 will be
drained via the hole in the filling pipe.
CAUTION: IN CASE THERE IS FOAM IN THE STREAM OP
DRAINED OIL, STOP THE OIL DRAIN RIGHT
AWAY, RETURN THE SHOCK STRUT TO THE
INITIAL POSITION AND WAIT. THE OIL DRAIN
WITH A FOAMY STREAM LEADS TO UNDER
FILLING THE SHOCK STRUT AND, HENCE, TO
WEAKENING OF POWER CAPACITY OF THE SHOCK
STRUT WHICH IS NOT TOLERATED.

012.20.00
Page 48
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.10.7 Drive the charging valve into the hole of the
shock strut connection after slipping the sealing
ring over the valve threaded part.
4.10.8 Screw the union nut of unit 8A-9910-40 on the
charging valve of the shock strut. Connect the
filling hose to the bottle connection, blow the
hose and lower the shock strut.
4.10.9 Connect charging hose HУ-9902-150M to the unit
connection. Slowly open the bottle valve to charge
the shock strut with commercial nitrogen to a
pressure of 3200+100 kPa (32+1 kgf/cm2). Oil leakage
is not tolerated.
4.10.10 Remove the unit, screw on the caps and lock,
lower the helicopter on its wheels.
Replenishment of Main .Landing Gear Shock Struts
with Oil АМГ-10
4.10.11 Unlock and undo the cap nuts from the charging
valves of the HP and LP chambers.
4.10.12 In turn, connect unit 8A-9910-40 of the charging
device to the charging valves of the HP and LP
chambers, release the nitrogen pressure therein to
zero.
4.10.13 Drive out the charging valves and compress the
shock strut to the full.
4.10.14 Determine the oil level against the cut of the
filling pipe end. If the oil level is below the cut
of the filling pipe end replenish the oil, for this
purpose:
extend the rods of the HP and LP chambers; remove
the filling pipes;
replenish the oil up to the level of the filling
connection via funnel 4639-1 and wait for 90 min;

012.20.00
Page 49
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
install the filling pipes and smoothly compress
the rods up to the stop. In this case, the excess
of oil will be drained via the filling
connection.
CAUTION: IN CASE THERE IS FOAM IN THE STREAM OP
DRAINED OIL, STOP THE OIL DRAIN RIGHT
AWAY, RETURN THE RODS TO THEIR INITIAL
POSITION AND WAIT FOR SOME MORE TIME.
4.10.15 Drive the charging valves into the holes of the
HP and LP chambers connections after slipping the
sealing washers over the threaded part of the
valves.
4.10.16 Connect the unit to the charging valve of the LP
chamber. Connect the charging hose to the
connection of the bottle with commercial nitrogen,
blow the charging hose and lower the shock strut.
4.10.17 Connect the charging hose to the charging device
connection. Charge the LP chamber with nitrogen to
a pressure of 2600+100 kPa (26+1 kgf/cm2). Check the
pressure against the pressure gauge.
4.10.18 After charging, close the bottle valve and
release the pressure in the hose. Disconnect the
charging hose from the unit and the unit from the
charging valve of the LP chamber.
4.10.19 Check airtightness of the charging valve. Drive
in the cap nut and lock.
4.10.20 Use the same procedure to charge the HP chamber.
Carry out charging to a pressure of 6000+100 kPa
(60+1 kgf/cm2).
4.10.21 Lower the helicopter on its wheels from hydraulic
jacks.
Replenishment of Shock Strut of Tail Bumper with
Oil АМГ-10

012.20.00
Page 50
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.10.22 Remove the shock strut of the tail bumper from
the helicopter. Release the pressure and drive out
the charging valve.
4.10.23 Replenish oil АМГ-10 to the lower edge of the
thread of the hole for filling valve, wait for
90 min.
4.10.24 Fully compress the shock strut in the vertical
position for draining the excess of oil АМГ-10 from
the cylinder chamber.
4.10.25 Install the charging valve, fully extend the rod,
charge the shock strut with commercial nitrogen to
a pressure of 3500±300 kPa (35±3 kgf/cm2 ), in this
case the shock strut should occupy a vertical
position. The full travel of the rod is 200 mm.
NOTE: In case the rod extends just partially,
before charging the shock strut with
nitrogen, it is allowed to build up a
nitrogen pressure of 100 to 300 kPa (1 to
3 kgf/cm2).
4.10.26 Lower the pressure in the shock strut to
2700+100 kPa (27+1 kgf/cm2).
4.10.27 Remove the unit and disconnect the hose after
releasing pressure in the hose. Check air tightness
of the charging valve. Screw in and lock the cap
nut on the charging valve of the shock strut.
4.10.28 Install the shock strut on the helicopter.
4.11 Charging Landing Gear Wheel Tires
4.11.1 Charging of the tires can be performed both from
the airborne and airfield bottles.
4.11.2 In charging the tires from the airfield bottle,
use hose НУ-9902-15011 and unit НУ-9902-165.
Connect the unit with its one end to the charging
pipe and with the other, to hose

012.20.00
Page 51
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
НУ-9902-150М. Connect the second end of the hose to
the airfield bottle.
4.11.3 In charging the tires from the airborne air
system, use hose НУ-9902-15011 and units
НУ-9902-165 and 8A-9910-132. Connect unit
8A-9910-132 with one end to the airborne bottle
connection (the main landing gear brace struts) and
with the other, to hose НУ-9902-150М. Connect unit
НУ-9902-165 to the hose on the other end and
connect the unit to the charging pipe of the
landing gear wheel tire.
4.11.4 Slowly open the bottle valve and watch the
readings of the pressure gauge. Charge the wheel
tires to a pressure of:
650+50 kPa (6.5+0.5 kgf/cm2), in the main landing
gear wheel tires;
450+50 kPa (4.50.5 kgf/cm2), in the nose landing
gear wheel tire.
4.11.5 Disconnect the units and hose from the wheel
charging pipe and bottle after closing the bottle
valve and releasing pressure from the hose.
4.11.6 Check airtightness of the tire nipple with the
help of soap suds applied to the end of the
charging pipe. If the nipple proves to be airtight,
screw the cap on the wheel charging pipe.
4.12 Filling Oil in Feathering Hinge of Tail Rotor Hub
4.12.1 Wash appliance 8-100 (ЭКС-1) with clean gasoline
ГОСТ 8505-80 (with fluid СИГБОЛ) and allow it to
dry.
4.12.2 Position the blade of the filled feathering hinge
horizontally and make sure that the blade turning
lever shaft is in its upper position.
4.12.3 Fill oil MC-20 or ВНИИ НП-25 into bottle (3) (Ref.
Fig. 3) after removing cap (7) to level (4) after
that, reinstall cap (7).

012.20.00
Page 52
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Feathering Hinge Plug

2 Connection of Appliance 8-100 (ЭСК-1)
3 Bottle
4 Level
5 Vent Pipe Cap
6 Vent Pipe
7 Appliance Connection Cap
8 Feathering Hinge Tank Plug
9 Feathering Hinge Tank

Filling Oil Into Feathering Hinge of Tail Rotor Hub by

Appliance 8-100 (ЭСК-1)
Figure 3

012.20.00
Page 53
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Oil MC-20 is filled in for summer operation at a

sub-zero ambient air temperature or at a short-time
(up to 10 days) temperature drop down to minus
10 °C. In winter, at an ambient air temperature
from plus 5 to minus 50 °C or at a short-time (up
to 10 days) temperature rise of up to plus 10 °C
oil ВНИИ НП-25 is filled in.
NOТЕ: Before filling the oil into the bottle,
filter it through the funnel with the
filter.
4.12.4 Drive out plug (1) from the feathering hinge and
instead of it, install the appliance after removing
cap (7).
4.12.5 Drive out plug (8) from the feathering hinge tank
body and remove cap (5) from vent pipe (6).
4.12.6 After fully draining oil from the bottle, drive
plug (8) into the tank body.
4.12.7 Drive out the appliance from the feathering hinge,
drive plug (1) into the feathering hinge.
NOTE: Before installing plugs (1) and (8), make
sure they are clean and, if necessary,
wash the plugs in gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80
4.12.8 Install cap (7) on connection (2) and cap (5) on
the appliance vent pipe.
4.12.9 Check the oil level in the transparent caps of oil
tanks of the feathering hinges against the cap
shoulders, with the blade positioned vertically
down. The oil level in the feathering hinges of the
tail rotor hub should be between the shoulders.
4.12.10 After filling in oil, thoroughly wash the
appliance with gasoline and place in a clean
container. Lock plugs (1) and (8).

012.20.00
Page 54
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.12.11 In winter, before filling oil into the feathering
hinges of the tail rotor hub, heat up the oil to a
temperature of 50 to 60 °C.
4.12.12 To speed up the operations, it is allowed to fill
in oil under the pressure by gradually squeezing
the walls of the polyethylene bottle along with
finger-blocking of the inlet hole of the vent pipe.
CAUTION: IT IS PROHIBITED TO DRIVE OUT THE TANK
FASTENING BOLT.

4.13 Filling Compensation Tank of Hydraulic Dampers

4.13.1 Remove the damper hood.
4.13.2 Unlock and undo the plug of the compensation tank
filler neck.
4.13.3 Fill in oil via funnel 4639A-1.
The oil level should be between the check marks on
the oil level sight gages.
4.13.4 Remove air bubbles from the hoses and hydraulic
dampers of the main rotor hub.
4.13.5 Drive in and lock the filler neck plug with wire
КС-1 КД.
4.13.6 Install the damper hood.
4.14 Filling Main Rotor Hub Hinges
4.14.1 Fill in the flapping hinge, to this end:
remove the damper hood;
unlock and undo the plug (together with the
compensator) of the hinge filler neck;
fill in oil through the filler neck. Check the
oil level against oil level sight gage 8AT-1250-
98. It should be 30 to 35 mm;
drive in and lock the filler neck plug; install
the damper hood.

012.20.00
Page 55
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.14.2 Fill in the drag and feathering hinges through the
holes for plugs in the hinge casings.
The oil level should be:
in the drag hinge: 30 to 35 mm against oil level
sight gage B-1911M-02;
in the feathering hinge, should coincide with the
inner edge of the hole for plug of the feathering
hinge casing.
5 DRAINING FUEL. OIL AND DISCHARGING AIR SYSTEM
Provided in the helicopter are draining points for
draining fuel, oil from the helicopter systems, for
draining condensate (sediment) from the fuel system and
draining condensate from the air spaces of the landing
gear brace struts.
The layout of the draining points is shown in Fig. 4.
5.1 Draining Fuel
5.1.1 Drain fuel:
from the service tank through the draining valve
installed at the fuselage starboard (in the
bottom) between Frames Nos 12 and 13;
from the external and extra fuel tanks through
the draining valve installed in the cargo floor
of the fuselage (outside) between Frames Nos 5
and 6.
NOTE: Before draining fuel, make sure that all the
cross-feed shut-off valves of the external
fuel tanks and the by-pass valve of the extra
tanks are open
Owing to the ground static angle, drained through
the single-point draining valve cannot be the whole
of the fuel in the external fuel tanks. The fuel
remainder can be drained through the tank-mounted

012.20.00
Page 56
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Valve for Draining Sediment from

Extra Fuel Tank
2 Connection for Draining Oil from
Shock Strut of Hose Landing Gear
3 Valve for Draining Fuel from
Draining Tank of System KO-50
4 Valve for Draining Sediment from
Starboard External Fuel Tank
5 Valve for Draining Oil from
Engine Oil Tank
6 Engine Oil System Draining
Valves
7 Oil Draining from Main Gear Box
Through Magnetic Plug
8 Valve for Draining Sediment from
Air System Filter-Trap
9 Valve for Draining Oil from Oil
System of Engine АИ-9В
10 Oil Draining from Intermediate
Sear Box
11 Oil Draining from Tail Rotor
Gear Box
12 Oil Draining from Skid Block
Shock Absorber
13 Valve for Draining Fuel from
Service Tank
14 Valve for Draining Oil from
Hydraulic System
15 Oil Draining from Main Rotor Hub
Hinges
16 Connection for Draining
Condensate from Main Landing
Gear Strut
17 Oil Draining from Compensation
Tank of Hydraulic Damper
18 Valve for Draining Sediment from
Port External Fuel Tank
19 Valve for Single-Point Fuel
Draining from Tanks
20 Valve for Draining Sediment from
Vent Tank

Helicopter Draining Points

Figure 4

012.20.00
Pages 57/58
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
valves for draining sediment or by transferring
fuel from the external fuel tanks to service tank.
5.1.2 In draining fuel, observe the safety precautions
given in Sub-Section "Safety Precautions to Be
Observed in Fuelling".
5.1.3 For draining fuel, use hose SA-9901-00. Connect one
end of the hose to the drain valve and lower the
other end into a container for draining fuel. To
open the valve, pull and turn the drain valve cock
through 3 to 4 turns. Fuel will be drained by
gravity.
After draining fuel, close the draining valve
turning its cock clockwise up to the stop,
disconnect the hose and close the drain valve hatch
cover.
CAUTION: IT IS PROHIBITED TO DRAIN FUEL FOR LONGER
THAN 24 HOURS WITHOUT PRESERVING THE
ENGINE FUEL UNITS.
5.1.4 In draining fuel into the refueler, connect the
other end of hose 8A-9901-0A to the adapter hose
(nozzle) applied to the refueler and the other end
of the adapter hose connect to the refueler through
the union nut.
NOTES: 1 Before draining fuel from the extra fuel
tanks:
set both shut-off valves 633600A in the
cross-feed front line of the external fuel
tanks to position CLOSED (ЗАКРЫТО);
set by-pass valve 637000 to a position
corresponding to fuel useup from the
drained extra fuel tank.
2 Before draining fuel from the port

012.20.00
Page 59
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(starboard) external fuel tank:
set the starboard shut-off valve in the
cross-feed front line and shut-off valve
633600A in the rear cross-feed line of the
external fuel tanks to position CLOSED;
set the by-pass valve to a position
preventing fuel useup from the extra fuel
tanks.
3 Before draining fuel from the starboard
external fuel tank:
set the port shut-off valve in the front
cross-feed line and the shut-off valve in
the rear cross-feed line of the external
fuel tanks to position CLOSED;
set the by-pass valve to a position
preventing fuel useup from the extra fuel
tanks.
4 Before fuelling the helicopter and in case
fuel has been drained from one of the
tanks, set:
all the shut-off valves to position OPEN
(ОТКРЫТО);
the by-pass valve to a position
corresponding fuel useup from the
fuelled extra fuel tank or from both
fuelled extra tanks.

5.2 Oil Draining

5.2.1 Oil draining from the oil system of each engine
TB3-117BM is performed through two draining valves
arranged on the transverse firewall. In draining
oil, open the oil tanks filler necks and the

012.20.00
Page 60
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
bleeding plugs on the oil coolers, for this
purpose:
in turn, slip hose 8AT-9928-500 over the valves,
bring the hose outside the fuselage and place a
container for drained oil;
open the valves and drain oil;
close the valves and disconnect the hose.
CAUTION: EXERCISE CARE NOT TO SPILL OIL OH THE
HELICOPTER SURFACE.
Drain oil from the oil tanks through the draining
valves on the oil tanks connecting hose 140-9228-05
to them.
After draining oil, close the draining valves,
drive in the bleeding plugs on the oil coolers,
close the filler necks covers and lock.
5.2.2 Drain oil from the main gear box oil system, for
this purpose:
drive out one of magnetic plugs ПС-1 installed to
the right near the oil filter .from the main gear
box pan, install hose 8AT-9918-00 instead of the
plug, place a tray under the hose and drain oil;
drive out the plugs on the oil coolers casings
and make sure oil is fully drained;
disconnect the hose, install magnetic plug ПС-1,
plugs of the oil coolers and lock.
5.2.3 Drain oil from the oil system of engine АИ-9В, to
this end:
place a pan for the drained oil;
open the valve and drain oil;
close the valve.
NOTE: Oil draining can be performed either in

012.20.00
Page 61
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
a pan or through a hose into a
container.
5.2.4 Drain oil from the intermediate gear box, for this
purpose:
open the side cover of the hatch providing access
to the intermediate gear box, unlock and remove
magnetic plug ПС-1;
install magnetic plug ПС-1, hose 8AT-9918-00 with
the multi-purpose unit and drain oil into the
container;
disconnect the hose;
install and close magnetic plug ПС-1.
NOTE: Before draining oil, heat up the gear box to
a temperature of 60 to 80 C.
5.2.5 Drain oil from the tail rotor gear box much in the
same way as from the intermediate gear box
unlocking and removing magnetic plug ПС-1 from the
tail rotor gear box.
5.2.6 Drain oil AMГ-10 from the hydraulic system, to this
end:
(a) connect the hoses of ground test rig УПГ-300 to
the suction and delivery valves of the main and
duplicating hydraulic systems on the helicopter
side panel.
CAUTION: BEFORE CONNECTING THE GROUND TEST RIG,
CHECK CLEANNESS OF ITS PINE FILTERS;
(b) switch on the ground test rig (both pumps) and
after building up pressure in the main hydraulic
system smoothly move the controls, manipulate the
controls during 3 to 10 min from the main and
duplicating hydraulic systems (make four or five

012.20.00
Page 62
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
switchings from the main to the duplicating
system);
(c) switch off the ground test rig and,
manipulating the controls, release pressure in
the hydraulic system to zero, disconnect the test
rig hoses from the valves of the helicopter side
panel;
(d) connect the hose with the special nozzle to the
airborne suction valve of the main hydraulic
system by screwing in the hose union nut and
lower the other hose end into a clean container
and drain oil from the hydraulic tank through a
silk (cambric) filter;
(e) disconnect the hose from the airborne suction
valve of the main hydraulic system by undoing the
union nut securing the hose;
(f) use a duralumin or brass rod to press off the
airborne delivery valve of the main hydraulic
system and drain oil from the delivery pipelines.
Use the same procedure to drain oil from the
duplicating hydraulic system.
NOTE: If oil draining is performed right after
engine shutdown, do not carry out the
operations described in Sub-Paras (a) to (c).
Hydraulic System Flushing
5.2.7 Carry out flushing of the hydraulic system by
drained and filtered oil AMГ-10 with the help of
the ground test rig, for this purpose:
connect the pressure hose of the ground test rig
to the airborne suction valve of the main
hydraulic system (via the adapter from the set of
the test rig);

012.20.00
Page 63
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
lower the suction hose of the ground test rig in
a container with oil AMГ-10 drained from the
hydraulic system and filtered}
switch on the ground test rig and watch the oil
level in two spaces of the hydraulic tank, when
the oil level reaches the upper marks on the oil
level sight gages, switch off the test rig (if
the amount of drained oil is insufficient for a
complete fuelling of the hydraulic tank spaces,
be suffice with the available amount of oil
AMГ-10);
disconnect the ground test rig hose and perform
the operations as per Sub-Paras 5.2.6 (a) and
(b);
switch off the ground test rig, release pressure
in the hydraulic system to zero.
5.2.8 Drain oil ALP-1C from the hydraulic system tank as
instructed in Sub-Para 5.2.6 (d). In case
mechanical admixtures or water are spotted on the
silk (cambric) filter, fill the hydraulic system
with new oil АМГ-10 and repeat the operations as
per Paras 5.2.7 and 5.2.8.
5.2.9 Remove and check the filtering elements of the fine
filters of the main and duplicating systems (Ref.
029.10.00).
5.2.10 Fill the hydraulic system with new oil АМГ-10 by a
pressure method with the help of the ground test
rig and check serviceability of the hydraulic
system (Ref. 029.10.00).
5.2.11 Drain oil from the feathering hinge of the tail
rotor hub, for this purpose:
position the blade horizontally relative to the
fuselage plane;

012.20.00
Page 64
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
drive out the plugs from the feathering hinge and
from its tank, drain oil into a container. Before
draining, lift the blade some 10 to 15° beyond
the horizontal position;
drive in the plugs.
5.2.12 Drain oil from the compensation tank of hydraulic
dampers, to this end:
remove the damper hood; unlock and undo the plug
of the compensation tank filler neck;
disconnect the hoses supplying oil to the
hydraulic dampers from the vibration damper hub
bracket, drain oil into a pan;
connect the hoses;
drive in and lock the filler neck plug;
install the vibration damper hood.
5.2.13 Drain oil from the flapping hinge of the main
rotor hub, for this purpose:
remove the vibration damper hood;
unlock and undo the plugs of the filler neck and
of the drain hole and drain oil into a container;
drive in and lock the plugs and reinstall the
hood.
5.2.14 Drain oil from the drag and feathering hinges of
the main rotor hub, for this purpose:
unlock and in turn drive out the upper and lower
plugs of the respective hinge (drive the
inspection cup out of the feathering hinge as
well) and drain oil into a container;
reinstall the plugs.

012.20.00
Page 65
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5.3 Discharging Air System
In the removal of the air system or in the removal of
the main landing gear shock struts, discharge the air
system, to this end:
disconnect the brake hose from one of the landing
gear wheels;
release air from the system through the pressure
reducing valve pressing the braking lever.
6 CLEANING AND WASHING HELICOPTER
6.1 Remove dust with a hair brush or with dry wiping
rags, remove dust from inside the fuselage by a
vacuum cleaner.
6.2 Remove oil stains and soot by wiping rags moistened
with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80.
6.3 To remove contaminants, wash the surface, first, with
a warm 3-per cent solution of neutral soap and warm
clean water, and then, wipe dry with cleaning rags.
6.4 If the surfaces of non-metal parts (but for parts
made of rubber and organic glass) are dirty with oil,
dust or other contaminants, wipe them with cleaning
rags moistened with gasoline and then with clean, dry
wiping rags.
6.5 Wipe rubber parts with dry, clean wiping rags and
parts of organic glass with soft felt (flannel or
cotton wool) moistened with alcohol or clean water,
and then wipe dry with a clean, dry flannel cloth.
6.6 It is recommended to remove ice or frozen snow from
the helicopter surfaces by hot air (60 °C) from the
ground heater. Remove dry snow from the helicopter
surfaces with hair brushes.

012.20.00
Page 66
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIRFIELD SERVICING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Maintenance Practices includes the following Task Cards

TASK CARD No DESCRIPTION TC PAGE

TC 012.20.00A Preparation of ground Ref.
support equipment (GSE) Collection 1
and test equipment (TE).

012.20.00
Pages 301/302
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIRFIELD SERVICING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Maintenance Practices includes the following Task Cards

TASK CARD No DESCRIPTION TC PAGE

TC 012.20.01a Checking fuel reserve (in (Ref.
the tanks) by means of fuel Collection 1)
quantity indicator

012.20.01
Pages 301/302
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

APPLICATION OF FOREIGN LUBRICANT ANALOGS –

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
1.1 In the given section the foreign analogs
(replacements) of lubricants, approved to application
on the helicopter instead of the corresponding
Russian-made lubricants with the service life
unrestricted.
ATTENTION 1 ONLY FOREIGN-MADE LUBRICANTS, SPECIFIED IN
OPERATIONAL DOCUMENTATION, CAN BE APPLIED
2 IF LUBRICANTS, NOT SPECIFIED IN THE
OPERATIONAL DOCUMENTATION, ARE APPLIED, THE
MANUFACTURER CANNOT GUARANTEE THE RELIABLE
OPERATION OF HELICOPTER.

Notes 1 During the helicopter operation it is

recommended to use the Russian-made
lubricants, specified in the helicopter’s
operational documentation (vendor items). The
given lubricants are most reliable to ensure
the helicopter operation within the specified
service life.
2 If the lubricants, that the Buyer is
interested in, are not mentioned in the
operational documentation, these lubricants
must be preliminarily tested and recommended
to application by the helicopter designer
(designer of vendor item) and entered into
operational documentation for helicopter
(vendor item).
3 It is recommended to use one type of
lubricants of the analogs, approved to
application.

012.20.10
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 FOREIGN-MADE ANALOGS OF THE OPERATING OILS FOR
HELICOPTERS

ATTENTION! DO NOT MIX RUSSIAN OILS AND FOREIGN-MADE

SYNTHETIC OILS.

Foreign analogs of oils

Oil grade Manufac
Grade Specification Note
turer
Б-3В (B- Mobil Jet MIL-PRF-23699 Exxon
3V) Oil 254 Mobil
synthetic
oil Mobil Jet MIL-PRF-23699 Exxon Except
ТУ 38- Oil II Mobil wood
101295-85 transpo
rtation
Turbоnycoil MIL-PRF-23699 NYCO
525-2A
Turbоnycoil MIL-PRF-23699 NYCO
600
Castrol 599 DEF STAN 91- Castrol
(Turbonycoil 100 NYCO
699)
Castrol 5000 MIL-PRF- Castrol
23699F
BP Turbo Oil DOD-L-85734 Air BP
25
Turbоnycoil DEF STAN 91- NYCO
35M 98
Castrol 98 DEF STAN 91- Castrol
(Turbonycoil 98 NYCO
98)

012.20.10
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ATTENTION 1. IT IS ALLOWED TO APPLY ONLY THE

FOREIGN-MADE OILS, SPECIFIED IN
THE OPERATIONAL DOCUMENTATION FOR
ENGINE, GEAR BOX, APU.
2. DO NOT MIX Б-3В (B-3V) OIL WITH
OTHER OILS.
3. CHANGE FROM Б-3В (B-3V) OIL AND
BACK IN ACCORDANCE WITH
OPERATIONAL DOCUMENTATION FOR
ENGINE, GEAR BOX, APU.

Attention When changing from Russian-made oils to

foreign-made oils and back (as well as
changing for another oil) wash the systems of
assemblies and units with oil planned for
application with the following requirements
taken into consideration:
1. Change from Б-3В (B-3V) oil and back in
accordance with directions of operational
documentation for engine, ВР-14 (VR-14) gear
box, APU.

3 FOREIGN-MADE ANALOGS OF АМГ-10 (AMG-10) OPERATING

FLUID, APPROVED FOR APPLICATION ON HELICOPTER

Fluid grade Foreign analogs of fluids

Grade Specificati Country, Not
on manufactur e
er
АМГ-10 (AMG- HYDRAUNYCOILFH MIL-PRF- Germany,
10) ГОСТ 51 5606 H Shell
6794-75 Deutschland

012.20.10
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

GMBH USA,
ExxonMobil
France,
NYCO
Anderol

ATTENTION DO NOT MIX FH 51 WITH ТС hyp OIL.

Note 1 FH 51 and АМГ-10 (AMG-10) can be mixed.

2.Periodicity of replacement and sampling for
laboratory test, as well as conditions of
filtering element washing in the systems
with FH 51 and its mixtures with АМГ-10
(AMG-10), are the same as application of
АМГ-10 (AMG-10).

012.20.10
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

HELICOPTER TRANSPORTATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 GENERAL
The present Sub-Section offers the information on
preparatory operations carried out before packing and
loading the helicopter in the containers for
transportation by rail and sea, on packing and loading
the helicopter in containers, on unloading and
unpacking of the containers, as well as on the assembly
of the helicopter after delivering it to the point of
destination.
2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
2.1 Preliminary Operations Performed -before Disassembly
of Helicopter
2.1.1 Install the helicopter on a smooth ground, place
the chocks under the main landing gear wheels on
both sides.
2.1.2 Before disassembly of the helicopter, perform:
the internal and external preservation of engines
TB3-117BM and АИ-9 and of the main gear box in
compliance with the Maintenance Manuals of these
items;
the internal and external preservation of the
intermediate and tail rotor gear boxes, as well
as the preservation of the internal chambers of
the hydraulic actuators;
oil draining from the oil system;
fuel draining from the helicopter tanks;
air release from the air system;
the internal and external preservation of the
fuel pumps, to this end:
with the fuel fire shut-off valves closed, fill
20 to 30 ltrs of transformer oil or oil MK-8

012.30.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
heated to a temperature of 60 to 80 °C into the
service tank and wait for 3 min»
open the fuel drain valve of the service tank,
drain oil and allow it to go by gravity for 30
min. Close the valve. Preserve the external
surface of the pump without the paint-and-varnish
coating.
2.2 Disassembly of Helicopter
2.2.1 Remove and dismount the following systems and
units:
vibration damper;
slip ring of the main rotor hub;
blades and hub of the main rotor;
blades and hub of the tail rotor;
heater KO-50;
antenna unit from ARK-UD/АРК-УД automatic
direction finder set (if available);
MSL-3/МСЛ-3 Flashing beacon;
АЧС-1/AchS-1 Clock;
ID-3/ИД-3 Transmitter;
monounit from ДИСС-32А set (if available);
mirror 8AT-7510-00 (2 pcs);
upright 441-1 (if any);
extra fuel tanks (1 or 2 pcs) with a subsequent
installation after preservation;
tail boom assembled with the tail boom pylon;
stabilizer;
tail bumper;
one section of the transmission shaft;

012.30.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
external fuel tanks with fillets;
pipes of the pitot-static tubes;
beam aerial of YADRO-1G1/ЯДРО-1Г1 radio set;
AShS-UD/АШС-УД Antenna (if any);
unit 414 (if any);
LPG-150М/ЛПГ-150М hoist winch with boom (if any);
FR-100/ФР-100 taxi light.
CI-205-3(-1) antenna on helicopters equipped with
glide slope radio beacon;
One or two AshV-50/АШВ-50 antennae, depending on
quantity of VHF radio stations installed on the
helicopter;
One or two KA-60 antennae on helicopters,
equipped with KN-63 and KT-76;
SX-16 Searchlight on helicopters equipped with
SX-16;
AN-001/AH-001 directional antenna of ARK-15/APK-
15 system;
Two MSL-3/МСЛ-3 flashing beacons and HS-62/XC-62
tail light.
2.2.2 Close the search-and-landing lights, additional
light ФПП-7М with blanking covers and secure each
blanking cover with two light attachment screws.
2.2.3 Preserve the helicopter. Do it before removing the
main and nose landing gear shock struts.
2.2.4 Remove the main landing gears.
2.2.5 Remove the nose landing gear.
2.3 Preservation of Helicopter
2.3.1 Before packing the helicopter for transportation,
preserve:

012.30.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the transmission units;
the blades of the main and tail rotors;
the hub of the main rotor and the swash plate
assembly.
NOТЕ: After preservation, wrap the main rotor hub
in one layer of par affined paper and then in
one layer of wrapping paper, then tie up with
twine and place in the container. For
transportation by sea, additionally place a
'bag of a PVC film in the container for the
main rotor hub. Place, at the bottom of the
bag, five packs of silica gel dehydrator, 1
kg each, evenly distributing them in the
corners and in the middle. Then, place the
wrapped up main
rotor hub in the container and spread five
bags with silica gel dehydrator, 1 kg each,
over the hub. Place the required documents
(packing list) and seal the last seal of the
bag as described in Instructions No. 854-71.
Close the upper cover;
the hydraulic system;
the landing devices;
the fuselage-mounted parts;
the helicopter controls;
the spaces of the external and extra fuel tanks.
2.3.2 Blank off all the detachable joints of the fuel,
oil, air and other systems, the pipelines and
durite joints with plugs and affix seals.
Check the presence of the slip covers on the item.
2.3.3 Wrap the preserved parts in one layer of paraffined
paper and one layer of wrapping paper, tie up with

012.30.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
twine but for the units inside the fuselage and
closed compartments. Place the detachable parts and
units in bags of PVC film according to
ГОСТ 10354-82. Before sealing up the last seam for
transportation by sea, place bags with silica gel
dehydrator, grades КCМ and ШСМ (ГОСТ 3956-76), 2 kg
each, in the cover. Spread the bags over the
external and internal surface of the part or unit,
wherever possible. Seal up the seams with an iron
heated to a temperature of 220 to 300 °C. Given in
Table 1 are the materials used for preservation.

Table 1
Materials Used for Preservation
State Standard
Description Application
(ГОСТ)
Petroleum solvent ГОСТ 8505-80 Washing of external
НЕФРАС 50/170 surfaces during
Synthetic oil depreservation or before
Б-ЗВ preservation
Oil MK-8 or ГОСТ 6457-66 Preservation of engines
transformer oil, ГОСТ 982-68 oil system and internal
grade TK preservation of main
gear box
Grease ПВК (gun) ГОСТ 19537-74 Inner preservation of
Oil for hypoidal ГОСТ 4003-53 engines fuel system and
gears fuel tanks (including
units)
Oil MC-20 Grease ГОСТ 1013-49 External preservation of
ЦИАТИМ-201 ГОСТ 6267-74 engines
Preservation of
intermediate and tail
rotor gear boxes,
bearings of pylon drive

012.30.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

and tail rotor drive

shafts, main rotor hub
Preservation of
feathering hinges
Preservation of bearings
and swash plate sleeve,
bearings and articulated
joints of helicopter and
engines controls
Talc (ground), ГОСТ 879-5 Powdering of rubber
type Б, grade parts and durite hoses
Parchment paper ГОСТ 1760-68 Packing preserved parts
(wrapping) and units
Paraffined paper ГОСТ 9569-65 Packing of preserved
parts and units
Packing ГОСТ 10354-82 Packing of main rotor
polyethylene film slip ring, detachable
parts and units
2.4 Packing and Loading of Helicopter
Pack and load the helicopter for transportation by
rail up to a sea port in containers
8AT-9810-600, 8AT-9810-700-1, 8AT-9810-700-2.
For the transportation of the helicopter by rail, do
not pack the fuselage in a polyethylene film. Pack
the detachable parts and units in polyethylene bags
placing silica gel dehydrator in them. Use
approximately 1 kg of silica gel dehydrator per
square meter of the film.
The equipment required for packing and loading the
helicopter includes:
crane, lifting capacity of 10 t, with a distance
between the hard soil to the hook being 9.8 m
(in extra cases, it is allowed to use the crane

012.30.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
with lifting capacity of no less than 8 t and with
a jib height of at least 9.5 m);
spreader 8AT-9941-00 for lifting the hood of
container 8AT-9810-600 with the crane and for
lifting the base of container 8AT-9810-600,
containers 8AT-9810-700-1, 8AT-9810-700-2;
fixture for lifting helicopter 8AT-9945-00 (Ref.
Fig. 2);
on-board ladder 8AT.9917.00;
cradles 8AT-9905-500 for Frames Nos 3 and No. 10
of the fuselage;
ropes of bleak tape ПЛ-50, 4 pcs, 6 m each;
tow bar 8TB-9800-00.
Wheel up the disassembled item (less the tail boom
and fuel tanks) to the loading ground (near the
railway lines) with the help of a truck and a tow bay
observing a distance of 1.5 m between the rail and
the landing gear of the helicopter.
Secure the slings to braces (6) (140-9943-010) of the
fixture for hoisting the helicopter(Ref. Fig. 2).
Screw lug (4) (8AT-9943-000) on the main drive shaft.
Lift the fixture with the crane by the yoke
supporting by the slings. Bring the fixture to the
helicopter so that the fixture port is above the lug.
Smoothly lower the fixture on the lug and secure
ith stud (1). Simultaneously engage the brace
universal joints with the slots of the helicopter
mooring brackets arranged on Frame No. 10 and secure
with locking pins (7). Take the crane hook out of the
yoke and engage it with eye (2) of the fixture. Lift
the helicopter until the main and nose landing gear
clear the ground. Place cradles
8AT-9905-500 under frames Nos 3 and 10 of the

012.30.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
fuselage with the help of the mechanical jacks.
Remove the nose and main landing gear.
Install supports (23), (30) (8AT-9810-110, -140) as
shown in Fig. 1.
Secure suspension (32) (8AT-9810-120) in the
attachment unit of the nose landing gear shock strut
with bolts (33) (3010A-18-96-5 Кд) with washers
(3402A-3-10-30 Кд), (3335A-18 Кд) and lock with
cotter pin (3,2x3,6 ГОСТ 397-79).
Coat the bolts with grease ПВК. Screw on stop nut
(3310A-18 Кд).
Secure two suspension (9) (8AT-9810-130) in the
fuselage units for the attachment of the nose landing
gear brace strut with bolts (10) (3010A-14-36-4,5 Кд)
with washers (3402A-2-14-25 Кд), nuts (3335A-14 Кд)
and lock with cotter pins (2,5x25 ГОСТ 397-79);
Coat the bolts with grease ПВК.
Place front support (30) (8AT-9810-110) under the
fuselage at Frame No. 1 installing the support pins
into the spherical rests of Frame No. 1 and secure to
the installed suspensions in the units of the nose
landing gear with nut (3301A-1,8 Кд) to suspension
(32) (8AT-9810-120), with nuts 3335A-18 Кд to
supports (8AT-9810-110),- brace up, secure with nut
(31) (3310A-18 Кд) to the suspension pins and with
locknut 3320A-18 Кд.
Attach rear cradle (23) (8AT-9810-140) to the
fuselage bottom aligning the eye-bolts with the
landing gear units, the cradle pins with the fuselage
spherical units; install bolts (21) (3001A-18-54-5
Кд) coated with grease ПВК, secure with nuts (22)
(3335A-18 Кд) with washers (3402A-2-18-30), lock with
cotter pins (3,2x36 ГОСТ 397-79).

012.30.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Bolt П 2х40
2 Bolt 8АТ-9810-880
3 Bolt П 6х70.58.02
4 Bolt П 16х70.58.02
5 Bolt 8АТ-9810-880
6 Block 8АТ-9810-900
7 Nut 33351-18 Кд
8 Suspension Brace
9 Suspension 8АТ-9810-130
10 Bolt 3010А-14-36-4,5 Кд
11 Landing Gear Attachment Eye on
Freme №. 2
12 Snook Strut 8АT-9в10-180
13 Block 8АТ-9810-840
14 Nut 33101-16 Кд
15 Block 8АТ-9810-170
16 Bolt М16х70.58.02
17 Bolt 8АТ-9810-980-03
18 Bolt 3001А-16-144 Кд
19 Shook Strut 311-9810-181
20 Nut 33011-18
21 Bolt 3OO1A-18-54-5 b»
22 Nut 33351-18 Кд
23 Support 8АT-9810-140
24 Block 8АT-9810-80
25 Bolt 8АТ-9810-865-02
26 Stop 8АT-9810-890
27 Bolt 8АТ-9810.865-02
28 Yoke 8AT-9810-860
29 Bolt 3001А-144 Кд
30 Support 811-9810-110
31 Hut 33101-18 Кд
32 Suspension 8АТ-9810-120
33 Bolt 30101-18-96-5 Кд
34 Stop 8АТ-9810-890

Loading and Packing of Helicopter la Sea Container for

Transportation by Rail to Sea Port
Figure 1

012.30.00
Pages 9/10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Pin 2. Bracket 6 Anchor Wires

3 Boom 7 Pin
4 Lug 8 Sling
5 Special Nut 9 Screw
Lifting of Helicopter with Help of Fixture
8AT-9945-000 and Lug
Figure 2

012.30.00
Page 11/12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Pine Bar 50x70x1000, 8MT.9810.750.001 17 Spongy Gasket P=29, 11 mm thick, 160x650, 8MT.9810.750.017 33 Broadleaf Lumber Bar 50x70x1000, 8MT 9810.750.046
2 Pine Strut 50x70x1000, 8MT.9810.750.002 18 Strap 34 Herringbone Tape K-15-5, 8MT.9810.750.047
3 Pine Bar 50x60x300, 8MT.9810.750.003 19 Spongy Gasket P=29, 11 mm thick, 60x200, 8MT.9810.750.019 35 Struts (8TB-8700-20)
4 Pine Bar 50x60x600, 8MT.9810.750.004 20 Pine Bar 50x60x300, 8MT.9810.750.020 36 Struts (8TB-8700-23)
5 Pine Cradle 50x90x1300, 8MT.9810.750.005 21 Pine Upright 50x80x1340, 8MT.9810.750.021 37 Struts (8TB-8700-100)
6 Spongy Gasket P=29, 11 mm thick, 60x1000, 8MT.9810.750.006 22 Pine Cradle 50x250x1300, 8MT.9810.750.022 38 Stabilizer (8AT-3110-00)
7 Pine Bar 50x70x3500, 8MT.9810.750.007 23 Spongy Gasket P=29, 11 mm thick, 60x1000, 8MT.9810.750.023 39 Shock Strut (8A-4101-006)
8 Pine Bar 50x60x250, 8MT.9810.750.008 24 Pine Cradle 50x60x250, 8MT.9810.750.024 40 Nose Landing Gear Fork (8A-4200-00)
9 Strap, 0,5x30, l=600, 8MT.9810.750.009 25 Spongy Gasket P=29, 11 mm thick, 60x200, 8MT.9810.750.025 41 Wheel (KT-97/3 865x280)
10 Pine Cradle 50x20x840, 8MT.9810.750.010 26 Pine Bar 50x60x500, 8MT.9810.750.026 42 Tail Boom (140-0500-00)
11 Pine Bar 50x60x840, 8MT.9810.750.011 27 Nail K2x50 ГОСТ 4028-63 43 Nose Landing Gear Fork (8A-4200-00)
12 Nail П 1,6x25 ГОСТ 4028-63 28 Broadleaf Lumber Cradle 50x200x400, 8MT 9810.750.041 44. Landing Gear Fairing (8A-4801-00)
13 Strap 29 Broadleaf Lumber Cradle 50x210x400, 8MT 9810.750.042 45 Shaft (8A-1516-30)
14 Spongy Gasket P=29, 11 mm thick, 160x550, 8MT.9810.750.014 30 Broadleaf Lumber Bar 50x60x400, 8MT 9810.750.043 46 Container (8AT-9810-700-1)
15 Pine Upright 50x80x900, 8MT.9810.750.015 31 Broadleaf Lumber Bar 50x100x1700, 8MT 9810.750.044 47 End Wall (8AT-9810-720)
16 Pine Cradle 60x250x900, 8MT.9810.750.016 32 Broadleaf Lumber Bar 50x70x360, 8MT 9810.750.045 48 Detachable Bar

Layout and Attachment of Tail Boom and of detachable

Equipment in Container 8АT-9810-700-1
Figure 3

012.30.00
Pages 13/14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Pine Bar 50x60x850, 8AT.9980.120.001
2 Pine Bar 50x90x1150, 8AT.9980.120.002
3 Broadleaf Lumber Bar 50x70x1000, 8AT.9980.120.003
4 Pine Tie 50x70x2500, 8AT.9980.120.004
5 Broadleaf Lumber Upper Cradle 40x135x1120,
8AT.9980.52
6 Broadleaf Lumber Lower Cradle 40x85x1120,
8AT.9980.51
7 Pine Stop 60x90x1240, 8AT.9980.120.007
8 Pine Bar 50x60x250, 8MT.9810.750.008
9 Broadleaf Lumber Bar 50x70x1350, 8AT.9980.120.009
10 Broadleaf Lumber Support 50x80x700,
8AT.9980.120.010
11 Spongy Gasket 8AT.9980.120.011
12 Strap K-15-5, 15x10000, 8AT.9980.120.012
13 Spongy Gasket 8AT.9980.120.013
14 Box with Spare Parts of Ground Servicing
Equipment
15 Pine Cradle 50x180x1120, 8AT.9980.120.015
16 Pine Bar 50x70x1120, 8AT.9980.120.016
17 Port External Fuel Tank 8AT-6102-400
18 Stabilizer 8AT-3100-00
19 Starboard External Fuel Tank 8AT-6102-500
20 Broadleaf Lumber Parking 50x50x700,
8AT.9980.120.022
21 Broadleaf Lumber Plate 50x100x980,
8AT.9980.120.024
22 Clamp 56.9802.082
23 Pin 56.9802.081, 20 mm in dia, l=150 mm
24 Clamp 8AT.9980.121
25 Main Rotor Blade Cradle
26 Main Rotor Blade Cradle
27 Pine Cradle 60x100x1060

Diagram of Attachment of All-Metal Blades

Figure 4

012.30.00
Pages 15/16
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Anchor Wire 8АТ-9700-10-3 6 Pine Cradle 8MT.9810.760.005 (50x220x2000) 10 Spongy Gasket P-29, 8МТ.9810.760.010
2 External Fuel Tank 8AT-6120-100 (8AT-6120-200) 7 Strap ЛПЛ кр-50, 8МТ.9810.760.Oil (L = 5000) (100x160)
3 Extra Fuel Tank 8AТ-6117-00 8 Pine Cradle 8MT.9810.760.018 (50x180x2000) 11 Nail Л1, 6x25
4 Pine Bar 8МТ.9810.760.004 (20x50x710) 9 Spongy Gasket P-29, 8MT. 9810.760.009
5 Pine Cradle 8MT.9810.760.003 (50x130x1850) (100x650)

Installation and Attachment of External Fuel Tanks

in Helicopter Cargo Compartment
Figure 5

012.30.00
Pages 17/18
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Install upright (12) (8AT-9810-180) on the RH side,
upright (19) (8AT-9810-181) on the LH side on the
support; secure with bolts (M16xl50-5,8.03 ГОСТ
7795-70) with washers (16 Кд ОСТ 1 11532-74) and nuts
(M16.5.02 ГОСТ 5915-70); check the presence of the
clearance between the upright and the fuselage, after
that drive them in;
Loosen the jacks of cradles (8AT-9905-500) and take
them from under the fuselage, lower the fuselage onto
the ground;
Install and secure the fuel tanks in the cargo
compartment of the helicopter as shown in Fig. 5.
Pack container (8AT-9810-700-1) with the tail boom,
main rotor blades and detachable units (Ref. Figs 3,
4). Be sure the packed units are preserved and placed
in polyethylene bags. Perform operations as follows:
remove the end board of the container (with the
door); inspect and clean the container base before
packing;
bring the boxes and detachable units in the
container and secure them with the help of straps
(ЛРТ КрП-45), bars and nails (Ref. Fig. 3);
bring the tail boom on wide straps (by hands),
place the cradles, secure in the cradles and attach
the cradles to the bracket (Ref. Fig. 3);
attach the cradles of the blades to the container
floor and the upper coupling on the cradles with
nails 4x100 mm;
manually bring in the main rotor blades by one,
place on the cradles;
attach the shank of each blade to the cradle with
the help of clamps 56-9802-82 installing wooden
pins 56-9802-81 (Ref. Fig. 4) in the holes of

012.30.00
Page 19
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
clamps and blades. Lock the pins with cotter pins
4x30;
clean the container floor and remove foreign
objects;
install the removed end board with the door on the
container and secure it with the earlier removed
bolts;
tightly close the container door, secure it with
the help of bars and special nuts and affix a seal.
Pack container (8AT-9810-700-2) as follows:
make sure that the units packed in the container
are preserved;
remove the end board (with the door);
inspect and clean the container before packing,-
bring in and, in turn, secure the boxes with units
and detachable equipment and secure them in the
container {Ref. Fig. 6);
remove foreign objects from the container;
install the removed end board (with the door) and
secure them with earlier removed bolts;
tightly close the container door, secure it with
the help of bars and special nuts and affix a
seal.
Prepare the flat car for loading the helicopter
fuselage (Ref. Fig. 1) as follows :
prepare a ground for loading. Clean it of rubbish,
snow and other foreign objects. The ground should
be even and with hard soil;
wheel up the disassembled fuselage to the loading
ground with the help of a truck and tow bar
8TB-9800-00;

012.30.00
Page 20
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Container with Ground Equipment and Airborne Tools 23 Nail

Kit 8AT-9931-00-5 24 Bar
2 Container with Ground Equipment 8AT-9931-00-3 26 Box with SPTA Set (1:1) 8AT-9980-00-1
7 Box with oxygen Equipment 8AT-9980-00-12 27 Box for ДИСС-32- 90А Item
8 Box with Spare Parts for Vendor Items 8AT-9980-00-6
9 Box with External Load 8AT-9980-00 NOTES:
11 Main Rotor Hub Package 8AT-9970-760CБ 1 Unplanned bars
12 Box with KO-50 Equipment 8AT-9980-00-10 2 Lumber humidity within limits of 22+3 %. Making bars of air
13 Box with Cowlings 8AT-9980-00-13 dried lumber of higher humidity is tolerated.
14 Loading Ramp 8AT-0730-00 3 Attach boxes to container floor with bars
15 Arm for Blade Turning 8AT-9927-00 4 Attach one box to another, ladder, driving arm and ramps by
16 Ladder 8-9905-00 straps ПОЗ-2.
17 Airborne Ladder 8AT-9927-00 5 Install container8AT-9931-00-3 close to container 8AT-9931-00-5
18 Can with Oil Б-3B 6 Pack tools, ground equipment in places No. 1 (8AT-9931-00-5)
19 Boxes for Attending personnel Facilities 7 Stow: bow with item ПНА -1M (2 pos), tools kit 1:1, 8AT-9980-000-
20 Tank Securing Strap 1, box with item ДИСС-32-90А in places No. 2 (8AT-9931-00-3).
22 Cotton Tape Fasten the boxes.

Parking Container (8AT.9810.700-2) with Helicopter

Detachable Items
Figure 6

012.30.00
Pages 21/22
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
manually with the help of the tow bar wheel the
fuselage onto the loading ground observing the
distance of 1.5 m between the rails and the
helicopter landing gear;
install and secure fixture for lifting helicopter
140-9943-000 to the main drive shaft using the
following procedure (Ref. Fig. 2):
visually make sure that the boom and braces of the
fixture are free from mechanical damage and that
the locking of all nuts is intact;
secure slings (8) to the fixture braces;
unpack and depreserve the gear box head shaft end;
screw special nut (5) flush with the gear box shaft
complete with lug (4) with a subsequent locking
with screw (9);
lift the fixture by the yoke with the crane
supporting it by the slings on the braces, bring to
the helicopter so that the port of beam (3) is above
lug (4). Smoothly lower the fixture so that the eye
of lug (4) enters the port in boom (3) and secure
with pin (1), simultaneously engage the universal
joints of braces (6) with the slots of the helicopter
mooring bracket arranged at Frame No. 10 and secure
with locking pins.
CAUTION: 1 DEFLECTION OF THE CRANE HOISTING ROPE
FROM THE VERTICAL BY MORE THAN 10° IS
NOT TOLERATED.
2 FOR CARRYING OUT THE OPERATION ON
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF THE FIXTURE
FOR LIFTING THE HELICOPTER, USE A
SPECIAL SAFETY BELT SECURED TO THE MAIN
DRIVE SHAFT;

012.30.00
Page 23
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
take the crane hook from the yoke in bracket (2) on
the fixture, lift the fuselage with the crane until
the wheels clear the ground, install trestles
8AT-9905-500 with mechanical jacks under Frames Nos
3 and 10 and press the cradles to the fuselage
supporting by the crane throughout the removal of
the landing gear and installation of suspensions
and supports;
remove the landing gear from the helicopter.
NOTES: 1 Before removing the landing gear, release
nitrogen pressure from the shock struts;
2 Prior to removing the main landing gear,
remove the braking wheels;
secure support 8AT-9810-110 (30) (Ref. Fig. 1) to
the nose landing gear units with the help of
suspensions 8AT-9810-120 and 8AT-9810-130. Secure
upright 8AT-9810-080 (for the LH side) and
8AT-9810-180 (for the RH side) to the support;
secure support 8AT-9810-140 (23) (Ref. Fig. 1) to
the main landing gear attachment units with the
help of two eye-bolts 3001A-18-54-5 Кд (21). Secure
upright 8AT-9810-183 (for the LH side) and
8AT-9810-182 (for the RH side) to the support;
place the rail shoes under the wheels of the flat
car.

012.30.00
Page 24
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE: Moving of the flat car is allowed only after

finishing the attachment of the fuselage to
the flat car and removal of fixture
8AT-9945-000 and lug with nut 8AT-9943-00;
clean the flat car floor of rubbish and dirt (in
winter, of snow and ice). Sand the floor with the
layer of 1 to 2 mm in the points of installation of
supports 8AT-9810-110 and 8AT-9810-140;
swing down all the sections of the flat car sides and
bind with the tie-down hooks of the side loops. Tie
the extreme sides to the tying rings on the nose bar.
Besides, tie the both drop sides of the flat car one
to the other with three anchor wires, 5 mm in dia.,
folded in two passing them under the flat car below
the side and center bars. After tying, the flat car
sides should be positioned vertically. Secure the end
sides in the lifted position with the help of wooden
posts made of conifer species or birch, 120 mm to 140
mm in dia.;
on the post seats of the flat car install rail shoes
8AT-9810-80-01 (for the RH side) and 8AT-9810-80-2
(for the LH side) and 8AT-9810-170 (24) and (15)
(Ref. Fig. 1). Secure the shoes with the help of
stops 8AT-9810-890 (26) and bolts 8AT-9810-865-02
(25) and (27);
right before loading the fuselage on the flat car,
equally distribute bags with silica gel dehydrator
among the compartments by suspending them over the
whole volume in the following numbers: flight
compartment - 10 pcs; engine compartment - 10 pcs;
passenger compartment - 10 pcs, ventilation
compartment - 8 pcs; gear box compartment - 10 pcs;
radio compartment - 12 pcs;

012.30.00
Page 25
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
install the fuselage on the flat car, for this
purpose: lift the fuselage with the supports
installed with the crane to a height of 1500 to
1600 mm, level it off with the help of the slings and
smoothly lower it on the floor of the flat car so as
to align:
(a) the oval holes in the ends of the rear support
with the pins of the shoes secured to the post
seats of the flat car, drive in bolts 8AT-9810-880
(5) (Ref. Fig. 1) and lock with wire;
(b) the oval holes in the ends of the front support
with the holes in the shoes, install bolts
8AT-9810-880 (2), place washer 24.04.02 ГОСТ
11371-68 (2 pcs), screw on nuts M24.5.02 ГОСТ
5915-70 (2 pcs) and center punch;
engage the crane hook with the yoke for lifting
fixture 8AT-9945-000, disconnect it from the
helicopter and remove;
remove the lug and nut from the gear box shaft;
preserve the threaded part and the end of the main
drive shaft by brush-applying one coat of grease ПВК
heated to a temperature of 60 to 80 °C, install the
cup, drive on temporary blank cover 8AT-9810-656 onto
the shaft end, wrap in paraffined paper and bind up
with twine;
place the bags with technical documentation in the
helicopter compartment;
check the presence of preservation of the fuselage
external surfaces, presence of seals on the fuselage
cargo hatches and slide blister;
wipe the fuselage external surface and check it for
mechanical damage; affix a seal to the fuselage
entrance door,-

012.30.00
Page 26
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
for carrying out the repacking at a sea port, arrange
and secure to the flat car (in the rear of the
fuselage) the following items:
the slip cover, silica gel dehydrator, spongy rubber;
plywood strips;
stretchings 8AT-9990-102-1/2;
box with fasteners;
on-board ladder 8A-9917-00.
For attachment, use straps ЛРТ-КрП-45, pine bars
(60x60) and nails K3xBG.
load the base of container (2) (8AT-9810-640) and
container (3) (8AT-3010-700-1) on the flat car (Ref.
Fig. 7);
place the rail shoes under the flat car wheels, swing
down the flat car sides, secure them to the hooks
with wire, 5 mm in dia., folded in two;
clean the flat car floor of rubbish (from snow and
ice in winter), scatter з;ша over the flat car floor
at the container sledges;
tow the base of container (2) (8AT-9810-640) to the
loading ground;
lift and install base (2) (8AT-9810-640) on the flat
car with the help of the crane and spreader;
secure base (8AT-9810-640), for this purpose, install
wooden stops, .80x120 mm in section and 2800 mm long
in the front and rear of the base on the flat car
floor and secure then to the floor with nails K5xl50
at a pitch of 200 mm in a staggered order;
tow container (3) (8AT-9810-700-1) to the loading
ground;
lift and install the container on the flat car with
the help of the crane and suspension, install the

012.30.00
Page 27
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
container so as the distance between the end of
container base (2) to the C.G. of container (3)
equals 5822 mm;
install wooden stops (3) (60x60x2000 mm) in the front
and rear of the container and secure them with nails
K5xl20 at a pitch of 200 mm;
secure the container with anchor wires (4) passing
them through the post seats of the flat car and
through the rings of the upper gussets of the
container; twist the anchor wires of a steel annealed
wire, 5 mm in dia. folding it four times; tightly
stretch the anchor wires and twist them in the
middle;
install the pine posts, 100x200 mm in section and
1200 mm long into the post seats of the flat car,
secure additionally the container with wooden stops
(pine) (7), 80x80 mm in section and 1500 mm long with
nails K5xl50.
Load container (8AT-9810-700-2) on the flat car;
carry out the loading much in the same way as loading
of container (3) (8AT-9810-700-1).
2.5 Unloading and Unpacking Containers from Helicopters
After Sea Transportation
2.5.1 Unloading containers after sea transportation
For unloading, use a crane of minimum lifting
capacity of 15 tf. Secure the slings in eight units
(Ref. Fig. 8) on the base of the container which
are indicated by placards LIFT HERE (ПОДНИМАТЬ
ЗДЕСЬ). Carry out lifting with the allowance for
the container C.G. indicated on the container side
panels. For lifting the container, use slings (2)
available at a sea port and tested for lifting
capacity of at least 20 tf.

012.30.00
Page 28
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
If unpacking cannot be performed for a subsequent
depreservation and assembly of the helicopter at
the unloading ground, it is allowed to tow the
helicopter packed in the containers to the airfield
or specially equipped ground.
If the helicopter is unpacked, it is allowed to use
a truck for its transportation, in this case, the
fuselage installed on the landing gear can be towed
with the help of a rigid tow bar.
2.5.2 Unpacking container with helicopter.
For unpacking, prepare the following items:
crane, with the lifting capacity of 15 tf as
minimum;
suspension for lifting the container hood
(available at a sea port);
fixture for lifting helicopter 8AT-9945-00;
hydraulic jacks 8AT-9907-00 (4 pcs);
trestles 8AT-9905-500.
NOTE: The said equipment and tools are arranged in
container No. 3.
CAUTION: CARRY OUT UNLOADING AND UNPACKING OP THE
HELICOPTER FROM THE CONTAINER IN A TEAM OF
MINIMUM SEVEN PERSONS ACQUAINTED WITH THE
LOADING/UNLOADING AND LIFTING SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS.
Unpack container No. 1, for this purpose:
knock out the bolts securing the hood to the
container base and disconnect the hood from the
base. Remove the hood front wall (without the
door). Secure the suspension to the container
hood and to the crane. Lift the hood to a height
of up to 1 m for providing a clearance between

012.30.00
Page 29
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the main rotor shaft and the hood cover and
sliding the hood towards the cargo hatch, remove
it from the helicopter;
unlock and drive out the anchor wires sleeves
bringing apart the ends of anchor wires on the
helicopter sides;
knock out three attachment bolts of one of the
anchor wires brackets from the attachment units
of the landing gear shock strut;
knock out the bolts securing the frame channel
sections to the brackets of the sea container
base and remove sixteen nails, 5x120 mm;
lift fixture 8AT-9945-00 complete with the lug
with the crane, secure it to the helicopter
(Ref. Fig. 2). Engage the crane hook with the
fixture, lift the helicopter leveling it by the
slings secured to the fixture braces and lower on
trestles 8AT-9905-500 assembled with the
hydraulic jacks installing them under Frames Nos
3 and 10; in this case, do not ease the crane;
knock out four bolts securing the front and rear
frames to the landing gear units and remove the
frames}
install the nose and main landing gear with the
wheels onto the helicopter;
engage the crane hook with the yoke for lifting
fixture 8AT-9945-00, detach the fixture from the
helicopter and remove it by the crane. After
that, remove the lug with the nut from the main
drive shaft.
Unpack container No. 2 with the tail boom and main
rotor blades, container No. 3 with the units, for
this purpose:

012.30.00
Page 30
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
unseal, remove wire and open the entrance door of
each container;
knock out the attachment bolts-of the container
end wall (with the door) and remove the wall;
in turn, release the shanks, of the main rotor
blades from the wooden pins and clamps attaching
the blades to the cradles and remove the upper
bars on the cradles (only on container No. 2);
carefully take the blades (by one) from the
container by hands and place them on the trolley
or on the support for the blades;
unfasten and bring out the boxes with units,
shock struts, brace struts and wheels of the
landing gear;
unfasten the tail boom cradles from the container
floor, take the boom out of the container and
unfasten the upper bars from the cradles;
install and secure the front wall to container
No. 2.
2.6 Unpacking and Unloading of Containers After
Transportation by Rail
2.6.1 Unpacking and unloading of container No. 1.
For unpacking and unloading the container, prepare
the following items:
crane, of minimum lifting capacity of 10 tf;
suspension for lifting the container hood
(available at the railway station); fixture for
lifting helicopter 140-9943-000; hydraulic jacks
8AT-9907-00 (4 pcs); trestles 8AT-9905-500 under
Frames No. 3 and No. 10.

012.30.00
Page 31
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE: The equipment and tools sent by the container

with helicopter are available in
the closed flat car.
Unpack and unload container No. 1 with the
helicopter, for this purpose:
place the rail shoes under the flat car wheels;
swing down the flat car sides and secure them one
to another with wire;
remove the anchor wires securing the helicopter
and the container to the flat
car, remove the wooden plugs from the container
ports and demount two brackets 8АT-9810-190 from
the shock strut attachment units;
knock out eight bolts securing the retainer to
the front and rear supports of the helicopter
secured to the flat car.
Remove the container cover with the help of the
suspension after removing ten bolted joints and
attachment of the pulley block to the side walls.
Remove the side and end walls of the container
after disassembly of the bolted joints.
NOTE: If the crane jib height is not less than 9.5
m, the helicopter can be removed from the
flat car in. the assembled condition with the
help of the suspension;
unfasten and remove the landing gear units from
the flat car;
detach the fuselage front and rear supports from
the flat car;
unpack and depreserve the end of the main drive
shaft, Install and secure fixture 140-9943-000 to
the helicopter with the help of the crane. Engage

012.30.00
Page 32
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the crane hook with the fixture, lift the
helicopter off the flat car leveling it by the
slings secured to Frame No. 23 of the fuselage
and install the helicopter on trestles
8AT-9905-500 with the hydraulic jacks placing
them under Frames Nos 3 and 10 of the fuselage,
in this case, do not ease the crane;
remove the front support from the helicopter.
Install the nose landing gear with the wheels on
the helicopter;
remove the rear support from under Frame No. 13;
install the main landing gear with the wheels;
engage the crane hook with the yoke for lifting
fixture 140-9943-00, detach it from the
helicopter and remove, after that, remove the lug
with the nut from the main drive shaft;
remove the blocks from the flat car after
detaching the clamps from the post seats of the
flat car. Uncouple the hinged down sides of the
flat car from the wire, close the sides.
2.6.2 Unloading and unpacking of container No. 2 with the
tail boom and the main rotor blades.
Disconnect and remove the anchor wires attaching
the container to the flat car, loose the flat car
sides removing the wooden upright and wire from the
sides locks.
By the crane remove the container from the flat car
securing the slings to the units on the container
base which are indicated by inscriptions LIFT HERE
(ПОДНИМАТЬ ЗДЕСЬ). For lifting the container, use
the slings available at the railway station after
testing them for lifting capacity of 15 tf.
Unpack the container as described under Para 2.5.2.

012.30.00
Page 33
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.7 Assembly of Helicopter
2.7.1 Preliminary operations. Open the doors of the power
plant cowling and the hatch covers. Remove the
blanking covers from the tail boom, fuselage,
lights.
Unpack the detachable parts and units.
Remove the bags with silica gel from the
helicopter.
Depreserve the detachable parts and units.
2.7.2 Helicopter assembly procedure. In the order
reversal to the removal from the helicopter,
install:
the stabilizer on the tail boom;
one section of the transmission shaft;
the tail boom complete with the tail boom pylon;
the tail bumper;
the pitot static tubes;
clock АЧС-1;
transmitter ИД-3;
the antenna assembly from АРК-УД set (if any);
mirror 8AT-7510-00 (2 pcs);
upright 441-1 (if any);
the monounit from ДИСС-32А set;
flashing beacon МСЛ-3;
the radio set beam antenna;
АШС-УД antenna;
unit 414 (if any);
ЛПГ-150МС Winch with boom;
FPP-7M/ФПП-7М and FR-100 Lights;

012.30.00
Page 34
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the external fuel tanks with fillets;
heater KO-50;
One or two AshV-50/АШВ-50 antennae, depending on
quantity of VHF radio stations installed on the
helicopter;
CI-205-3(-1) antenna on helicopters equipped with
glide slope radio beacon;
One or two KA-60 antennae (if any);
Two MSL-3/МСЛ-3 flashing beacons and HS-62/XC-62
tail light.
SX-16 Searchlight (if any);
AN-001/AH-001 directional antenna of ARK-15/
APK-15 system;
the main rotor blades and hub;
the slip ring for main rotor hub;
the vibration damper;
the tail rotor blades and hub.
Check the helicopter for proper adjustment. Fill
the systems with fuel, oil and air.
Check the in-track condition of the main rotor
blades and test-fly the helicopter during 10 min.
Given in Table 2 are the equipment and tools
required for the disassembly, assembly, loading and
unloading of the helicopter during its
transportation in the container.

012.30.00
Page 35
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Shoe
2 Base of Container (8AT-9810-640)
3 Container (8AT-9810-700-1)
4 Anchor Wire
5 Wooden Stops
6 Flat Car Side
7 Wooden Uprights
8 Container Base Lifting Units
9 Wooden Stops

Loading Container and Container Base on Flat Car

Figure 7

012.30.00
Page 36
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Suspension 63830/3371A
2 Sling
3 Unit for Lifting Helicopter
4 Base of Sea Container
5 Placard Showing Direction C.G. Center of Gravity

Lifting of Sea Container with Helicopter

Figure 8

012.30.00
Page 37
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2
Equipment and Tools Required for Disassembly, Assembly,
Loading and Unloading of Helicopter During Transportation
in Container
Quantity
during
disassembly during
Description Dwg No. unloading
and loading and
helicopter
into assembly of
helicopter
container
Hydraulic jack 8AT-9907-00 4 4
Sling for lifting tail boom
8AT-9936-00 1 set 1 set
complete with its pylon
Maintenance stand for operation
8AT-9919-00 1 1
at tail and main rotors
Cradles for main rotor blades 8AT-9915-00 1 set 1 set
On-board multi-purpose ladder
for general maintenance of 8AT-9917-00 1 1
helicopter
Chocks 8-9126-00 4 4
Hose for charging and checking
pressure in wheels, airborne
8A-9910-00 1 set 1 set
electrical system, shock struts
and hydraulic accumulators
Sling for lifting main rotor
8A-9903-00 1 1
blades
Fixture for lifting helicopter 140-9943-00 1 1
Trestles for Frames Nos 3 and 10 8AT-9905-500 2
Hose for draining fuel 8AT-9901-01A 1
Hose for draining oil from main
8AT-9918-00 1 1
gear box
Container for draining oil and
1 set 1 set
fuel
Installation for internal
2-9909-00
preservation of engine fuel 1 1
(УKД-1)
system
Fixture for releasing air from
7818-0180 1 1
fuel system of engine TB3-117BM
Fixture for releasing air from 25ТЛ-
1 1
fuel system of engine АИ-9В 19.02.360

012.30.00
Page 38
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2, continued
Quantity
during
Description D wg No. disassembly during
unloading
and loading and
helicopter
into assembly of
helicopter
container
Torque wrench for tightening
8AT-9124-300 1 set 1 set
main rotor hub nut
Hose for preserving engine jets 7818.0130 1 1
Funnel for filling oil 4639A-1 1 1
Funnel for filling oil АМГ-10 4639A-1 1 1
Modified grease gun 8AT-9917-500 1 1
Grease gun ID-1 with В-9917-100 1 1
modification В-9917-100
Wrench for electrical connectors 8AT-9106-50 1 1
Wrench for electrical connectors 8AT-9108-30 1 1
Screwdriver, L = 200 mm, В = 6 7810-0308 1 1
ГОСТ 17199-71
Instrument screwdriver BAT- 91 07-30 1 1
Head for landing gear wheel 8АТ-9102-04 1 1
tightening nut
Combination pliers 8АТ-9100-01-5 1 1
Cone for installation of main 8AT- 91 02-07 1 1
rotor blades attachment bolts on
hub
Fitter's hammer 8АТ-9105-30 1 1
Cross-cut saw L = 400 mm 1 1
Strain gauge ИН-11 1 1
Torque wrench, up to 70 N⋅m 8AT-9102-130 1 1
Torque wrench, up to 200 N⋅m 8АТ-9102-80 1 1
Two- speed hand drill up to 6 mm РД-3 with 1 -
modify-cation
Э80-0013
Head, S = 14, for tail boom 8АТ-9102-08 1 1
coupling nuts
Head, S = 17, for transmission 8AT-9 102-13 1 1
shaft attachment nuts
Head, S = 19, for nuts securing 8АТ-9102-13 1 1
tail rotor hub to gear box

012.30.00
Page 39
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2, continued
Quantity
during
Description D wg No. disassembly during
unloading
and loading and
helicopter
into assembly of
helicopter
container
Head for tail rotor blade nuts 8АТ-9101-21 1 1
Head for tightening attachment 8АТ-9102-15 - 1
bolts of external fuel tank
straps
Head for tightening nuts of 8АТ-9102-18 - 1
attachment bolts of main rotor
blades
Head for tightening stabilizer 8АТ-9102-415 1 1
nuts
Tools kit for engine - 1 set 1 set
Sling for lifting main rotor hub 8AT-9921-00 1 set 1 set
Yoke for lifting tail rotor hub 8АТ-9925-100 1 1
Tow bar 8AT-9800-00 1 set 1 set
Mallet 54205/062 1 1
Nail extractor 380-0036 or 1 1
ГОСТ 1405-65,
type ЛГ-25
Installation for checking cone 8AT-9937-00 1 1
alignment of main rotor blades
Hacksaw L = 300 1 1
Center punch 8AT-8105-02 1 1
Center punch 8AT-9105-75 1 1
Chisel 8AT-9105- 01 1 1
Chip axe ГОСТ 1399-73 1 1
Cutting pliers 8АТ-9106-70 1 1
Seal press 6478/0037 1 1
Tap wrench 8АТ-9105-04 1 1
Adjustable wrench ГОСТ 7275-62 1 1
Screwdriver, L = 200, В = 6 mm 7810-0318 1 1
Crow bar ГОСТ 1405-72 1 1
Punch 8АТ-9105-04 1 1
Torque wrench for tightening nut 8AT-9114-00 1 set 1 set
of main rotor hub

012.30.00
Page 40
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2, continued
Quantity
during
Description disassembly during
D wg No. unloading
and loading and
helicopter
into assembly of
helicopter
container
Cone 8АТ-9102-370 1 1
Hose for draining oil from 8AT-9928-500 1 1
engine oil system
Safety belt 8АТ-9991-10 1 1
Suspension 8AT-9941-00 1 1
Wrench, S = 14x17 8АТ-9101-08 1 1
Wrench, S = 17x19 8АТ-9101-09 1 1
Wrench, S = 19x22 8АТ-9101-11 1 1
Wrench, S = 22x24 8АТ-9101-12 1 1
Wrench, S = 24x27 8А2-9101-13 1 1
Wrench, S = 27x30 8А Т-9101-14 1 1
Wrench, S = 32x36 8АТ-9101-15 1 1
Wrench, S = 41x46 8АТ-9101-16 1 1
Wrench, S = 50x55 8АT-9101-17 1 1

012.30.00
Page 41/42
March 31/11
 Section 020
STANDARD PRACTICES
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

020.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Section, Page Authority Transmittal By Date
Rev Sub-Section, revised added deleted No. Letter
No. Subject Reference No.
and Date

020.00.00
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title Page 020.10.00 6 March 31/11
7 March 31/11
Record of 1 March 31/11 8 March 31/11
Revisions 2 March 31/11 9 March 31/11
10 March 31/11
List of 1 March 31/11
Effective 2 March 31/11 020.10.01 1 March 31/11
Pages 3/4 March 31/11 2 March 31/11
3 March 31/11
Table of 1 March 31/11 4 March 31/11
Contents 2 March 31/11 5 March 31/11
3 March 31/11 6 March 31/11
4 March 31/11
5/6 March 31/11 020.20.00 1 March 31/11
2 March 31/11
Introduction 1/2 March 31/11 3 March 31/11
4 March 31/11
020.00.00 1/2 March 31/11
020.21.00 1 March 31/11
020.10.00 1 March 31/11 2 March 31/11
2 March 31/11 3 March 31/11
3 March 31/11 4 March 31/11
4 March 31/11 5/6 March 31/11
5 March 31/11 101 March 31/11

020.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
020.21.00 102 March 31/11 020.60.00 7 March 31/11
103 March 31/11 8 March 31/11
104 March 31/11 9 March 31/11
105/106 March 31/11 10 March 31/11
11 March 31/11
020.30.00 1 March 31/11 12 March 31/11
2 March 31/11 13 March 31/11
3 March 31/11 14 March 31/11
4 March 31/11 15/16 March 31/11
5/6 March 31/11
020.70.00 1 March 31/11

020.40.00 1 March 31/11 2 March 31/11

2 March 31/11 3 March 31/11

3/4 March 31/11 4 March 31/11

5 March 31/11

020.50.00 1 March 31/11 6 March 31/11

2 March 31/11
3/4 March 31/11 020.71.00 1/2 March 31/11
101 March 31/11
020.60.00 1 March 31/11 102 March 31/11
2 March 31/11 301/302 March 31/11
3 March 31/11 203 March 31/11
4 March 31/11 204 March 31/11
5 March 31/11
6 March 31/11 020.80.00 1 March 31/11
2 March 31/11

020.00.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Page Date Section, Page Date

Sub- Sub-
Section, Section,
Subject Subject
020.80.00 3 March 31/11 020.90.00 1 March 31/11
4 March 31/11 2 March 31/11
5 March 31/11 3 March 31/11
6 March 31/11 4 March 31/11
7 March 31/11 5 March 31/11
8 March 31/11 6 March 31/11
9 March 31/11 7 March 31/11
10 March 31/11 8 March 31/11
11 March 31/11 9 March 31/11
12 March 31/11 10 March 31/11
13 March 31/11 11 March 31/11
14 March 31/11 12 March 31/11
15 March 31/11 13 March 31/11
16 March 31/11 14 March 31/11
17 March 31/11 15 March 31/11
18 March 31/11 16 March 31/11
19 March 31/11 17 March 31/11
20 March 31/11 18 March 31/11
21 March 31/11 19/20 March 31/11
22 March 31/11
23 March 31/11
24 March 31/11
25 March 31/11
26 March 31/11
27 March 31/11
28 March 31/11
29/30 March 31/11
020.00.00
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages 3/4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
STANDARDIZED MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 020.00.00
General

MAINTENANCE OF PAINT-AND-VARNISH 020.10.00

COATING OF AIRFRAME AND POWER PLANT
PARTS
Signs of corrosion 1
Removal of corrosion on aluminum 1
parts (with corrosion attacked
enamel and primer coating)
Removal of corrosion products on 3
magnesium parts damaged enamel
and primer coating)
Removal of corrosion from steel 4
parts
Up keeping of paint-and-varnish 5
coating of external surfaces
painted with epoxy enamel in
course of operation
Reconditioning of paint-and- 7
varnish coating

020.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
MAINTENANCE OF “AKZO NOBEL” 020.10.01
POLYURETHANE TYPE PAINT COATING
General 1
Maintenance Of External Surfaces 1
Coated By “Akzo Nobel”
Polyurethane Type Paint Materials
During Operation
Repair of paint coating 2

UPKEEPING OF ORGANIC GLASS PARTS 020.20.00

Protection of parts of organic 1
glass
Elimination of window defects by 2
grinding and polishing
Polishing of organic glass for 3
restoration of optical properties

MAINTENANCE OF POLYMER COMPOSITE PARTS 020.21.00

General 1
Repair of polymer composite parts 3
Safety precautions 4
Polymer composite parts 101

020.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
RESTORATION OF FUSELAGE SEALING 020.30.00 1

MAKING AND REPAIR OF SLIP COVERS MADE 020.40.00 1

OF PVC OR POLYETHYLENE FILM

UPKEEPING OF SILICA GEL DEHYDRATOR 020.50.00

Restoration of silica-gel 1
properties
Replacement of silica-gel in 2
items at storage

REPAIR OF FUSELAGE 020.60.00

General 1
Repair of skin with minor defects 5
Repair of skin in hard-to-reach 6
places
Repair of frames 10
Repair of reinforced frames 10
Repair of defective stringer 12
Reinforcement of defective 12
stringer
Repair of stringer-to-frame 13
crossing

020.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Title Sub- Page
Section,
Subject
Repair of stabilizer skin 13

INSTRUCTIONS ON USE OF TORQUE WRENCHES 020.70.00

8AT-9102-130, 8AT-9102-80, 8AT-9103-10
General 1
Torque wrench 8AT-9102-130 1
Torque wrenches 8AT-9102-80, 2
8AT-9103-10
Instructions on checking torque 4
wrenches
Instructions on Use of Torque 5
Wrench 8AT-9114-00 (8AT-9114-210)

CHECK OF THREADED CONNECTION 020.71.00 1/2

TIGHTENING.
INSPECTION CHECK OF CONNECTION
ATTACHMENT PARTS-DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
INSPECTION CHECK OF THREADED 101
CONNECTIONS ATTACHMENT PARTS-
TROUBLE SHOOTING
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 201/202

020.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REPAIR OF CONDUCTORS OF HELICOPTER 020.80.00

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
General 1
Cutting conductors and stripping 2
of insulation
Conductor soldering 3
Attachment of on-board electrical 13
conductors to sleeve couplings by
crimping
Sealing of electrical connectors 5
Restoration of attachment of 6
conductors and bonding strips
Appendix 1 28
Appendix 2 29/30

PROCEDURE OF COLLECTING AND TRANSFER 020.90.00

OF THE INFORMATION ABOUT TROUBLES OF
THE HELICOPTER
DIRECTIONS FOR FILLING IN THE "FALURE
RECORD CARDS
General 1
Rules of filling in FRC 4
Frequent mistakes made during 15
filling in FRC

020.00.00
CONTENTS
Page 5/6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

The present Maintenance Manual contains the information

on maintenance of the airframe, windows, covers and
electric wiring, which are referred to in the sections of
the Maintenance Manual as well as procedures for
collecting of obligatory information on incidents, flight
accidents, failures, troubles, malfunctions and damages
of the helicopter – directions for filling in the
”Failure Record Cards” (FRC).

020.00.00
INTRODUCTION
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

STANDARDIZED MAINTENANCE PRACTICES - GENERAL

The present Section gives the instructions on up keeping

of paint-and-varnish coating of the parts of the airframe
and power plant, of organic glass parts, as well as the
recommendations on the repair of the fuselage skin,
conductors of the helicopter electrical system and slip
covers made of PVC or polyethylene film attachment of
threaded connection parts in case defects are detected
when they are tightened with torque wrench. Besides,
given are the instructions on the restoration of the
fuselage sealing and handling with torque wrenches.

020.00.00
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

UPKEEPING OF PAINT-AND-VARNISH COATING OF AIRFRAME AND

POWER PLANT PARTS

CAUTION: IN THE COURSE OF OPERATION ALWAYS CHECK THE

CONDITION OF THE PAINT-AND-VARNISH COATING
OF PARTS. IN CASE OF DETERIORATION,
RECONDITION IT WITHOUT DELAY. BEFORE
RECONDITIONING THE PAINT-AND-VARNISH
COATING, MAKE SURE THE PARTS ARE FREE FROM
CORROSION. IN CASE OF CORROSION, FIRST,
REMOVE IT AND ONLY THEN RESTORE THE PAINT-
AND-VARNISH COATING.

1 SIGNS OF CORROSION
1.1 Signs of corrosion are shown on the aluminium parts
as white or grey spots on the parts surface or as
separate bаге1у noticeable crates of corrosion
sometimes in the form of dots on the skin.
1.2 Signs of corrosion of magnesium parts show themselves
as bulging of the paint-and-varnish coating, as well
as friable grey products of corrosion.
1.3 Signs of corrosion of steel are shown on the parts
surface as a brown-red film or black spots.
1.4 Subject parts on which corrosion has been revealed to
a treatment coming to the removal of the products of
corrosion and to the protection of these areas
against further corrosion.
2 REMOVAL OF CORROSION ON ALUMINIUM PARTS (WITH CORROSION
ATTACKED ENAMEL AND PRIMER COATINGS)
2.1 On the detection of corrosion on a surface protected
with primer AK-069, proceed as follows:
remove the deteriorated primer with the help of
emery cloth No. 5-6;

020.10.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
wipe the corrosion attacked area with a clean cloth
moistened with unleaded gasoline;
remove the products of corrosion with the help of
bristle hair brushes or wire brushes; if the
brushes cannot remove the traces of corrosion, use
emery cloth No. 5-6;
wipe the area with a clean cloth moistened with
gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80;
use a sprayer or a brush and apply primer ВЛ-02 and
two coats of primer AK-069. Allow the primer to dry
at the temperature in the range of 18 to 35 °C
during 1.5 to 2.5 h.
On the detection of corrosion on a surface protected
with the mix of the paint-and-varnish coating with
enamels, remove the corrosion as described above and
apply a coat of primer ВЛ-02, primer AK-070 in two
sub-layers for enamel ЭП-140 or primer ВЛ-02, primer
AK-069 in two layers for enamel XB-16 of the matching
colours. If primer ВЛ-02 is not available, it is
allowed to apply two layers of primer AK-070 for
painting with enamels ЭП-140 or primer AK-69 for
painting with enamels XB-16 with a subsequent drying
of each layer.
CAUTION IN THE RECONDITIONING OF THE PAINT-AND-
VARNISH COATING OF PARTS, A SUBLAYER OF
PRIMER ВЛ-02 FOR ENAMEL ЭП-140 IS NOT
TOLERATED.
In winter (if the above operations are not performed
in a heated room) after removing the products of
corrosion and degreasing, coat the area with a layer
of grease AMC-3. As warm weather comes, remove grease
AMC-3 with a cloth moistened with gasoline
ГОСТ 8505-80, treat the damaged area as described
under Para 2.1.

020.10.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 REMOVAL OF CORROSION ON MAGNESIUM PARTS (WITH DAMAGED
ENAMEL AND PRIMER COATINGS)
3.1 On detection of corrosion of the magnesium parts
(enamel + primer) protected with an oxide film and
paint-and-varnish coating, perform the following
operations:
remove the coating with a scraper or sand abrasive
paper on a surface with an area larger than 5 to
10 mm;
thoroughly remove the products of corrosion from
the part surface and in the corrosion pit, with
sand abrasive paper No. 8 or a scraper;
wash the dressed area with gasoline, ГОСТ 8505-80,
several times and wipe it dry with a clean cloth.
Be particularly careful in washing the clearances.
After washing, blow the clearances with compressed
air;
after drying, protect the treated surface with
three layers of paint-and-varnish coating as
follows:
use a sprayer or a brush and apply two layers of
primer AK-070. Allow the primer to dry at the
temperature in the range of 15 to 23 С during 1 h;
use a sprayer or a brush to apply enamel ЭП-140 of
a matching colour. Allow the enamel to dry at the
temperature in the range of 15 to 23 °C during 5 h.
3.2 If the air temperature is below 12 °C, do not apply
the paint-and-varnish coating to the magnesium parts.
In this case, remove the products of corrosion from
the damaged section and degrease it, after that
protect the section with a layer of grease AMC-3. As
a warm weather settles down, remove the grease from
the part surface with a cloth moistened with gasoline

020.10.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ГОСТ 8505-80 and treat the damaged area as described
under Para 3.1.
4 REMOVAL OF CORROSION FROM STEEL PARTS (WITH DAMAGED
ENAMEL AND PRIMER COATINGS)
4.1 On detection of corrosion on steel parts (enamel +
primer) perform the following operations:
wipe the defective surface with a clean cloth
moistened with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80 or dehydrated
kerosene;
remove the products of corrosion with a bristle
hair brush. If the corrosion persists, dress the
defective surfaces with sand abrasive paper No. 10;
wipe the treated section of the part with a clean
cloth moistened with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80 with the
admixture of antistatic СИГБОЛ. It is allowed to
wipe parts with the use of gasoline ГОСТ 443-76
which contains the antistatic agent;
keep the part in the air during 5 to 10 min or wipe
the treated section dry with a clean cloth;
apply a layer of primer AK-070, allow it to dry at
the temperature in the range of 18 to 30 °C during
1 to 2 h, then coat it with enamel ЭП-140 of the
matching colour, and allow it to dry at the
temperature in the range of 18 to 27 °C during 5 to
6 h.
4.2 Dress parts bare of the paint-and-varnish coating and
attacked by corrosion with emery paper
No. 10, remove the products of corrosion, wipe the
treated area with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80 with additive
СИГБОЛ, wipe it dry with a clean cloth and coat with
grease AMC-3.
4.3 In case spots occur on the part surface to show the
signs of corrosion of a cadmium-or zinc-plated

020.10.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
coating, do not treat the defective surface with
emery paper, wipe it, first, with a clean cloth
moistened with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80, then with a
piece of cloth impregnated with grease AMC-3 and
finally wipe with a clean dry cloth.
4.4 On detection of corrosion on the chromium-plated
surface, proceed as follows:
wipe the defective surface with a cloth moistened
with dehydrated kerosene;
remove the products of corrosion with a bristle
brush;
wipe the dressed areas with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80
doped with additive СИГБОЛ;
wipe dry the treated area with a clean cloth; apply
a thin coat of grease AMC-3 to the treated surface.
4.5 To prevent corrosion on the chromium-plated parts
operating at ambient air temperature, regularly coat
them with a thin layer of grease AMC-3.
4.6 In winter (if the operations are not performed in a
heated room), remove the products of corrosion and
degrease the defective surface, then coat it with a
layer of grease AMC-3. As a warm weather settles
down, remove the grease with a cloth moistened with
gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80 and treat the corroded surface
as described under Para 4.1.
5 UPKEEPING PAINT-AND-VARNISH COATINGS OF EXTERNAL
SURFACES COATED WITH EPOXY ENAMELS IN COURSE OF OPERATION
5.1 Regularly, every two months in the spring-summer and
autumn periods, treat the helicopter surface with
polishing water ВАЗ-3.
5.2 Treat the surface with polishing water in a dry
weather pouring it over a dry surface at the
temperature in the range of 5 to 35 °C.

020.10.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: IT IS PROHIBITED TO TREAT THE PAINT-AND-

VARNISH SURFACES WITH POLISHING WATER IF
CONDENSED MOISTURE, SOOT, DUST OR SAND IS
PRESENT IN THE AIR AND OK THE ITEM
SURFACE. DO NOT TREAT THE SURFACE WITH
POLISHING WATER ВАЗ-3 UNDER LIGHT FROSTS
AND IN WINTER.

5.3 Treat the surface with polishing water using the

following procedure:
clean the surface of grease and soot with dry rags,
then with clean cloth moistened with gasoline ГОСТ
443-76 with antistatic additive СИГБОЛ or kerosene
T-l;
wash the surface with a 3-per cent potass or
neutral soap with the help of clean cloth or
brushes and then wash with clean water,
allow the surface to dry at the temperature in the
range of 5 to 35 °C during 2 to 3 h;
use a wad made of wool and gauze or cotton fabric
and apply a uniform thin layer of polishing water
to the painted surface after stirring it well.
NOTE: If polishing water turns thick, dilute it
with water and thoroughly stirrup;
use a wad to spread polishing water evenly over the
surface by circular movements to obtain a lustrous
surface;
IT IS PROHIBITED to leave traces of polishing water
on the surface;
make an entry on the operation on treatment of the
surface with polishing water in the Log Book.
NOTE: In regions with lack of water, the operation
of washing with water is replaced with wiping

020.10.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
with cotton cloth moistened with gasoline
ГОСТ 443-76 or kerosene T-l.

6 RECONDITIONING OF PAINT-AND-VARNISH COATING

In case of deterioration of the external coat of enamel
(without . deterioration of the coat of primer):
slightly dress the defective surface with emery cloth
No. 4, 5,' 6 after that, wipe with a cloth moistened
with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80, then with a clean dry
cloth;
apply two coats of enamel ЭП-140 of the matching
colour to the defective surface with the help of a
brush or a sprayer.
6.1 Procedure for Preparation and Application of Paint-
and-Varnish Coating
6.1.1 Carry out all the repair operations on the
reconditioning of the paint-and-varnish coating at
an ambient air temperature of not below 12 °C and
relative humidity of not higher than 75 %.
6.1.2 Prepare the paint-and-varnish materials for
operation as follows:
before opening the can or jar with the paint-and-
varnish staff, clean their necks of dirt and
dustj
after opening the can, thoroughly stir the paint-
and-varnish material with a wooden agitator to
obtain an evenly distributed settled pigment;
check the viscosity of the paint-and-varnish
stuff against viscosimeter 33-4
at a temperature of 20 °C and maintain it within
the limits specified in Table 1
using a corresponding solvent or diluter.
6.1.3 Prepare the paint-and-varnish stuff as follows:

020.10.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
prepare primer ВЛ-02 right before application. It
is a two-component mixture consisting of the base
material and acid thinner which are delivered in
a set. For obtaining a ready-for-use primer, mix
the base with the acid thinner in ratio of 4:1
(by mass). The application life of the thinned
primer is 8 hours. Prepare the primer in a glass
or porcelain jar. Obtain the operating viscosity
by using thinner No. 648 or P-6. Before
application, stir and filter the primer through
screen No. 015 or a six-fold gauze;
use primer AK-070 for steel, aluminium and
magnesium alloys. If necessary, dilute the primer
to the operating viscosity by thinner P-5 or No.
648 as specified in Table 1. Before application,
filter the primer through screen No. 015 or a
sixfold gauze;
prepare enamel ЭП-140 of different colours by
mixing semi-finished product ЭП-140 and hardener
No. 2 right before application. To this end, take
75 weight parts of the semi-finished product, 25
weight parts of hardener No. 2. Obtain the
desired viscosity of enamel ЭП-140 by using
thinner P-5A or P-5 as specified in Table 1 or by
using the mixture of acetone, ethylcellosolve and
xylene in the ratio of 30:30:40.
Before application, wait for 30 rain from the
moment of preparation. The application life of
prepared enamel ЭП-140 of different colours is up
to three days, for the silvery enamel - 24 hours;
in choosing the paint-and-varnish materials,
their methods of application and drying, refer to
Table 1. The materials used in upkeeing of paint-
and-varnish coating are given in Table 2;

020.10.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
check the quality of paint coating in the course of
separate operations and after the whole cycle of
repair operations. The coat should be even, without
streaks.
Table 1
List of Paint-and-Varnish Materials, Thinners
Viscosity against
Drying condition
Description of viscosimeter B3-4
Thinner Used for
paint-and-varnish tempera
(solvent) for alloys.
material for brush ture, time, h
sprayer
°C

1 Enamel P-5A, P- 12 to 30 to 12 to 8 or 9 For all

ЭП-140 5 ГОСТ 18 50 35 for alloys
ГОСТ 7827-74 first
24709-31 layer,
(of 16 to
different 24 for
colours) second
layer
2 Primer P-5, 12 to 15 to 12 to 1.5 to For all
AK-069, No. 648 16 20 35 2 alloys
AK-070
ГОСТ
25718-83
3 Primer P-6 ТУ 12 to 15 to 12 to 1.5 to For
ВЛ-02 10-1429- 18 20 35 2 steel
ГОСТ 79 No. and
12707-77 648 aluminiu
m alloys

020.10.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2
Materials Used for Upkeeping Paint-and-Varnish
Coatings
State Standard
Description of material Application
(ГОСТ)

1 Petroleum solvent ГОСТ For degreasing and

НЕФРАС-С 50/170 8505-80 wiping
2 Gasoline НЕФРАС-С ГОСТ 443-76 For degreasing and
3-80/120 wiping
3 Kerosene T-l ГОСТ For degreasing and
10227-36 wiping
4 Grease AMC-3 ГОСТ 2712- For preventing
75 corrosion of
protection points,
etc.
5 Commercial potass РСТ РСФСР- For preparing washing
soap 390-78 agent, for washing
helicopter external
surface
6 Polishing water ТУ 6-10- For treating painted
ВАЗ-3 1534-76 surface
7 Antistatic additive ТУ 38- For adding in
СИГБОЛ 101741-78 petroleum solvent
НЕФРАС for degreasing
in amount of 0.002 to
0.003 %

020.10.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MAINTENANCE OF “AKZO NOBEL” POLYURETHANE TYPE PAINT

COATING

1 GENERAL
External surface of helicopter can be painted using
polyurethane type materials in the following sequence:
EP-0215 (ЭП-0215)hot drying primer;
Aerodur CF Primer 37047;
Aerodur HF A 132 or Aerodur Finish C 21/100 UVR
enamel.
ATTENTION 1 IN OPERATION ALWAYS CHECK PAINT COATING OF
THE PARTS FOR CONDITION. IN CASE OF
DAMAGED PAINT COATING URGENTLY RESTORE IT.
2 PRIOR TO RESTORING PAINT COATING, BE SURE
THAT THE PART IS FREE OF CORROSION.
RESTORE PAINT COATING ONLY AFTER REMOVAL
OF CORROSION FROM THE PART
3 ALUMINIUM ALLOY PARTS WITH ANODIC AND
SULPHURIC ACID COATING THAT TAKE OUT THE
EXTERNAL SURFACE OF HELICOPTER SHOULD BE
COATED WITH A LAYER OF EP-0215 (ЭП-0215)
HOT DRYING PRIMER.

2 MAINTENANCE OF EXTERNAL SURFACES COATED BY “AKZO NOBEL”

POLYURETHANE TYPE PAINT MATERIALS DURING OPERATION
2.1 Clean the surface of helicopter from lubricating oil
and smoke-black with warm 3% solution of industrial
potash soap using dry rags, clear clothes or brushes.
Rinse with warm clear water and wipe the surface dry
with clear clothes (moisten cloth with Nefrace
gasoline with addition of “Sigball” antistatic
additive and wring).
Dry during 2 … 3 hours.

020.10.01
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 REPAIR OF PAINT COATING
3.1 Prepare surface for repair:
wash points to be repaired by clothes moistened with
warm 3% solution of industrial potash soap;
dry during at least 2 hours;
wipe helicopter surface to be repaired by clothes
moistened with Nefrace gasoline with addition of
“Sigbol” antistatic additive;
cover surfaces beyond the paint with telephone-cable
paper or polyethylene film, attach with scotch;
in order to surface clean off the edges of damaged
area of paint coating using “Effect” sponge or
abrasive cloth (No. 3-6 grit). Wipe surface using
clothes with adhered layer;
clean off the old EP-0215 (ЭП-0215)paint coating
using “Effect” sponge or abrasive cloth (No. 3-5
grit) until the surface becomes uniform and mat.
Wipe surface using clothes with adhered layer;
remove contaminations (the rest of glue, sealing
compound and other) by clothes moistened with
Nefrace gasoline with addition of “Sigboll”
antistatic additive and wrung;
dry at least 1 hour.
3.2 In order to avoid appearance of burrs and Nefrace
drops on the primer and enamel coatings remove them
urgently with clear cloth.
3.3 Apply “AKZO” Aerodur CF Primer 37047 on the surface
of paint coating to be restored. Dry at least 2 hours
with S66/14 hardener or 4 hours with S66/22R
hardener.

020.10.01
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.4 Remove surface defects from primer coating (burrs,
roughness) using “Effect” sponge, wipe surface using
cloth with adhered layer.
3.5 After complete dry of the primer finish the coating.
3.6 When applying mat polyurethane enamel proceed as
following:
apply a layer of Aerodur HF A 132 mat enamel (of
main color of area) on the repairing area of the
helicopter. Dry during 1 hour;
in compliance with the color scheme approved by
Customer apply a cross-lapped layer of Aerodur HF A
132 enamel (of camouflage color) on the repairing
areas of the skin and dry during 6 to 8 hours at
temperature of 15 to 35°C;
when using Aerodur Finish C 21/100 UVR gloss
polyurethane enamel, apply paint on the Aerodur ur
CF Primer 37047 in compliance with the color scheme
approved by Customer;
apply two layers of Aerodur Finish C 21/100 UVR
enamel on the painted points. Dry the first layer
during 1 to 2 hours, the second – during 9 hours at
temperature of 15 to 35°C;
in order to avoid appearance of haloing around the
painty area painted by means of spray gun cover
surfaces located around the repairing area along the
skin boundary or riveted joints with telephone-cable
paper in the form of geometric figure;
when repairing small damage it is recommended clean
the surface and follow in compliance with required
scheme of coat applying using brush.
3.7 Perform all repair works related to restoring of the
paint coating at ambient air temperature not below
12°C and relative humidity not above 75%.

020.10.01
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Check quality of painting during performance of
separate operations and upon completion of the whole
cycle of repair works. The coat should be even,
without sags.
3.8 Preparation of paint materials for operation
Prepare paint materials for operation only when their
temperature is not less than +15°C in the following
sequence:
prior to opening the paint material container clean
well the filler necks from dirt and dust;
after container opening break well the paint
materials by wooden paddle in the clear dry
container using hardener in the under mentioned
ratio as far as the mass becomes indiscrete. Weaken
received mixture with thinner till working viscosity
recommended by Manufacturer, break well.
ATTENTION Prepare “AKZO” paint materials ON VOLUME
BASIS.
When blending use graduated bottles.
Hold-up time of the finished product is 15
to 30 min before use.
Aerodur CF Primer 37047
base – 2 volume portion;
S66/22R or S66/14 hardener – 1 volume portion;
C25/90S thinner till working viscosity (12-14) as
read on B3-246 flow meter, Ø4mm nozzle.
Life of finished primers at temperature of 18 to 22°C
with S66/14 hardener is 6 hours, with S66/22R
hardener – 8 hours.
Aerodur Finish C 21/100 UVR
base – 1 volume portion;

020.10.01
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
S66/22R hardener – 1 volume portion;
C25/90S thinner till working viscosity (12-14) as
read on B3-246 flow meter, Ø4mm nozzle.
Life of finished enamels is 8 hours at temperature of
18 to 22°C and 3 to 4 hours at temperature of 35°C.
HF A32 enamel
base – 1 volume portion;
S66/22R hardener – 1 volume portion;
C25/90S thinner till working viscosity (12-14) as
read on B3-246 flow meter, Ø4mm nozzle.
Life of finished enamels is 6 hours at temperature of
18 to 22°C.
When preparing paint mixture do not use black sheet
iron or steel container
Filter finished products through the net No014 or 4
to 6 cheesecloth stratums.
Used materials are given in the Table 1.

020.10.01
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 1

Наименование материала ТУ или ГОСТ

ЭП-0215 Primer ТУ 2313-040-21743165-2004
Грунт Аerodur CF Primer ТУ 1-595-15-811-2004
37047
Аerodur HFA 132 Enamel ТУ 1-595-15-808-2003
Aerodur Finish C 21/100 UVR ТУ 1-595-15-807-2003
Enamel
С 25/90 S Thinner ТУ 1-595-15-814-2004
S 66/22R, S 66/14 Hardener ТУ 1-595-15-812-2004
С 2-80/120, С 3-80/120 ТУ 38.401-67-108-92
Nefrace gasoline
Metal filtering net 014 ГОСТ 6613-86
Cotton cheesecloth ГОСТ 9412-93;
ГОСТ 11109-90
Cotton cloth ГОСТ 11680-76
Waterproof abrasive cloth, ГОСТ 10054-82; ГОСТ
No 4, 5, 6 grit 13344-79; ГОСТ 5009-82
«Effect» sponge 007453 ТУ 2-018-016-80
Industrial potash soap РСТ РСФСР 390-78
Telephone-cable paper ГОСТ 3553-87
“Sigbol” antistatic additive ТУ 38-101741-78
«СД» (сп) Special remover ТУ 6-10-1088-76
Cloth with adhered layer По проспекту фирмы AKZO
Adhesive tape 25mm 3 m По проспекту фирмы AKZO
Tape для выклейки 15mm По проспекту фирмы AKZO

020.10.01
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

UPKEEPING OF ORGANIC GLASS PARTS

1 PROTECTION OF PARTS OF ORGANIC GLASS

1.1 Protect parts made of organic glass (windows) against
mechanical damage, adverse effect of organic solvents
(dichloromethane, ethyl acetate, benzene, acetone,
and the like), their fumes, as well as against the
substances containing these solvents in the form of
sets (remover, paint, etc.), since they cause the
appearance of cracks, "silvering" and degrade the
strength properties of the windows.
1.2 At parking and in the course of operations, protect
the windows against the effect of moisture and solar
radiation. To this end, cover them with slip covers.
.Regularly clean the slip covers of contamination and
allow them to dry.
1.3 Before carrying out painting operations or reworking
in the compartment, protect the windows from inside
and outside with a fabric protector with non-drying
glue on the base of polyisobutylene.
If a fabric protector is not available, protect the
windows with the protectors on the base of gelatine-
glycerol glue or vinyl alcohol using the following
procedure:
apply the glue in an even thin layer to the window
surface with a soft hair brush;
impose paper (wrapping paper ГОСТ 8273-57, cable
paper ГОСТ 645-67, insulating paper ГОСТ 1931-64) on
a freshly applied layer of glue after cutting it to
suit the shape of the window;
smooth the paper with the hand over the whole
surface, glue the defective areas on the paper with
the paper patches;

020.20.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
keep the window protected with the protector at the
temperature in the range of 18 to 35 °C during one
hour, after that, proceed to the operations in the
vicinity of the windows.
1.4 Remove the protective coating from the window Ъу hand
without tools after the operations or drying the
paint-and-varnish coatings are over. Remove the glue
stuck to the window surface with the help of a soft
wad moistened with hot water (of no higher than
40 °C).
1.5 If the said materials are not available for
preparation of protective coatings or owing to little
time needed for the operations (of up to 10 h), it is
allowed to protect the windows with paper glued over
the perimeter with commercial petrolatum which is
applied to parts in separate dots.
1.6 In painting the structural members with a brush, the
protection of windows with paper secured over the
entire perimeter with an adhesive tape is tolerated.
2 ELIMINATION OF WINDOW DEFECTS BY GRINDING AND POLISHING
2.1 Eliminate window defects by machining of the surface
on a quick-detachable parts after their removal. In
separate cases, if it is impossible to remove the
window, it is allowed to perform these operations on
the helicopter.
2.2 Perform the grinding manually using a wad of soft
cotton cloth with use of abrasive dust,
grit 10, 6, 4, successively passing from coarse to
fine grit. If the defect depth is more than 0.2 mm,
to minimize the grinding time, dress the surface in
the close vicinity of the defect with a scraper with
a subsequent grinding.
2.3 To avoid optical distortions, the radius of the
ground surface should exceed the depth of the defect

020.20.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
by no less than 500 times. In this case, the depth of
grinding should gradually go smaller from the center
of the defect to the edges of the ground surface. In
the course of the whole operation, add water into the
ground area to avoid a possible temperature rise of
the surface layer of the window. Water will
continuously remove crashed glass and abrasive powder
from the surface, therefore, in the course of
grinding, regularly add powder.
2.4 After grinding, wash the glass with clean warm water
until abrasive particles are fully removed from the
surface.

NOTE To eliminate defects from the organic glass

surface, IT IS PROHIBITED to use emery cloth
building up stresses on the windows in the
course of grinding.

2.5 After grinding, polish the window.

3 POLISHING ORGANIC GLASS FOR RESTORATION OF THEIR
OPTICAL PROPERTIES
3.1 The optical properties of organic glass are restored
by polishing the glass surface with the purpose of
removing hair scratches and outer glass microlayer
aged owing to operation; in this case, the physico-
mechanical characteristics of the material are
restored as well.
3.2 For polishing the windows, use polishing paste for
organic glass. The employment of other pastes for
polishing the windows IS PROHIBITED.
3.3 Perform the operations on the restoration of the
optical properties of the glass at the temperature in
the range of 5 to 35 °С in the open or in a room
protected against solvents or their fumes.
3.4 In polishing the glass manually:

020.20.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
wash the glass with a soft cotton cloth moistened,
first, with soapy (3 to 5-per cent solution of
neutral soap) and then with clean water. The cloth
in use should be clean, without hard inclusions. In
washing, regularly rinse the cloth in water;
wipe the glass dry with a soft baize. For wiping, do
not use wool which poorly impregnates water or wool
cloth fostering electrization of the surface and
attraction of dust particles?
before polishing the glass surface with a soft wad,
take a small amount of polishing paste 'before
thoroughly shaking it up and then rub it with light
pressing making circular movements. Treat the
surfaces by separate sections. Rub the paste during
10 to 15 min on each section, in so doing, add the
paste as required;
for elimination of the subsequent adverse effect of
the polishing paste on the organic glass and for
removal of fat dull film after polishing, thoroughly
wipe the glass with a baize cloth to remove the
remaining polishing paste. After that, wash the
glass with a soft cotton cloth moistened, first in a
soapy and then, in clean water.
After washing, wipe the glass with a dry soft cotton
cloth.

020.20.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MAINTENANCE OF POLYMER COMPOSITE PARTS

1 GENERAL
The helicopter is equipped with some polymer composite
parts and assemblies (see table 1).
Polymer composite parts are made of Т-10 fiberglass
layers stuck together with ЭД-20/ED-20 adhesive.
List of polymer composite parts and assemblies used on
the helicopter are specified in table 1.
Table 1
Coating Location
№ Description Designation (paint on
coating) helicopter
1 Emergency 171М.0300.800 СБ ЭП-140/EP- LH side -
exits (round, small), 140 blue- 1 exit,
(windows) 8АМТ.0385.3100 grey enamel RH side –
СБ (square, № 320, 2 exits
extended) outside.
171М.0385.2000
СБ (round,
extended)
2 Emergency 8АП.0740.3000СБ ЭП-140/EP- Rear door
exit in the (till 25 set), 140 blue-
rear door 8АП.0740.1500СБ grey enamel
(effective since № 320,
26 set) outside.
3 Rear door 8АП.0740.1000СБ ЭП-140/EP-
(effective since 140 blue-
26 set) grey enamel
№ 320,
outside

020.21.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 1 (continued)
Coating Location
№ Description Designation (paint on
coating) helicopter
4 Sliding 171М.0338.0000.С ЭП-140/EP- LH side
door Б (with round 140 blue-
window) grey enamel
171М.0338.2000.С № 320,
Б (with square outside
window)
171М.0338.1000 ЭП-140/EP- RH side
СБ (with round 140 blue-
window) grey enamel
171М.0338.1200 № 320,
СБ (with square outside
window)
5 Frames 8АП-0300-460 ЭП-140/EP- LH side,
around door 8АП-0300-450 140 blue- RH side
(exit) 8АП-0300-790 grey enamel
opening № 320,
outside.
8АП-0300-460
and 8АП-
0300-450 are
not painted.
6 Link casing 8АМТ.0345.0310 ЭП-140/EP- Frame.5Н/N
side 140 blue- RH side
grey enamel
№ 320,
outside.
8АМТ.0345.0370 Frame.5Н/N
LH side

020.21.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 1 (continued)

Coating Location
on
№ Description Designation (paint helicopte
coating) r
7 Link casing 8АМТ.0345.1050 ЭП-140/EP- Frame.5Н/N
cover 8АМТ.0345.1030 140 blue- RH and LH
grey enamel sides
№ 320,
outside.
8 Cover 8АМТ-0208-015 ЭП-140/EP- Frame.5Н/N
140 blue- Nose
grey enamel section of
№ 320, fuselage,
outside. RH and LH
sides
9 Fairing ВДБ.6130.020 ЭП-140/EP- External
(emergency 140 light- fuel tank
floatation grey enamel
system) № 457,
outside.
2 REPAIR OF POLYMER COMPOSITE PARTS
All bulges of (40-60) mm size and edge-laminated parts
are required for repair. Lamination must not exceed 50
mm length and be only one for 1 running meter of the
edge. There must be no trace impurities on the
repairable points.
Edge-laminated points, pits, crimps must be cleaned by
file and abrasive paper from excess adhesive (overlaps,
corrugations) that could accumulated between fiberglass
layers while compacting. Bulge points must be cut out
by knife. Perform repair in accordance with procedures
for the pits rework.

020.21.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Remove traces of peeling using brush or compressed air.
Prepared defect area must be degreased by the cotton
cloth moistened in nephras and squeezed dry. Wait for
15-20 min.
The second time defect area must be degreased by the
cotton cloth moistened in acetone and squeezed dry.
Wait for 15-20 min.
Laminations must be glued by ВК-9/VK-9 or К-153 glues.
Glue preparation and glueing modes of lamination point
must be according to the production documentation for
used glues (instruction of ВИАМ / all-union aviation
material institute ПИ 1.2.178 и ПИ 1.2а.526). Apply
glue on defect areas. Put cellophane or fluoroplastic
film over repaired areas and hold with the help of
clamp. Using VK-9/ ВК-9 glue keep the parts during 24
hours under the temperature of (15-25)о C or during 1
hour under the temperature of (60-70)о С. And using K-
153 glue keep the parts during 24 hours under the
temperature of (15-25)о C, and then during 6 hours
under the temperature of (60-70)о С.
Rework of the pits, the part end working must be
performed by ВПЗ-7М/VP3-7M polymeric filling material.
The filling material preparation and using must be
according to ТР 1.2924-87.
Use the sand cloth or abrasive disk to finish repaired
surfaces flush with the part profile.
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Only persons not younger than 18 years, qualified for
the respective kind of activity, after medical
inspection and safety briefing can be allowed to work
with the adhesive materials.
Activate general, plenum-exhaust ventilations and local
suction to shape and cutout the fiberglass, to prepare

020.21.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
adhesive and to impregnate the fiberglass with the
adhesive.
The workers must be provided with robe, armlets, rubber
and cotton gloves, masks of “ШБ-1/ShB-1, ФПП-15/FPP-15
valveless dust mask” type.
Adhesive must be in close lid vessel and under
ventilation. Use acetone at first, then hot water with
sodium carbonate to wash brushers and vessels right
after the works.
If the adhesive or it`s components getting on skin
remove the adhesive by sponge moistened in acetone, and
then wash by water with soap.
Air contamination control of working zone must be
performed according to 12.1.005 State Standard and
12.1.007 State Standard.
It is strictly forbidden to keep and take the
foodstuff, smoke in the working zone.
Processing area must be equipped with fire
extinguishers and sand box.
Keep clean the processing area. Sweep up at the end of
each working shift.

020.21.00
Page 5/6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

POLYMER COMPOSITE PARTS – TROUBLE SHOOTING

Table 101

Possible
Trouble Corrective actions
cause
Scuffing, Damaged Rub down damage with
damaged paint-and – abrasive paper №5-8, restore
protective varnish paint-and –varnish coating.
coating coating
Streaks, If depth of streaks,
scratchers, scratchers, nicks is less
nicks than 0,2 mm rub them down
with abrasive paper to blend
it smoothly into surrounding
surfaces, putty 2 or 3 layers
of EP/ЭП-0026, EP/ЭП-0080.
Restore paint-and –varnish
coating according to the item
color scheme. If depth of
streaks, scratchers, nicks is
more than 0,2 mm chip damage
out, degrease and fill with
ЭД-20/ED-20 adhesive. Rub
down, apply 2 or 3 layers of
ЭП/EP-0026, ЭП/EP-0080 putty.
Restore paint-and –varnish
coating according to the item
color scheme.
Dents If dent is less than 50% of
the side thickness – rub
down, degrease, fill the dent
with some layers of
fiberglass, putty with ЭП/EP-
0026, ЭП/EP-0080. Restore
paint-and – varnish coating
according to the item color
scheme.

020.21.00
Page 101
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Continued table 101

Trouble Possible cause Corrective actions
Puncture holes, In there are no more
cracks than 3 cracks (the
length of each is no
more than 60mm)
arranged not less than
50 mm from each other
along the item edges,
repair them to apply
patches made of some
layers of fiberglass.
Prepare plugs made of
some layers of
fiberglass,
impregnating them with
ВК-9 /VK-9 glue.
Rubbers Replace the article if
separation, there are more than 5
tears, damages (tears,
cracking, chipping –off,
chipping-off cracking). Glue
separated sections of
the articles by
88НП/88NP glue.
Starved spot Drill the hole in the
between skin middle section of
and foamed damaged skin (foamed
plastic plastic). Fill the
damage zone with ВП-3-
7М/VP-3-7M polymeric
filler. Putty the
holes. Keep under load
during 24 hours. Smooth
repaired area out.

020.21.00
Page 102
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Continued table 101

Trouble Possible cause Corrective actions
Lamination Cut air bubble by
between skin knife. Smooth out the
layers (air cut seams. Putty
bubbles) damaged area. Keep
during 24 hours. Smooth
repaired area out.
Contour А) Apply adhesive on
lamination of the damaged area. Keep
the skin layers during 24 hours. Smooth
repaired area out.
B) Fill damaged area by
adhesive. Put the film
over and secure with
clamps. Keep during 24
hours. Smooth repaired
area out.
Skin thinning Cut corrugation by
out, pneumatic drill. Shape
corrugation the fiberglass. Place
prepreg on thinning-out
(corrugation) area.
Keep during 24 hours.
Note: After defect
elimination it
is allowed small
damaged areas on
the defect zone
places.
Dimension of
such defect
zones must not
exceed the data
given in table
102.

020.21.00
Page 103
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONDITION INSPECTION AND REPAIR

Table 102
Quantity of
defects and
Defect Defect
Material distance Conclusion
type dimension
(L) between
them
Glass- Starved No more No more Consider
fiber spot than 8cm2 than serviceable
plastic between Length is 10 pcs. without
and skin and no more L=100mm repair
foamed foamed than 100mm.
plastic plastic
Glass- Laminati No более 5 No more Consider
fiber on cm2 Length than serviceable
plastic between is no more 10 pcs. without
layers than 50 mm L=100mm repair
No более 10 No more Repair
cm2 Length than
is no more 3 pcs.
than 100 mm L=200mm
Laminati а) no more Repair
ons than 2mm,
around Length is
contour no more
than 20 mm
b) no more Repair
than 10 mm
Length is
no more
than 50 mm
Skin Repair Skin
thinning thinning out
out (corrugati-
(corru- on)
gation)

020.21.00
Page 104
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Note: After defect elimination it is allowed small

damaged areas on the defect zone places.
Dimension of such defect zones must not exceed
the data given in table 100 2
Check the starved spot by visual inspection and rapping.

020.21.00
Page 105/106
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RESTORATION OF FUSELAGE SEALING

1 Laid in the basis of fuselage sealing are the

interseam, surface and combined method of sealing:
in the interseam method, the sealing compound is
applied to one of the contact surfaces before the
assembly, in this case, the application can be applied
either as a layer or as a cord;
in the surface method, the sealing compound is applied
after the assembly over the riveted joints and over the
skin joints thinned either to a spatula-or a brush-
applied viscosity;
the combined method provides the both said methods and
is true for all the sealing zones of the helicopter
fuselage.
2 As the sealing of the riveted and bolted joints turns
damaged, restore the sealing at the points of
attachment of brackets, at the points of installation
of repair cover plates, as well as at the points of
attachment of windows using sealing compound ВИТЭФ-1.
3 In the course of operations on restoration of sealing,
meet the following requirements:
carry out all the sealing operations at the
temperature in the range of 15 to 35 °C and relative
humidity in the range of 30 to 70 %;
prior to sealing, degrease the application points
with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80 and acetone and keep in
the air during 10 to 15 min. The area subject to
degreasing should by larger than the area subject to
sealing by approximately 40 %;
remove the sealing compound squeezed to the external
side of the skin with a cloth moistened with gasoline
and wrung out. Remove the surplus of sealing compound

020.30.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
from the inner side of the skin if it is in an
explicit form|
at the final riveting, the presence of the surplus of
sealing compound squeezed from under the riveted
joint is a must;
smooth out the squeezed out sealing compound along
the edges of the joint so that is takes a shape of a
continuous cord over the whole joint of glued parts}
for smoothing the squeezed sealing compound, use a
spatula moistened with soapy water and dried at the
temperature in the range of 15 to 35 °C during 30 to
60 min;
riveting of the repaired section should bе finished
before the application time of the sealing compound
is expired;
before installing a rivet in the hole, use an awl to
make holes of matching diameter. Remove the sealing
compound squeezed out of the hole with a cloth
moistened with acetone;
use much the same procedure to remove the sealing
compound from the snap rivet heads after they occupy
the holes;
in the course of degreasing and sealing, do not spoil
the protective coatings of the sections adjacent to
the repaired section, in this case, strictly observe
the safety precautions;
all the parts subject to sealing should be primed on
the inner side;
protect the sealed off sections with special board's
to the end of curing of the sealing compound to
protect it against damage, dust and other
contaminants. Perform all the subsequent operations

020.30.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
on the repaired sections only on a lapse of three
days after the operations on sealing were performed.
4 In the interseam method the application of the spatula
sealing compound should be performed over the whole
mating surface of the part whereas in riveting the
skin, over the whole width of the riveted joint. The
thickness of layer of the sealing compound should be in
the range of 0.4 to 0.8 mm. Besides the spatula-applied
sealing compound is applied as a cord to the border and
joint seams, over the edges of the sealed parts, over
the heads of bolts (of more than 12 mm in dia.) over
the edges of the flanged joints, at the clearances (of
no larger than 1 mm) between the parts. The application
of sealing compound is performed by a spatula or a
special grease gun.
The sealing compound should tightly fit over the metal
surface, fully fill the corners and clearances and
overlap the seam edges by 5 to 7 mm with thickening at
sharp corners. Smoothen the applied cord of sealing
compound over the entire length to make a transition to
the base surface. In application of sealing compound,
neither blisters, holes, nicks or bulges, as well as
dust or other contaminants are not tolerated en the
sealing compound.
Apply the brush-consistency sealing compound to the
surface not earlier than on a lapse of 30 to 60 min
after application of the spatula-applied sealing
compound. The application of the brush-consistency
sealing compound is performed to the heads of rivets
and bolts, to the nuts and to the earlier spatula-
applied sealing compound to the joints of parts,
corners and clearances. While applying the sealing
compound allowed to overlap is the sealed section of 7
to 10 mm.

020.30.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The sealing compound is applied by a brush in two or
three layers. After applying a layer, keep it at the
temperature in the range of 15 to 35 °C for sealing
compound ВИТЭФ-1: the first layer for no less than 4 h;
the second layer for at least 12 h and the third, for
24 h.
At the points of joining and undercuttings the
thickness of applied layer should provide the filling
of clearances with the surplus of sealing compound
coming outside. The applied layers of sealing compound
should be blind and continuous.
5 Upon detection of a defect on a spatula-applied sealing
compound (such as air holes, mechanical damage, etc.),
cut off the sealing compound at the point of defect,
degrease it twice and allow it to dry during 20 min.
Then, apply the sealing compound and wait as long as
two service lives of the sealing compound, then apply
two or three layers of brush-applied sealing compound.
6 On the detection of a defect on a brush-applied sealing
compound, clean the defective section of dirt, remove
the defective layer of sealing compound, degrease the
section and allow it to dry during 20 min. Then, coat
the defective section with two or three layers of
brush-applied sealing compound.
7 During the replacement of a defective rivet in the
sealed off seam, degrease the hole and a newly
installed rivet. Install the new rivet on the sealing
compound. In case of replacement of the row of rivets,
perform riveting of newly installed rivets by one at a
pitch of no less than two or three rivets. After
riveting and a subsequent degreasing, coat the rivet
heads with brush-applied sealing compound.
8 In replacement of defective bolts on the sealed off
sections, degrease the holes and newly installed bolts.

020.30.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
In the course of installation of new bolts, apply
sealing compound to the smooth parts and under the
heads of the bolts. Also apply the sealing compound
under common washers if the bolt nuts are arranged
outside the sealed compartments. If the nuts are used
in the sealed compartments, place special washers under
them on the sealing compound. After installing bolts
and a subsequent degreasing, coat the heads of bolts
and nuts with brush-applied sealing compound.

020.30.00
Page 5/6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MAKING AND REPAIR OF SLIP COVERS MADE OP PVC OR

POLYETHYLENE FILM

1 Solder the seams of slip covers of packing polyethylene

stabilized or non-stabilized and PVC film by a portable
thermo-pulse apparatus or a bench-mounted appliance
which is essentially a heater with the use of an
electric iron.
2 Heat the film on the section of contact with the heater
to the fusion temperature and solder it up.
3 The thermo-pulse apparatus is equipped with a rod or
soldering tongs with heaters. The rod heater is
essentially a strip made of Ni-Cr alloy or stainless
steel.
4 The rod is used for a longitudinal soldering of the
film with a one-side heating, while the tongs are used
for soldering with single- and double-side heating and
application of patches.
5 For avoid sticking of the soldered material to the
heaters provision is made for a lining - an insulating
film of fluoroplastic, 0.1 mm thick.
6 Carry out soldering by the thermo-pulse apparatus as
follows:
clean the soldered surfaces of dirt with a cloth
moistened with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80, allow them to
dry in the air and place on the working table covered
with rubber, 1 to 3 mm thick}
set the soldering time on the time relay;
install the rod at the point of film soldering,
tightly press it to the table and push the button to
apply electric pulse to the rod;
after soldering, wait for 2 to 5 s, after that,
remove the rod and check the quality of the seam.
Holes, poor penetration, bulges, foreign objects and

020.40.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
burns are not tolerated in the seam. As the film is
stretched by hands apart perpendicular to seam, the
seam will not break.
NOTE: In the check, do not stretch the seam along
the soldering direction or fold it. Control
the soldering condition by the duration of the
pulse.
7 Perform soldering by the bench-mounted appliance with
the help of an iron on a smooth surface covered with
felt or woolen cloth and several layers of paper such
as parchment.
For soldering, use the following procedure:
wipe the soldering points with a cloth moistened with
gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80, place the film on the working
table. Evenly move the iron over the seam at a rate
of 15 to 30 mm/s to perform soldering;
in soldering, place a strip, 5 to 6 mm wide, of
cellophane, calc or paper (parchment or capacitor
paper) under the iron;
check the quality of the seam visually judging by the
colour of the paper lining. After soldering, the
colour of the lining should be darker than the colour
of the film;
after soldering, tear away the pieces of paper or
cellophane lining detached from the seam.
8 The temperature of the slide of the soldering device
for soldering the PVC film should bе in the range of
220 to 300 °C and in soldering the polyethylene film,
in the range of 150 to 250 °C.
9 Solder longitudinal tears in the slip cover in the form
of even cut by а thermo-pulse apparatus with the help
of the tongs with linear heaters. Use either one-side
or two-side heaters in the tongs. Wipe the edges of

020.40.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
holes in the slip cover with a cloth moistened with
gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80, secure them in the tongs heaters
and solder up.
NOTE: In making patches on the slip cover, try the
soldering condition using pilot specimen.
10 Glue patches to the slip covers of the PVC film using
glue made of PVC resin as follows:
cut a patch so that it overlaps the defective area bу
15 to 20 mm all over;
wipe the patch and the defective cover point with a
cloth moistened with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80 and brush-
apply the glue to the patch and to the defective
area;
wait for 1 to 1.5 min and impose the patch,
thoroughly smoothen it down with hand proceeding from
the center to edges.
11 For preparing the glue, take dry PVC resin (15 %) and
solve it in dichloromethane or acetone (85 %) gradually
introducing and mixing it to obtain a homogeneous
solution.
12 For application of patches on the slip covers of
polyethylene film, use a PVC adhesive tape. For this
purpose, first wipe the damaged area with a cloth
moistened with gasoline ГОСТ 8505-80, apply the patch
and thoroughly press it bу hand avoiding wrinkles and
blisters.
NOTE: The strength of this gluing is rather low,
therefore, in examination of items in the
course of storage, pay attention to the
condition of patches. In case of separation or
blisters running from the patch edge to the
hole in the slip cover, make a new patch.

020.40.00
Page 3/4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

UPKEEPING OF SILICA GEL DEHYDRATOR

1 RESTORATION OF SILICA GEL PROPERTIES

1.1 Humidified silica gel (dehydrator or indicator)
removed from the item can be used again for
preservation only after drying it. Using greasy
silica gel is not allowed.
NOTE: It is recommended to dry the silica gel having
the humidity of higher than 2 % in a drying
cabinet.

1.2 Screw the silica gel on the aluminium or steel trays

in a layer some up to 3 cm and regularly agitate it
in the course of drying.
1.3 Dry the silica gel dehydrator at the temperature in
the range of 150 to 170 °C during 4 h and the silica
gel indicator at a temperature of (120+3) °C during 2
h.
1.4 Keep the dried silica gel dehydrator in a glass
bottle with a ground (paraffin-sealed) plug or in a
sealed metal container for no longer than 7 days.
NOTE: If the silica gel is dried right before being
distributed on the item to be preserved,
arrange it in fabric bags when still hot,
place in a film cover, solder up the cover.
Keeping the bags in the film covers for longer
than 3 days is not allowed.

1.5 Keep dried silica gel indicator in a glass can with a

ground plug or with a plug sealed with paraffin.
1.6 The silica gel indicator distributed in the item
should be blue in colour. The presence of grains of
violet or pink colour is not tolerated.

020.50.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 REPLACEMENT OF SILICA GEL IN ITEMS AT STORAGE
2.1 Distribute the silica gel dehydrator, grades KCM and
ШСМ in lumps or in grains in the items in fabric bags
sewn with mica paper preventing dusting of the silica
gel and the silica gel indicator, in the humidity
indicators or cartridges-indicators.
2.2 Replace the silica gel dehydrator in the items
preserved with the use of silica gel dehydrator in
cases when its colour turns pink or violet-pink.
NOTE: A dark-blue or blue-violet colour of the
silica gel indicator and the presence of a
small amount of grains differing in colour but
still not changing the general tone of the
colour indicates that the air humidity inside
the cover is tolerable for the subsequent
storage of the item.

2.3 In case items are preserved without silica gel

indicator, replace the silica gel dehydrator on a
lapse of one year if there are no special
instructions on the inspection and replacement of it
in other terms.
2.4 For replacing the silica gel, proceed as follows:
cut off with the scissors the upper or side seam of
the cover right at the seam and carefully roll up
the cover;
replace all the bags with silica gel dehydrator with
the bags with dried silica gel. Replace the humidity
indicators or cartridges-indicators with new ones or
replace silica gel indicator therein with dried one
(of dark-blue colour);
wrap the item in paper if it has been removed in the
replacement of the silica gel;

020.50.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
close the item with the slip cover, tightly press the
slip cover about the item and solder the seam.
NOTE: All operations on the replacement of silica
gel must be performed in a room within the
minimum possible time period to avoid
humidifying of the silica gel and degrading
its activity.

020.50.00
Page 3/4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REPAIR OF FUSELAGE

1 GENERAL
1.1 Prior to repairing the helicopter fuselage,
thoroughly inspect the condition of the structural
members, determine the scope of repair operations and
the material of defective parts,
1.2 In the course of operation on the helicopter, do not
fail to use soft mats and shoes with soft footing.
Place the parts and tools on supports.
NOTE: For cleaning the fuselage of dirt, NEVER use
metal scrapers or brushes since it can lead
to damage to anti-rust coating.

1.3 In replacement or repair of load-bearing members,

remove the defective parts in turn. If all the
elements or units subject to replacement or repair
are removed, the item can loose its stiffness and
shape which will make it necessary to install it in a
jig. Therefore, the assembly and repair procedure
should be such as to keep the coupling between
separate load-bearing members.
1.4 Knock the bolts out of the units with duralumin or
copper stems supporting the unit on the opposite
side. To preserve bolts, nuts, screws and washers,
put them after the assembly in their places.
In replacement of bolts, to obtain snug fit of the
heads in the pack, make chamfers to match the fillet
radius on the bolt head according to the standard.
1.5 Remove rivets only by drilling them out. For this
purpose, proceed as follows:
mark with a center punch the centers on the snap
rivet heads so that in drilling them out the drill

020.60.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
does not slip and damage the material of the
repaired part;
drill the rivet head striving for keeping the skin
intact. In so doing, check to see that the rivet
shank does not turn since it causes a damage to the
hole;
supporting the skin with a dolly, knock the rivet
out with the punch striving for keeping the skin
intact.
1.6 Mark out the riveted joints on the duralumin parts in
a soft "black pencil and on the steel parts carry out
center punching after marking out.
1.7 The diameter of holes for rivets should match the
diameter specified in Table 1.
Tab1e 1
Minimum Tolerance (for
Diameter of rivet,
diameter of increase of
mm
hole, mm diameter), mm
2.6 2.7 0.1
3.0 3.1 0.15
3.5 3.6 0.15
4.0 4.1 0.15
5.0 5.1 0.15
6.0 6.1 0.12

1.8 When riveting, provide lands for rivets between the

edge of the riveted sheet and the axis of the hole in
compliance with Table 2.

020.60.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2
Diameter of rivet, mm Land, mm
3 6
3.5 7
4 8
5 10

1.9 In hard-to-reach-for-riveting places, it is allowed

to make auxiliary holes in the inner skin, 20 to
30 mm in dia. After riveting, blank off the holes
with fabric ACT-200 using glue ПУ-2М.
NOTE Drilling holes with dull drills is prohibited
since it leads to burrs and torn edges in the
holes.

1.10 Remove burrs on the edges of holes of magnesium,

duralumin parts from the drill outcome side wherever
accessible by tools made of non-metal materials.
Remove burrs on steel parts with a drill of larger
diameter or a countersink, 150 to 160°.
1.11 In case of double-side joint, drilling of packs of
materials of different strength or thickness should
be performed from the side of stronger or thicker
material supporting the thinner or weaker material by
hold-down tools or wooden bosses.
1.12 It is recommended to drill holes in a new point or
cover plate using old holes first with a drill of a
smaller diameter and then after checking the holes
for alignment, enlarge them to a desired size.
1.13 Countersink the seats for countersunk rivet heads
with countersinking tools with the guide pin and
limit stop.

020.60.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.14 If, in the replacement of defective rivets, the
diameters of holes after drilling out rivets exceed
those specified in the Table 1, replace the defective
rivets with the oversize rivets.
The length of the rivet shank should correspond to:
L = S + 1.3d,
where: L is the length of the rivet shank;
S is the thickness of the riveted pack;
d is the diameter of the rivet shank.

NOTE Cutting or biting off of the rivet shanks is

not allowed.
1.15 In double-side countersunk riveting, take an
allowance for countersunk snap rivet heads equal
to 0.8d.
L = S + 0.8d.
1.16 To prevent oilcan and corrugation of the skin,
provide a tight fit of the skin to the structure.
1.17 Select the type and power of the pneumatic riveting
hammer, of the mass and shape of the dolly depending
on the rivets and the diameter of the clinched rivets
and on ease of access to the riveting point. In
riveting, shrinkage of the skin in the riveted joints
of up to 0.5 mm is tolerated.
1.18 The clearance of up to 0.4 mm under the snap rivet
heads under the ribs of the corrugated sheets of the
cargo compartment floor is tolerated.
1.19 During the replacement of the skin made with an
overlap chamfer 0.5x60° the edges of the external
sheet.

020.60.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.20 The assembly of the helicopter provides for sealing
of the joints. Therefore, in the repair, additionally
guide yourself with the instructions on sealing.
2 REPAIR OF SKIN WITH MINOR DEFECTS
2.1 If dents (without cracks and drawing out) occur on
the skin, it is allowed to straighten the skin with
the help of the hammer and dolly (bags heavily
stuffed with sand can be used as dollys). In case a
blister occurs in this point, rivet straightening
section Пр100-3 of material Д16АТ to the inner side
of the skin.
2.2 If a dent is deep and cannot be straightened or the
skin develops cracks and holes up to 50 mm, repair
the defect as follows:
cut out the detective area in the skin. A circular
cutout is more preferable. If the shape of defect
calls for another shape (ellipse, oval, rectangle or
square), do not fail to round off the corners to a
radius of no less than 10 mm;
rivet reinforcing cover plate (4) (Ref. Fig. 1) of
material Д16АТ, by 0.5 mm thicker then the thickness
of the defective skin to the inner side of the skin;
fit to the contour of the cutout in the skin and
rivet a straightening plate of material Д16АТ of
thickness same as the thickness of the defective skin
to the reinforcing cover plate.
2.3 Prior to installing on the helicopter, coat the
straightening plate and reinforcing cover plate with
primer AK-070.
2.4 If the size of a hole is larger than 50 mm, perform
the repair as follows:

020.60.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
cut out the defective skin between the adjacent
frames and stringers, round off the corners to the
radius of no less than 10 mm (Ref. Fig. 2);
drill out the rivets securing the skin to the frame
webs and stringers on the said section;
fit and rivet the cover plate of material Д16А-Т of
thickness same as the thickness of the defective
skin. Before riveting, coat the cover plate with
primer AK-070.
In riveting to the webs of frames and stringers, use
only old holes.
3 REPAIR OF SKIN IN HARD-TO-REACH PLACES
3.1 Repair the holes in the skin devoid of two-side
access to the rivet as follows:
cut out the defective area to a radius in the
corners of no less than 10 mm (Ref. Fig. 3) and
dress the burrs;
carefully drill and knock out the rivets attaching
the stringers to the skin in the repair area;
cut out and fit the edging and the cover plate. The
thickness and material of the edging should be the
same as those of the skin and the total width of the
edging sides should not be less than the
corresponding width of the cutout. If possible,
arrange the edging symmetrically to the cutout;
mark out the edging complete with the cover plate
and rivet the anchor nuts to the edging;
cut the edging in one place, slip it through the
hole and then bring under the stringer. If the
edging fails to pass, it may be cut in two halves
and coupled with the cover plate;

020.60.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Defective Area
2 Rivet
3 Straightening Plate
4 Cover Plate

Standard Repair of Fuselage Center Section Having Hole,

of Less Than 50 mm in Size
Figure 1

020.60.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Rivet 4 Hole
2 Stringer 5 Skin
3 Cover Plate 6 Frames

Standard Repair of Skin of Fuselage Center Section Having

Hole,of More Than 50 mm in Size
Figure 2

020.60.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Installation of Rivets in Old

Holes
2 Edging
3 Cover Plate
4 Skin
5 Anchor Nut
6 Screw

NOTE. The fillet radius of the edging and cover plate

is not more than 10 mm.

Standard Repair of Skin of Fuselage Center Section in

Absenceof Access to Rivet
Figure 3

020.60.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
mark out and drill holes. Rivet the edging, the
straightening and splice plates;
screw on.
Prior to installing on the helicopter, coat all the
parts with primer AK-070. It is allowed to install
the pivot-nuts with screws instead of anchor nuts.
4 REPAIR OF FRAMES
If a frame has a crack or a hole, perform the repair as
follows:
drill out the rivets attaching the frame web to the
skin in the defective area (Ref. Fig. 4);
Install cover plate (4) of material Д16А-Т, 1.2 mm
thick, on the frame section, fit it to contour and
attach it to the frame section with rivets. In so
doing, provide an overlap of the damaged area to a
length of 80 mm.
Before the installation on the frame, coat the cover
plate with primer AK-070.
5 REPAIR OF REINFORCED FRAMES
If cracks occur on the vertical web of the reinforced
frame, perform the repair as follows:
drill out five rivets attaching the load-bearing
members to the frame web from each side of the crack
(Ref. Fig. 5);
stop drill the crack with a drill, 2 mm in dia.;
make a cover plate of material Д16А-Т, 1.5 mm thick,
in situ and coat with primer AK-070;
install the cover plate in its place, drill the holes
and secure with rivets.

020.60.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Rivets 4 Cover Plate

2 Rivets 5 Frame
3 Defective Area

Standard Repair of Frame of Fuselage Center Section

Figure 4

1 Cover Plate
2 Rivets
3 Rivets
4 Rivets
Standard Repair of Skin of Vertical Web of Frame No. 7
of Fuselage Center Section
Figure 5

020.60.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE STRINGER
6.1 If a stringer is broken or has a through crack,
repair it as follows:
drill out the rivets securing the stringer to the
skin in the area of a defective section (Ref. Fig.
6);
cut out a damaged section of the stringer on a
section larger than the cutout in the skin;
cut off a damaged section of the skin. Round off the
cutout corners to a radius of no less
than 10 mm;
fit and rivet the reinforcing cover plate of
material Д16А-Т, by 0.5 mm thicker than the skin of
the defective area to the inner side of the skin;
fit to contour of the cutout in the skin and rivet
to the reinforcing cover plate a straightening plate
of material Д16А-Т of the thickness same as the
thickness of the skin of the defective area;
fit and rivet the reinforcing stringer of the same
section and grade with an overlap (from the point of
cut) of no less than 100 mm.
6.2 In riveting, use the rivets of the repair size but
use the pitch same as that with which the stringer
was riveted. Before riveting, coat the reinforcing
cover plate, straightening plate and reinforcing
stringer with primer AK-070.
7 REINFORCEMENT OF DEFECTIVE STRINGER
In straightening the bent stringers, longitudinal or
lateral cracks can occur. For reinforcing the stringer
in such places:
stop drill the cracks with a drill, 2 mm in dia.;

020.60.00
Page 12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
impose a reinforcing stringer. The distance between
the crack ends to the edges of the reinforcing
stringer should not be less than 100 mm;
rivet the reinforcing stringer to the defective one
with rivets 3517A-4-8 at a pitch of 30 mm and to the
skin with rivets 3560A-4-8.
8 REPAIR OF STRINGER-TO-FRAME CROSSING
In case the fuselage skin at the crossing of the
stringer with the frame is damaged, the framework unit
is also damaged. In this case, repair the skin and the
stringer as described above. Repair the frame as
follows:
cut out a defective frame on the section larger than
the length of defect (Ref. Fig. 7);
make and install the insert and the coupling cover
plates of material Д16А-Т of thickness equal to that
of the frame material.
Before installation, coat all parts with primer AK-070
9 REPAIR OF STABILIZER SKIN
In case the stabilizer skin has a piercing in the sheet
sizing up to 50 mm, repair it as follows:
thin the sheet coating on the repaired section of the
surface with thinner 645 (seizing the rest of the
sheet by 40 to 50 mm from the edge of damage);
make a percale washer by 20 to 30 mm larger than the
defective section and secure it to the sheet by
aviation varnish HЦ-551.
If there is a cut on the sheet, stitch the blurred
edges by threads No. 10 in a staggered stitch and
glue a percale washer on top.

020.60.00
Page 13
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Rivet
2 Reinforcing Stringer
3 Rivets
4 Straightening Cover Plate

Standard Repair of Defective Stringer

Figure 6

020.60.00
Page 14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Defective Area 5 Rivets

2 Rivets 6 Angle Section
3 Rivets 7 Straightening Cover Plate
4 Rivets 8 Rivets

I Section Joint
II Pitch, 30 mm

Standard Repair of Stringer-to-Frame Crossing

Figure 7

020.60.00
Page 15/16
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTIONS ON USE OF TORQUE WRENCHES 8AT-9102-130,

8AT-9102-80, 8AT-9103-10

1 GENERAL
1.1 The multi-purpose torque wrenches are used for
tightening the nuts to a preset torque:
of up to 70 N·m (7 kgf·m), wrench 8AT-9102-130;
of up to 200 N·m (20 kgf·m), wrench 8AT-9102-80;
of up to 1350 N·m (135 kgf·m), wrench 8AT-9103-10.
1.2 Check the torque of bolted joints tightened with the
torque wrench as follows:
apply a pencil mark to the nut flat and to the
corresponding part adjacent to the nut;
give a half-turn to the nut, after that tighten it
with the torque wrench to bring the marks on the nut
and adjacent part in alignment, check the torque.
1.3 It is prohibited to use the torque wrenches as
blowing and arming tools.
2 TORQUE WRENCH 8AT-9102-130
2.1 The torque wrench (Ref. Fig. l) is a wrench with an
adjustable (selected) torque. Once the selected
torque is obtained, the handle slips which is
percepted by touch.
2.2 The value of torque of wrench 8AT-9102-130 is
selected as follows:
graduated on wrench body (1) along its axis is the
torque scale from 1000 to 7500 N·cm (every 500 N·cm)
(from 100 to 750 kgf·cm (every 50 kgf·cm)) while
graduated on handle (2), is the torque scale from 0
to 500 N·cm (every 50 N·cm) (from 0 to 50 kgf·cm
(every 5 kgf·cm));

020.70.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
rotate handle (2) to align butt Т with the mark
corresponding to the selected torque and the mark on
the handle cone with longitudinal mark A on the
body.
Example. Select the torque equal to ·cm 1600 H
(160 kgf·cm). Rotate the handle to bring
butt Т to digit 1500 (150), pass the zero
division of the cone and, aligning the mark
of digit 100 (10) with the axial line,
obtain the torque which corresponds to
selected one.

3 TORQUE WRENCHES 8AT-9102-80 AND 8AT-9103-10

3.1 The torque wrenches (Ref. Fig. 2) have a scale in the
form of a dial. While tightening a nut, watch the
dial move.
3.2 In the alignment of the signal mark (a mark on the
glass) with a desired digit, set a required torque.
The nut is tightened with the help of special heads.
As to the structure, the heads can be either socket
or flat (Ref. Fig. 3).
3.3 When using the flat heads, arm length L grows by
length 1 (Ref. Figs 2, 3).
In this case, to provide a selected torque for the
nut, calculate the wrench torque bу the formula:
L
M wr = M tq ( )
L+l
where:
M wr is the torque read off the wrench scale or
dial;
M tq is the torque of nut or bolt specified in the
drawing;

020.70.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L is the arm length from the carrier square axis
to the point of application of orce P to the
wrench;
l is the arm length of the head from the holt or
nut axis to the head square axis.
For the calculation of torques, take arm length L:
L = 280 mm, for torque wrench 8AT-9102-130;
L = 350 mm, for torque wrench 8AT-9102-80;
L = 1000 mm, for torque wrench 8AT-9103-10.
Install flat heads which vary the arm length of the
wrench only as shown in Figs 3, 4. Tighten the nuts
smoothly without jerks.
3.4 Use wrench 8AT-9102-130 only with heads 8AT-9102-01,
8AT-9102-03, 8AT-9102-08, 8AT-9102-13 and 8AT-9102-
15. A simplified method of calculation of wrench
torque (M wr ) for these heads is performed by the
formula:
M wr = 0.8 M tq
Example. Mtq = 1800 N·cm, Mwr = 0.8 ·1800 = 1440 N·cm
(Mtq = 180 kgf·cm, Mwr = 0.8 ·180 = 144 kgf·cm)

3.5 Use wrench 8AT-9102-130 only with head 8AT-9102-17;

calculate wrench torque (M wr ) from the formula:
M wr = 0.85 M tq
Example. Mtq = 6000 N·cm, Mwr = 0.85·6000= 5100 N·cm
(Mtq = 600 kgf ·cm, Mwr = 0.8·600 = 510 kgf·cm)

3.6 Use wrench 8AT-9102-80 only with head 8AT-9102-02.

The simplified method of calculation of wrench torque
(M wr ) uses the formula:
M wr = 0.82 M tq

020.70.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Example. Mtq = 9000 N·cm, Mwr = 0.82·1800 =7380 N·cm

(Mtq = 900 kgf ·cm, Mwr = 0.82·900 = 738 kgf.cm)

3.7 In handling wrench 8AT-9103-10 with head 8AT-9102-

200, the simplified method of calculation of wrench
torque (M wr ) uses the formula:
M wr = 0.9 M tq
Example. Mtq = 900 ·cm,N Mwr = 0.9·900= 810 N·cm
(Mtq = 90 kgf·cm, Mwr = 0.9·90 = 81 kgf.cm)

3.8 In handling the torque wrenches with socket heads,

the calculation of the torque is not performed (M tq =
M wr ).
3.9 In handling wrench 8AT-9102-80 with head 8AT-9102-70,
the method of calculation of wrench torque (M wr ) uses
the formula:
M wr = 0.94 M tq
3.10 In handling wrench 8AT-9102-80 with head 8AT-9102-
03, the method of calculation of wrench torque (M wr )
uses the formula:
Mwr = 0.74 Mtq
4 INSTRUCTIONS ON CHECKING TORQUE WRENCHES
4.1 With the wrenches in use, regularly, at least once in
three months, check them.
4.2 For checking the wrenches, proceed as follows:
secure the square projection of the wrench;
apply load P at distance L.
Calculate the load from the formula:
M tq
P= N
L

020.70.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The wrench is considered serviceable, if its readings
differ from the calculated ones by no more than +5 %.
5 INSTRUCTIONS ON USE OF TORQUE WRENCH 8AT-9114-00
(8AT-9114-210)
5.1 Torque wrench 8AT-9114-210 (Ref. Pig. 4) is designed
for tightening the main rotor hub. Tightening of the
hub is performed with the help of wrench-adapter (l)
(8AT-9114-211). The adapter is fitted on cylindrical
part A (of the wrench) so that the adapter axis makes
with the lever axle an angle of 90° in the vertical
plane.
5.2 While applying a force to handle В of the wrench, the
lever bends and indicator (2) reads the applied
torque on scale (3). The scale has marks
corresponding to the torques from 2000 to
3000 N·m (from 200 to 300 kgf·m) with the division of
every 100 N«m (10 kgf·m).
5.3 The hub should be tightened smoothly, without jerks.
For ease of tightening, it is allowed to slip
extension sleeve 8AT-9114-11, up to 1.5 m long, over
the wrench handle.
5.4 For checking the torque wrench, rigidly secure
cylindrical part A in the horizontal position, apply
load P to arm of 100 mm from the edge of the wrench
handle. Calculate load P from the formula:
M tq
P= N
1.31
If the pointer reads 0, with the wrench unloaded, the
wrench is considered to bе serviceable.
CAUTION: NEVER THROW THE WRENCH OR USE IT AS A
STRIKING TOOL OR A LEVER

020.70.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Wrench Body
2 Handle
Torque Wrench 8AT-9102-130
Figure 1

Torque Wrench
Figure 2

Heads for Torque Wrenches S0cket (I) and Flat (II)

Figure 3

1 Wrench Body 3 Scale

2 Indicator
Torque Wrench for Tightening Main Rotor Hub Attachment Nut
Figure 4

020.70.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHECK OF THREADED CONNECTION TIGHTENING.

INSPECTION CHECK OF CONNECTION ATTACHMENT PARTS -

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 Unlock connection under check having cleaned it of

contaminants, if required.
2 Apply marks in pencil on nut (bolt) flats and adjacent
surface of connected part.
3 Unscrew nut (bolt) haft turn and tighten it to align
mark applied earlier using respective torque wrench.
4 In case torque does not correspond to required value
trouble-shoot parts of threaded connection in
compliance with Table 1 having made sure that the
connected parts are intact.
5 Tighten nut (bolt) to required torque.
NOTE: If it is required to lock threaded connection
with torque wrench (locking holes do not
coincide) within tolerable limits of torque
align locking holes and reach required torque by
placing washer of other thickness differing from
rated value by 15 %, min under nut (bolt).
6 Lock nut (bolt) with respective locking wire.
7 In case threaded connection becomes loose (which cannot
be checked with tool) reject parts in compliance with
Table 1.
8 Prime assembled connections with primer ЭП-076 (AK-070)
and coat with two layers of enamel ЭП-140 in colour
matching connected parts.

020.71.00
Pages 1/2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHECK OF THREADED CONNECTION TIGHTENING.

INSPECTION CHECK OF THREADED CONNECTIONS ATTACHMENT PARTS

- TROUBLE SHOOTING

Table 1
Procedure of
Trouble isolation of Remedy
faulty unit on
helicopter
Cracks Production Replace
failure. Detected
visually
Torn threads Defect in use.
Detected visually
1 turn, max Replace
Ref. TC No. 20l
1 turn, max at
thread beginning
Dents at Replace
beginning and end Ref. TC No. 201
of threaded -
more than one
turn - more than
one turn at
thread beginning
Mutilation of Defect in use. Ref. TC No. No.
flats for wrench Defected visually 201
Crushed groove Defect in use. Replace
for screwdriver Detected visually
on screw and bolt
heads

020.71.00
Page 101
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 1 (continued)
Procedure of
Trouble isolation of Remedy
faulty unit on
helicopter
Deterioration of Defect in use. Ref. TC No. No.
protective Detected visually 201
coating
Traces of Detected visually Ref. TC No. No.
corrosion 201
Bent pins, bolts Defect in use. Replace
Detected visually

Wear of diameter Defect in use. Replace

of bolts, screws, Detected visually
pins beyond
tolerance

020.71.00
Page 102
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHECK OF THREADED CONNECTION TIGHTENING –

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Maintenance Practices includes the following Task Cards

TASK
CARD DESCRIPTION TC PAGE
No
201 Preparation op parking area for 203/204
helicopter and checking availability
op fire-fighting facilities

020.71.00
Pages 301/302
March 31/11
 To M.S. TASK CARD NO. 201 Pages 203,204
Mi-171Sh

M.S. Item Procedure: Preparation of parking area for

020.71.00a helicopter and checking availability of fire-
fighting facilities
Operations and technical requirements (T.R.) Corrective Checked
actions by
1 Use needle file to file torn thread (1 turn, max at

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
beginning or end of thread). Calibrate.
2 Use needle file to file dents (3 turns, max at beginning

Mi-171Sh
or end of thread). Calibrate
3 Use needle file to condition scores on flats of nuts,
heads of bolts (screws) and washers and scrape with
emery paper
4 Pile mutilated flats for wrench with needle file
March 31/11

020.71.00
Page 203

5 File notches, scratches, smooth nicks with needle file

and scrape with emery paper
 Operations and technical requirements (T.R.) Corrective Checked
actions by
6 File traces of corrosion with needle file and condition
with emery paper.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7 Check for proper and full repair performed
8 After assembly apply primer ЭП-076 (AK-070) and two

Mi-171Sh
layers of enamel ЭП-140 in colour matching connected
parts

Test equipment (TE) Tools and appliances Expendable materials

x7 magnifying glass Emery paper ГОСТ 5009-82
March 31/11

Needle file
020.71.00
Page 204

Taps
Die
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REPAIR OF CONDUCTORS OF HELICOPTER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1 GENERAL
Given in the present standardized maintenance practice
are the following standard operations for the repair of
the helicopter electrical systems in the course of
operation:
cutting the conductors and stripping off the
insulation;
soldering of the conductors;
protection of soldered joints;
termination of the helicopter conductors into the
sleeve coupling by crimping;
sealing of the connectors;
restoration of attachment of the negative-potential
conductors and bonding strips.
During the repair of the helicopter electrical systems,
observe the following requirements:
replace the defective conductors with the conductors
of the same type and section;
terminate the insulation and braiding at the ends of
conductors and mark them according to the type of
termination and marking of the replaced conductors;
check to see that the grade and type of the
electrical connectors, switching equipment, lugs
installed instead of the defective ones are in full
compliance with the old ones;
once connectors СНЦ-23 fails (breaks), replace it and
attach its wires according to PTM 1.4.1028-32;
after the repair operations, restore bindings,
protection and the attachment of cables. Bunch the
cables with thread 3K, glue binding with cement БФ-4.

020.80.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The lists of expendable materials and tools used in the
repair of the helicopter electrical system are given in
Appendixes 1 and 2.
2 CUTTING CONDUCTORS AND STRIPPING OFF INSULATION
2.1 For cutting the conductors, use the tools meeting the
following requirements:
the plane of cut should be perpendicular to the
longitudinal axis of the conductor;
a deformation of insulation and core at the point of
conductor cut is not tolerated.
2.2 Select the length of stripping of the conductor
insulation with allowance for a required clearance
between the soldering zone and the conductor
insulation (Ref. Table 1).
Table 1
Length of stripped conductor section
between soldering zone and conductor
Cross-section of insulation
conductor, mm Maximum, qnty of
Minimum,
conductor external
mm
diameters
0.2 to 0.75 2 2
1 to 2.5 2 1.5
From 4.0 and more 2 1 but not more than 5 mm
2.3 For stripping off the conductor insulation, use
mechanical stripper МСИ-901 preventing a mechanical
damage to the insulation or an undercut of the cores.
2.4 The knives of the mechanical stripper tool should
bear the cross section and grade of the stripped
conductor. The stripper tool knives should be subject
to the monthly check.

020.80.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.5 Stripping of the insulation off a conductor, grade
БПДО, can be performed by an electric stripper, type
7875-0009.
2.6 A local darkening and burning of conductor insulation
at an area of no larger than 3 mm owing to the
electric stripping are tolerated.
2.7 For ease of stripping the conductors, grade БПДО,
1.5 mm2 and more in cross-section, off insulation,
make a longitudinal cut with an electric stripper
along the section to be stripped off insulation and
remove the insulation with fingers or tweezers.
2.8 Stripping the insulation with the help of electric
stripper is performed only at a work place equipped
with the exhaust ventilation with the rate of air
flow of 0.5 to 0.6 m/min.
2.9 After taking off insulation, twist the ends of the
conductor multi-wire core by the flat pliers with
ground jaws. The angle of twisting should amount to
15 to 30° with respect to the core axis.
2.10 Remove the shielded braiding with a tool preventing
a damage (an undercut) to the conductor insulation,
as well as holes of insulation of the conductor by
separate wires of the shielded braiding.
3. CONDUCTOR SOLDERING
3.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3.1.1 Allowed for soldering of the mounting joints are
the persons who have passed the course of training
and duely certified as a solderer.
3.1.2 A room intended for soldering operation must bе
equipped with the exhaust ventilation.
3.1.3 The operating voltage in the electric mains at the
work place should not exceed 36 V. All the metal
parts must be reliably grounded.

020.80.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.2 General
3.2.1 In the course of electric soldering of the
conductors on board the helicopter, provide access
to the joint so as to be able to:
have a good view of the soldering area. A blind
soldering is strictly prohibited;
attach a connector, lug or an electric cable with
the purpose of avoiding a.kink of conductors in the
near-seam zone in the course of soldering. The
length of the conductor end free from attachment
should not be less than 150 mm.
3.2.2 Each electrical connector soldered on board the
helicopter should bear an personal stamp of the
solderer.
3.2.3 In the course of modification of the electrical
connectors pertaining to re-soldering of
conductors, carry out the re-soldering of the whole
conductor (at expense of the maintenance
allowance).
3.2.4 For soldering the conductors, use the soldering
irons recommended in Table 2.
Table 2
Diameter of working
Conductor cross-
tip of soldering Power, W
section, mm
iron, mm
0.2 to 10.2 to 1.5 4 to 6 Up to 100
2.5 to 6.0 6 to 10 Up to 200
3.2.5 The size and shape of the soldering iron tip should
ensure soldering with the maximum ease, without
damage to the adjacent areas and connections.
3.2.6 For tinning the conductors and soldering them into
lugs in melted solder, use an electric melting pot

020.80.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(baths for tinning) providing a stable heating in
melted solder up to the tinning temperature
(maximum to +400 °C).
3.2.7 In the course of tinning and soldering of
conductors, use tweezers-heat sinks ПП-1 preventing
solder from running under the conductor insulation.
3.3 Materials
3.3.1 For tinning and soldering of conductors, use
solders recommended in Table 3.
Table 3
State Melting
Solder grade Standard temperature, Remarks
(ГОСТ) °C
ПОС Cy 61-0,5 ГОСТ 21931-76 183 Wire, 0.5 to 1
mm in dia.
ТУ 48-0219-73
Tin 02, 03 ГОСТ 860-75 235 Bars
ТУ 48-0219-2-73
3.3.2 It is allowed to perform soldering with solders
ПОС-61, ПСр2,5 and ПСр3 with the subsequent anti-
rust protection of soldered joints.
3.3.3 For tinning and soldering of the conductors, use
the alcohol-rosin flux, grade CK (rosin 30+10 %,
commercial ethyl alcohol, grade A, 70+10 %).
3.3.4 Keep the fluxes in use in a sealed closed
container.
3.3.5 For degreasing and washing, use commercial alcohol,
grade А ГОСТ 17299-78. The application of ethyl
alcohol of other grades is tolerated.

020.80.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.4 Preparation for Soldering
3.4.1 Degrease the conductor cores before soldering, coat
with alcohol-rosin flux and tin with the solder
with which soldering is performed. The application
of activated fluxes in tinning conductors is not
tolerated.
3.4.2 Tin the conductor core so as to prevent solder from
running on the core, under the conductor
insulation. The tinning zone should not come to the
insulation cut closer than 1 mm.
3.4.3 Perform tinning in the melting pot with melted
solder. The holding time is in the range of 1 to
5 s. Tinning with the soldering iron is tolerated.
The tinning temperature should be by 30 to 70 °C
higher than the solder melting temperature.
3.4.4 The tinned conductor should be coated with a thin
coat of solder, have a "skeleton character" and
lustrous surface. Running of solder under the
insulation is not tolerated.
3.4.5 In case the tinned end of the conductor is too
long, it is allowed to shorten it without a
repeated tinning.
3.4.6 In the preparation of the conductor before tinning,
cutting of a section of core wires, enlargement of
the conductor cross section owing to binding of a
part of wires around the remained core and other
methods of varying the conductor cross section are
not tolerated.
3.4.7 Tin the conductors, type БИФ-Н, with flux ВФ-13
intended for tinning multi-core conductors with
nickel plating. Perform tinning of the conductor
cores with flux with the exhaust ventilation
switched on Flux ВФ-13 can be applied in the use
of any methods of heating but for an open gas-flame

020.80.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
heating, according to a commonly adopted tinning
procedure. Thoroughly remove the remaining flux
after tinning by washing (wiping) with alcohol.
After tinning, perform soldering with the
application of the alcohol-rosin flux.
3.5 Soldering Conductors
3.5.1 Before soldering, wash the contacts of an
electrical conductor with a bristle brush moistened
with alcohol and apply flux.
3.5.2 Carry out tinning and fill the contacts of the
electrical conductor with solder to approximately
1/3 of their volume. Bring the solder to the
conductor at the moment the heated connection can
quickly smelt the solder. IT IS PROHIBITED to feed
solder to the connector terminals with the tip of
the soldering iron.
3.5.3 Perform soldering, for this purpose, first, coat
the solder-filled terminal with the flux, heat it
to full melting of solder and gradually bring
tinned and flux-coated conductor into it until it
bears against the bottom.
3.5.4 Use the soldering iron to heat the terminal to full
running of solder over the solder surface- and
until fillets are formed. The position of the
soldering iron tip in the joint area should such
that the parts jointed by soldering get maximum
heat, as well as the conductor insulation is
adequately protected against overheating. If
possible, strive to perform a skeleton soldering,
that is, the contour of soldered conductors should
be seen under the solder. In this case, leave an
untinned section of surface of the conductor core
of no less than 1 mm short of the insulation cut
(to be checked visually).

020.80.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.5.5 It is tolerated in case of necessity to add the
alcohol-rosin flux and solder unless an untinned
section is preserved. Soldering with activated
fluxes is prohibited.
3.5.6 The joined parts should be kept absolutely
immovable with respect to each other until the
solder turns hard.
3.5.7 Solder the conductors, 0.2 to 1.0 mm2 in cross
section, into the terminals of the electrical
connectors with the help of the tweezers-heat sink.
3.5.8 Solder the conductors in rows from left to right,
beginning from the lower row of terminals of the
electrical connector.
3.5.9 In soldering next row of terminals of the
electrical connector, place a lining between the
soldered and unsoldered rows of terminals.
3.5.10 After soldering the joint, wash it with alcohol to
remove the remaining flux and burn. IT IS
PROHIBITED to bend the conductors in soldering
points.
3.5.11 Remove burn formed on the working tip of the
soldering iron in the course of soldering with
porolon moistened with water or by dipping the
working tip of the soldering iron into a lump of
rosin.

020.80.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

For conductor of up to For conductor of 0,35 to

0,35 mm2 in cross-section 1,5 mm2 in cross-section

For conductor with cross-section

of 2,5 mm2 and more

Soldering conductors to Lobes with Hole

Figure 1

020.80.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.5.12 Soldering the conductors to lugs can bе performed

by dipping into a bath with melted solder, for this
purpose:
heat the solder melt to a temperature by 30 to
70 °C higher than the solder melting temperature
(Ref. Table 3);
degrease and flux the lug and the conductor end
by dipping in alcohol and alcohol-rosin flux in
turn;
bring the conductor end in the lug, immerse in
melted solder and wait for 5 to 10 s;
after soldering, remove solder runs with a dry
cloth.
3.5.13 Solder the conductors to the lobes with holes as
shown in Fig. 1.
3.6 Quality Control of Soldered Joints
3.6.1 The quality control includes a 100-per cent visual
check of the soldered joints with the help
of x4 to x10 magnifying glass.
3.6.2 The soldered joint should be free from foreign
objects air pits, holes, flaws enlargening the end
diameter, sharp projections. The check holes, if
available in the connector terminal, should be
filled with solder.
3.6.3 Correct the said 'defects by a repeated soldering.
The quantity of re-solderings of the conductor to
the connectors and switching equipment is put down
in the technical documentation. In soldering the
conductors to lugs, not more than four re-
solderings are tolerated.
3.7 Protection of Soldered Joints
3.7.1 For achieving proper electrical insulation, sealing
and for relieving mechanical stresses of the

020.80.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
soldered joints, use heat shrinking sleeves
РАДПЛАСТ-Т2 slipping them over the soldered joints
and shrink with electric heater ТУМ-902 or a
similar device. Shrink the sleeves in the
electrical connectors after soldering each row of
terminals.
3.7.2 Select the length and diameter of heat-shrinking
sleeves for the protection of joints so as to allow
for a 50-per cent of lateral and 20-per cent
longitudinal shrinkage in the course of heating.
3.7.3 The length of the heat-shrinking sleeves for the
protection of joints should be within the limits of
25+5 mm.
3.7.4 The diameters of the heat-shrinking sleeves for the
protection of the conductor-to-electrical connector
contacts soldered joints should agree with the
values specified in Table 4
Table 4
Connector contact
Sleeve diameter, mm
diameter, mm
1.0 3
1.5 4
2.0 5
2.5 5
3.0 8
3.5 8
5.5 12
9 12
3.7.5 The diameters and length, of the heat-shrinking
sleeves for the protection of the conductor-to-lug

020.80.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5837A soldered joint should agree with the values
recommended in Table 5.
Table 5
Conductor Sleeve Sleeve
cross-section, mm diameter, mm length, mm
0.35 4 16
0.35 4 16
0.75 4 16
1.0 6 16
1.5 6 18
2.5 6 20
4.0 8 20
6.0 8 22
10.0 8 24
3.7.6 The shrinking temperature of the heat-shrinking
sleeves should bе as high as possible to minimize
the shrinking time, hence, to prevent heating of
solder and conductor insulation. Recommended for
heat-shrinking sleeves РАДПЛАСТ-Т2 are the
temperature in the range of 250 to 300 °C and the
time period of 2 to 3 s.
The check of sleeve shrinkage is performed
visually.
3.7.7 Overheating is guessed by a typical change in the
colour, loss of transparency.
The loss of transparency is not a sign of sleeve
rejection since through its physical
characteristics, the sleeve losses its transparency
in the course of operation at t = 105 °C but the
strength of the soldered joint protected by such
sleeve can be worse in shrinkage.

020.80.00
Page 12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.7.8 In case of overheating, it is recommended to remove
the sleeve, re-solder the soldered joint.
4 ATTACHMENT OF ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS TO SLEEVE
COUPLINGS BУ CRIMPING
4.1 The attachment of the on-board electrical conductors
to the sleeve couplings is used in the course of
operation for:
the connection of additional conductors to standby
conductors in the connection to the electrical
connector outside its shell during reworking of the
helicopter electrical systems;
the connection of conductors to a potted-with-sealing
compound electrical connector outside its shell in
the repair of the helicopter electrical systems;
the connection of conductors damaged in the course of
operation.
4.2 The sizes of the attachments for splicing one
conductor with one conductor of the same cross
section should agree with the values specified in
Fig. 2 and in Table 8 and those for splicing one
conductor with one conductor of different cross
section, in Fig. 3 and in Table 8.
4.3 Before crimping, the core of the attached conductor
should closely come to the joint lock.
4.4 The joint surface after crimping should be free from
cracks, burrs, nicks, have intact coating.
4.5 Shrinkage of the conductor end after crimping is not
to be checked.
4.6 The quality of attachment, as well as the appropriate
mechanical and electrical characteristics of the
connection is provided by the crimping tools which
are obtained only on reaching a definite stage of
crimping. The shape and basic dimensions of the

020.80.00
Page 13
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
working parts of the punches, matrixes and gauges for
checking the crimping tools should comply with the
values given in Figs 4, 5, 6.
4.7 The attachment of conductors to sleeve couplers
should be performed by the crimping tools, the value
of engagement of the punch and the matrix of which
should agree with size "H" (Ref. Table 8).
4.8 The contact resistances of the attachments should
correspond to the values specified in Table 6.
Table 6
Conductor cross- 0.20 0.35 0.5 0.75 1.00 1.5 2.5 4.00 6.00 10.00
section, mm2
Maximum contact 500 300 200 150 100 80 70 50 30 20
resistance,
microhms

4.9 The force at which the conductor should remain intact

or stay in the sleeve coupling should comply with the
values given in Table 7.
5 SEALING OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS
5.1 Check condition of sealing of the connectors by
checking the requirements the connectors must
satisfy:
the inner space of the connectors should bе fully
filled in with sealing compound;
the sealing compound should bе free from swells,
should not separate from the connector and
conductors;
the conductors in the sealed off connector should
not move with respect to one another.
5.2 In case the sealing of the connector turns damaged,
during the repair or reworking of the cable connected
with resoldering of conductors, replace the connector

020.80.00
Page 14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
providing for a repair allowance and seal it off
again.

The sizes marked with an asterisk (*) are provided by tools

1 Sleeve Coupler
2 Heat-Shrinking Sleeve
3 Lining
4 Conductor

Size of Attachment of Conductors of Similar Cross-

Sections to Sleeve Coupler
Figure 2
Table 7
Conductor 0.20 0.35 0.50 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.50 4.00 6.00 10.00
cross-section,
2 mm
Minimum pullout 4.5 6.2 9.0 14.0 19.0 29 40.0 60.0 80.0 200.0
force, kgf

020.80.00
Page 15
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4.10 After crimping, wrap 2 to 6 layers of polyethylene

film about the sleeve coupling.
Table 8
Ref. No. 2
Qnty and cross-section Ref. No.
Heat- Ref. No.
of conductors in H, 1 Sleeve
shrinking 3 Lining
attachments mm, coupling
sleeve
maxim
Stan- Qnty Cross Qnty Cross- Qnty
um
Type dard of - of section error 1
type cond secti con- of
of
ucto on of duc- conduct +0.02
rs, condu tors orsmm2 Designation
pc ctors
mm2
0.20
0.35
0.20
0.50
0.75
1-OCT 1
1 0.35 0.80
12273-77
0.35 0.50
0.75
0.50 0.50 1-OCT 1
0.75 0.75 12274-77
0.20 or 1-OCT
0.35 3-OCT 1 1 12275-77
2 1.00 0.50 1.50 12273-77
0.75 Polyethy-
lene film
1.00
Mc
1 1 1 0.50 0.15x60x20
2-OCT 1
0.75 0 mm ГОСТ
3 1.30 12273-77
1.00 10354-73
1.50
1.50
2.50 2-OCT 1
4.00 5-OCT 1
12274-77 or
4 1.80 12273-77
2.50 2.50 2-OCT 1
4.00 4.00 12275-77
2.50 3-OCT 1
4.00 4-OCT 1 12274-77 or
5 6.00 1.80
12273-77 3-OCT 1
6.00 12275-77
4.00 4-OCT 1
6-OCT 1
6 10.00 6.00 2.40 12274-77 or
12273-77
10.00 12275-77

020.80.00
Page 16
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 8 (continued)
Ref. No. 2
Qnty and cross- Ref. No. 1
Heat- Ref. No. 3
section of conductors Sleeve
H, shrinking Lining
in attachments coupling
mm, sleeve
Stan
Cross- maxim Qnty
- Qnty Cross- um
Type sectio Qnty 1
dard of sectio error
type cond n of of
n of of
con- con-
ucto conduc +0.02
ductor duc- Designation
rs, tors,
s, tors
pc mm2
mm2
0,20
0,35 1-OCT 1
1 0,20 0,80
0,50 12273-77
0,75
0,35 1-OCT 1
0,50 3-OCT 1 12274-77
2 1,50
0,75 0,35 12273-77 или
1,00 1-OCT 1
1,50 12275-77
0,50
2-OCT 1
3 0,75 1,30
0,50 12273-77
1,00
1,50
0,75
1,00 Polyethylen
1,50 0,75 2-OCT 1 e film Mc
2,50 12274-77 0,15x60x200
2 1 2
4,00 или mm
1,00 5-OCT 1 2-OCT 1 ГОСТ 10354-
4 1,80 12275-77 70
1,50 12273-77
1,00
2,50
4,00
1,50
2,50
1,50 3-OCT 1
4,00
12274-1 или
6,00
3-OCT 1
2,50 4-OCT 1 12275-77
5 1,60
4,00 2,5 12273-77
6,00
4,00 6-OCT 1 4-OCT 1
6,00 12273-77 12274-77
6 10,00 2,40 или
4-OCT 1
12275-77

020.80.00
Page 17
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Sleeve Coupler
2 Heat Shrinking Sleeve
3 Lining
4 Conductor

The sizes marked with an asterisk (*) are provided by tools

Size of Attachment of Conductors of Different Cross-

Sections to Sleeve Coupler
Figure 3

020.80.00
Page 18
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Shape and Basic Dimensions of Working Parts of Punches

Figure 4

Shape and Basic Dimensions of Working Parts of Matrixes

Figure 5

020.80.00
Page 19
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Punch
2 Matrix
3 Gauge for Checking Crimping Tool

Basic Dimensions of Working Parts of Gauges for Checking

Crimping Tools
Figure 6

020.80.00
Page 20
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5.3 In the attachments subject to sealing, in soldering

the conductors to the connectors, provide for
untinned sections at the insulation cut as shown in
Fig. 7.
5.4 Carry out sealing of the conductor-to-connector
attachments by forcing the sealing compound right
into the connection sleeve through the production
holes, 3+0.5 mm in diameter, with the help of the
grease gun.
5.5 Additionally protect the cylindrical connectors by
filling the socket key groove with the sealing
compound as shown in Fig. 8.
5.6 Seal off the conductor-to-connector attachments by
gunning the sealing compound ВГФ-2 ТУ 38-303-04-04-90
right into the pipe.
5.7 Carry out sealing of the attachments of conductors to
connectors by forcing the sealing compound into the
pipe with the help of the grease gun:
to connectors ШР and 2PT as shown in Figs 9 and 10;
to connectors 2PM and 2РМД as shown in Figs 11 and 12
and in Table 9.
5.8 After sealing, the surface of the sealing compound
should be clean, without admixtures and cracks. The
following defects are not tolerated:
swelling and separation of the sealing compound from
the connector shell and from the conductor (to be
provided by the procedure);
running of the sealing compound onto the connector
contacts;
presence of the sealing compound on the connector
external surface;

020.80.00
Page 21
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
presence of pits, more than 3 mm in dia., on the
sealing compound external surface.
The presence of the sealing compound on the side of
outcome of the cable from the connector and at the
connections of the connector parts.
5.9 Safety measures to be taken:
the room should be equipped with the exhaust-plenum
ventilation;
carry out the operations pertaining to the
preparation of sealing compound in the draft
cabinet;
carry out the operation with sealing compound with
the rubber gloves and cotton robe on;
in case the sealing compound gets on hands, wash it
away with wool moistened in acetone, then wash the
hands with hot water using soap»
5.10 Components of sealing compound are the following:
raw rubber CKTH, grade Б - 100 w.p.;
zinc white, dry muffled (or zinc white, dry,
grades M-1 or M-2) - 50 w.p.;
fluid ГКЖ-94 - 20 w.p.;
catalyst No. 18 - 2.5 w.p.;
polyamide Л-18 or Л-19 - 0.5 to 0.7 w.p.

020.80.00
Page 22
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 9
A
Diameter of Maximum error +1
shell
Straight pipe Elbow pipe
14 18
18
22 7
24
20
24
30
33
36 27
10
39
42 30
45
5.11 Preparation of Foam Sealing Compound
Introduce zinc white and fluid ГКЖ-94 in raw rubber
CKTH, grade Б, and stir up during 2 to 3 min in a
porcelain, polyethylene or metal jar either manually
(by a spatula) or by an agitator. Then introduce
vulcanizing agent-catalyst No. 18 and the foaming
agent - polyamide and once more thoroughly stir up
the compound during 1 to 3 min.
The application life of foam sealing compound ВПГ-2Л
is from 50 to 90 min.
5.12 Sealing Procedure
Clean the internal surface of the connector of dust
and dirt, thoroughly degrease by wiping with a cloth
moistened with gasoline and allow it to dry during 10
to 15 min. Then wipe with a cloth moistened with
acetone.
Apply an even sub-layer of П-11 or П-129 to the
prepared surface, allow it to dry at a room

020.80.00
Page 23
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
temperature for no more than 40 min. It is allowed to
apply the sealing compound to parts not later than in
a day if sub-layer П-11 is applied and not later than
in ten days, if sub-layer П-129 is applied.
The foam sealing compound is filled in the connectors
with the help of the grease gun in the amount of 0.5
to 0.7 of the total quantity (the foam factor equals
1.5 to 2.0).

020.80.00
Page 24
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Sealing Compound
2 Lining
3 Protective Tape

Sealing of Attachments of Conductors

to Connectors 2PM and 2PMД
Figure 11

1 Sealing Compound
2 Lining
3 Protective Tape

Sealing of Attachments of Conductors

to Elbow Connectors 2PM and 2PMД
Figure 12

020.80.00
Page 25
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The foaming and vulcanizing processes go on for as

long as 10 to 15 hours at a room temperature.
It is allowed to test or to operate the sealed off
connection on a lapse of not less than 24 h after
potting.
6 RESTORATION OF ATTACHMENT OF CONDUCTORS AND BONDING
STRIPS
6.1 In trouble shooting of the negative potential
conductors and bonding strips, check:
the presence of damage to the negative potential
conductors and bonding strips;
the reliable termination of the negative potential
conductors and bonding strips into the lugs;
the reliable attachment of the negative potential
conductors and bonding strips to the helicopter
airframe;
the presence of marking applied in red enamel to the
fittings which attach the negative potential
conductors and bonding strips to the helicopter
airframe.
6.2 In case the lug of the negative potential conductor
(bonding strip) becomes loose on the helicopter
airframe, in case of deterioration of the paint-and-
varnish coating in the connections, as well as after
the assembly of the equipment, carry out the
following operations:
drive out the attachment screw of the lug of the
negative potential conductor (bonding strip) and
disassemble the connection;
dress the points of electric contact of the lug and
the shell to bright metal using emery cloth No. 6.
The dressed area should be by 3 to 5 mm larger (to
one side) than the lug contact surface;

020.80.00
Page 26
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
degrease the surface with a cloth moistened with
gasoline. Degrease it not earlier than 6 hours
before the assembly;
connect the terminal of the negative potential
conductor (bonding strip) to the helicopter airframe
and drive in the attachment screw;
check the assembled unit by measuring the contact
resistance. For measuring, use a high-sensitive
microohmmeter. Connect the measuring instrument to
the secured lug and the helicopter airframe.
The rated values of the contact resistances of the
negative potential terminals are given in Table 10
and of the bonding strips, in Section 024
(Ref. 024.60.00, Table 1);
on finding the contact resistance satisfying the
said requirements, coat the whole unit and
excessively dressed areas with two layers of primer
AK-070 and paint by two layers of red enamel ЭП-140.
Тable 10
Rated Values of Contact Resistances
of Negative Potential Conductors
Cross-section of Rated value of
negative-potential contact resistance,
conductor, mm microhms
0.50; 0.75; 1.00; 600
1.50; 2.5
4, 6, 10 500
16, 25 400
35 300
50, 75 200
95 100

020.80.00
Page 27
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APPENDIX 1
List of Expendable Materials
State Standard or
Description and grade of material Manufacturer's
Standard (ГОСТ or ОСТ)
Wire БПЛО, БПДОЭ
Wire БИФ-Н, БИФЗ-Н
Wire MПО
Threads ЗK ОСТ 17-330-74
Sleeve РАДПЛАСТ-Т2
Glass sleeve АСЭЧ (б)
Varnish KO-85 ГОСТ 11066-74
Tape ЛЭТСАР БП, group 1
Solder ПОС Cy 61-0,5 ГОСТ 21931-76
Tin 02; 03 ГОСТ 860-75
Rosin ГОСТ 19113-73
Commercial ethyl alcohol, grade A ГОСТ 17299-78
Gasoline Б-70 ГОСТ 1012-72
Red enamel ЭП-140 ГОСТ 24709-81
Primer AK-070 ОСТ 6-10-401-76
Polyethylene film ГОСТ 10354-73
Sleeve coupling ОСТ 1 12273-77
Emery cloth No . 6 ГОСТ 10054-62
Locking wire КС-КД or КО, 0.5, ГОСТ 792-67
0.8, 1.0 mm in dia.
Raw rubber CKTH, grade Б ГОСТ 13835-68
Dry muffled zinc white ГОСТ 5161-69
Dry zinc white, grades M-1, M-2 ГОСТ 202-62
Silicon-organic fluid ГКЖ-94 ГОСТ 10834-64
Catalyst No. 18

020.80.00
Page 28
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

APPENDIX 1 (continued)
State Standard or
Description and grade of material Manufacturer's
Standard (ГОСТ or ОСТ)
Polyaraide Л-18 or Л-19
Sub-layer П-11
Sub-layer П-129
Cement БФ-4 ГОСТ 1217-74
Red enamel КО- 84 ГОСТ 22564-77

APPENDIX 2
List of Tools
Description and grade of tool Dwg No.
Tool for electrical equipment 8AT-9106-00
Tool for cutting wires РЕЗАК-10 999.7875-7032
Tool for stripping insulation off 75.002.901.000
МСИ-901 wire ends
Tweezers-heat sinks ПП-1 0839.7049.200-490
Tool for removing shielded braiding 999.7375-7047СБ
from wires ИСЭ-1
Portable electric bath for tinning 999.0838.7004.00.000
conductor cores ВЛП-2
Electric stripper 7875-0009
Tool for attaching conductors to 999.7875-7040
connector contacts СНЦ-23 ИРОК-2М

020.80.00
Page 29/30
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PROCEDURE OF COLLECTING AND TRANSFER OF THE INFORMATION

ABOUT FAILURES OF THE HELICOPTER -
DIRECTIONS FOR FILLING IN THE "FAILURE RECORD CARD"

1 GENERAL
1.1 "Failure record Card" (FRC) is an informational
message of the operating organization (the Operator)
about Failures of the certified helicopters that are
used by the Operator and should be turned over to the
certificate holder – JSC “Mil Moscow Helicopter
Plant” and to the manufacturer of the helicopter –JSC
"«Ulan-Ude Aviation Plant»". Industrial companies use
the data contained in FRC to check the flight safety
and helicopter reliability factor, timely undertake
appropriate actions, solve other technical problems
occurred during operation and for improving the type
helicopter design, methods and modes of operation.
1.2 Filling in and sending FRC to JSC «Mil Moscow
Helicopter Plant» and JSC “Ulan-Ude Aviation Plant”
is a stringent requirement to the Operator during
warranty service, engineering support of operation,
completion or extension of time limits of helicopter,
its units and components on a par with other
obligatory requirements to the maintenance and record
keeping.
1.3 If a third party performs maintenance of the
helicopter, the obligation of filling in the FRC is
transferred to this party in full scope, as a
stringent requirement to performance of helicopter
maintenance. If the third party performs maintenance
by work packages (irregularly), it should provide the
Operator with the filled in FRC right after
completing that work package.
1.4 The Operator draws FRC for each kind of trouble of
the helicopter - failure, damage or defect, detected

020.90.00
Page 1
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
in flight or on the ground based on records in the
flight logbook, maintenance record and defect
records. An example of FRC is shown on Figure 1.
1.5 The FRC should be filled in within seven days after
correction of the defect to provide the reliability
of the data contained in FRC.
1.6 The FRC is filled in minimum in three copies. The
first copy is kept by the Operator, and the other two
copies are send to JSC «Mil Moscow Helicopter Plant»
and JSC «Ulan-Ude Aviation Plant». It is allowed to
make photocopies (two-sided) of the original FRC and
send them as the second and the third copies of the
FRC. FRC records must be complete and accurate and
made in dark (it is recommended to use blue, violet
or black pen) ink or in printing, in English or
Russian languages. Use of pencils or pens with pale
ink is prohibited. All corrections in FRC should be
made by crossing out the wrong information and making
records near or above the crossed out information. It
is recommended to fill in the new FRC if there is a
necessity to record a great number of corrections.
1.7 If the failure has occurred during flight and
situation that may be considered as air incident,
code "1" should be marked in "Incident" area of the
FRC.
1.8 Each FRC is filled in for only one defect. If the
defect was coursed by the defects of any other device
(dependent or secondary defect), the FRC is filled in
only for device of primary defect. Brief description
of dependent or secondary defects should be provided
in FRC are "Additional information and comments".
1.9 The code area intended for filling in by JSC «Mil
Moscow Helicopter Plant» is not filled in by the
representatives of the Operator.

020.90.00
Page 2
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.10 There is an area for additional information and
comments of a person who fills in the FRC or checks
its filling on the back side of the FRC. In this area
information about details or problems connected with
occurrence, influence or correction of the defect if
the Operator considers this information as important
and intends to send it to JSC «Mil Moscow Helicopter
Plant» and JSC «ULAN-UDE AVIATION PLANT».
1.11 Name of aviation company, facility or organization
that performs flights or maintenance of this
helicopter is recorded in the area "The Operator of
the helicopter".
1.12 The FRC is filled in by authorized representative of
the Operator, as a rule by technical specialist who
had performed work to correct this defect or checked
(accepted) such a work that had been performed by the
representatives of industry or filled in by dedicated
specialist based on interrogation of persons who had
been performing works to correct the defect. The FRC
is checked by official -in-charge of the Operator who
is authorized to conduct communication with the
industrial organizations.
1.13 All FRSs that were filled in during the passed
quarter not later than 15 Jan, 15 Apr, 15 Jul, 15 Oct
should be send to addresses:
2A, Sokolnichesky Val str, Moscow, 1071136, Russia
JSC «Mil Moscow Helicopter Plant»
1, Khorinskaya str, Ulan-Ude, 670009, Russia
JSC “Ulan-Ude Aviation Plant”
1.14 Together with FRC the information about current
operating time of the helicopter that has been
exploited during the quarter (artificially of the 1st
of January, April, July and October) should be send
to the addresses written above. This information is

020.90.00
Page 3
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
based on the records in the forms and is provided for
each helicopter separately. The form for information
on operating time is shown in Figure 2.
2 RULES OF FILLING IN FRC
2.1 The date of detection or appearance of a Failure is
recorded in the "DATE" area (1). The date format -
DD.MM.YY.

2.2 The "REASON" area (2) is filled in with the

following codes:
code 1 the Failure caused by pilot's error;
code 2 the Failure caused by maintenance
personnel error;
code 7 the Failure caused by disadvantage of
structure;
code 8 other reason. The type of other reasons
should be noted in area 45 of FRC;
code 9 the reason is not defined.

2.3 The code of time of detection or appearance of the

Failure (but not the type of work that corrected
the Failure) is filled in the "Time of detection"
area (3)
in flight:
code 10 at takeoff;
code 11 during climb;
code 12 on cruise rating;
code 13 during descent;
code 14 during approach;
code 15 during landing;

020.90.00
Page 4
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

code 16 during hovering;

code 19 the time is unknown;
code 20 during preflight servicing;
code 30 during servicing between flights
code 40 during postflight servicing;
code 50 during regular 25 and 50-hour maintenance
operations;
code 60 during periodic depot level maintenance
(100, 300, 500 and 1000-hours maintenance
checks, seasonal maintenance, etc.);
code 70 during special check;
code 80 during other types of work. Such works
should be noted in area 45 of FRC.
Stages of engine starting, rotor starting, engine
ground run and taxing should be considered as
preflight or turnaround servicing. Stages of engine
and rotors stoppage after landing should be
considered as turnaround servicing or deservicing.
Periodically performed servicing include all the
works, performed with periodicity measured in
helicopter flight hours or in calendar time of
operation, works on providing winter ant summer
navigations (season works), and works on maintenance
performed after replacement or installation of units
and storing works.
Special checks include works performed after
exceeding flight and other limitations, and after
use of helicopter in abnormal conditions (special
maintenance).
To other kinds of works include routing repair of
the helicopter, search and correction of other

020.90.00
Page 5
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(detected earlier, independent or non- interrelated)
defects, design debugging, directional or control
checks that is performed according to bulletins or
directives on charterworthiness (directions aviation
authority), etc. Types of other works should be
noted in 45 area of FRC.
2.4 The "CONSEQUENCE" area (4) is filled in with the
following codes:
code 1 flight incident (breakoff, incident or
crush);
code 2 compulsory or unplanned landing out of
place of departure or arrival;
code 3 termination or abortive flight mission
(including abortive flight or emergency
return to the place of departure);
code 4 departure delay, i.e. flight operation is
not performed in time;
code 6 the flight is canceled, i.e. flights for
the helicopter are prohibited in the flight
day;
code 7 no consequences;
code 9 other consequences; Other consequences
should be noted in 45 area of FRC
If in the FRC area "Consequences" codes 1, 2 or 3
are used only codes from 10 to 19 "During flight"
may be filled in the are "Time of detection". If in
the FRC area "Consequences" codes 4 or 6 are used
only codes from 20 to 30 may be filled in the area
"Time of detection".
2.5 The "METHOD OF DETECTION" area (5) is filled in with
the following codes:

020.90.00
Page 6
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

code 1 failure or damage detected during flight or

on the ground by readings of onboard and
built-in diagnosis equipment (pointers,
indicators, annunciators, etc.), including
failures detected by mechanical signalling
device and control marks (feed marks);
code 2 failure or damage detected on the ground
during performing checks by ground check
equipment: verification and checkout
equipment, measurement equipment
(voltmeters, amperemeters, ohmmeters,
oscillographs, etc.) including the using of
measurement tools, devices and by means of
flaw-detection equipment.
code 3 failure or damage detected during flight or
on the ground visually, aurally, by smell,
manually, by sense of overloads,
vibrations, pushes, blows or shake.
Сode 3 is used, for example, to note the
following defects: cracks, corrosion,
unfastening, lock-in damage, mechanical
damages and deformations, wear-out,
pollution, traces of oil or fuel leak, leak
of air or any other gas (hissing noise),
smell of smoke or fume, overheating of
joint or device, traces (evidence) of
overheating, burning, burnt spot, hot gas
backing out, noise, shaking, etc.
code 4 failure or damage detected during flight or
on the ground visually or during other
control by sensory organs for operation
characteristics, i.e. for external
characteristics of performance.

020.90.00
Page 7
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Code 4 is used, for example, to note the

following abnormal performance of devices
or joints: construction element doesn't
move or stick; absence of the appropriate
noise of running engine; cockpit light or
instrument panel lamp doesn't light,
impossible to tune brightness or contrast;
radio channel is not heard, impossible to
tune volume, vibration, appearance of
pushes during operation, unusual,
additional or unwanted noise during
operations, etc.
code 5 failure or damage detected during flight or
on the ground by comparing readings of
different onboard check equipment
(pointers, indicators, annunciators, etc.).
code 6 failure or damage detected on the ground by
decryptment records of the airborne flight
information recording device.
If it is hard to make chose between codes 3 and 4,
chose code 3.
If failure or damage are detected using readings of
onboard pointers, indicators, annunciators or by
changing occurred in this readings (swinging,
flashing) of this devices use code 1. Do not use
code 3 or code 4.
2.6 The "SEARCH METHOD OF PLACE OF FAILURE" area (6) is
filled in with the following codes:

code 1 if readings of different onboard and built-

in check equipment (pointers, indicators,
annunciators, etc.), including failures
detected by mechanical signalling device and
control marks (feed marks) are used for

020.90.00
Page 8
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
detection the place of failure;
code 2 if verification and checkout equipment,
measurement equipment, including the using
of measurement tools, devices and means of
flaw-detection equipment are used for
detection the place of failure;
If equipment for check the integrity of electrical
circuits is used (ringing out) don't use code 2, but
code 5.
code 3 if the place of failure was found by using
sensory organs;
code 4 if the place of failure was found by logical
analysis using recommendations of the
maintenance documentation or by individual
analysis. In this case such a fact should be
noted in FRC area 45 as a method of
detection of failure that is not specified
in the maintenance documentation;
code 5 if the place of failure was found by using
equipment for check the integrity of
electrical circuits and absence of Failures,
and equipment for check the integrity of
insulation (ringing out). As a rule, code 5
is used instead of code 2.
code 6 if the place of failure was found by
replacement of presumable defected element
(unit, device or joint) for operable
element;
code 7 if the place of failure was found by
decryptment of records of the airborne
flight information recording device;

020.90.00
Page 9
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

When filling in the FRC it is allowed to note a

number of methods of search, in the order of their
use (up to three codes sequentially).
If the place of failure was found by using
unconventional (special, new) method of search, such
a method should be compulsorily noted in FRC area
45.
2.7 Area "CORRECTION METHOD" (7) is used for noting the
method of correcting the helicopter defected element
that is described in area "Description of device,
unit instrument, joint, article":

code 1 premature removal (replacement) of engine;

code 2 replacement of device or unit (the whole
mounting assembly);
code 3 replacement of joint, article or element (a
part of mounting assembly);
сode 4 routing repair (without replacement);
code 5 adjustment, tuning;

code 6 other methods. These methods should be noted

in FRC area 45.
If the Failure was corrected by a number of methods,
code with less number designation is filled in the
"Correction Method" area.
2.8 The "INCIDENT" area (8) is filled in with the
following codes:

code 1 if incident occurred;

code 2 if incident hasn't occurred

020.90.00
Page 10
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.9 The "IDENTIFICATION CODE" area (9) is filled in with

make of a helicopter according to its service record
book. This area is filled in for any type of
defects.
2.10 The "ENGINE IDENTIFICATION CODE" area (10) is
filled in with make of an engine according to its
service record book. Fill in this area only if the
defect was found on the engine or any of its
devices.
2.11 The "DEVICE, UNIT IDENTIFICATION CODE" area (11) is
filled in with make of defected device or unit (or
engine device, see area 10) according to its
certificate (service record book, label) or
identification mark. In case of absence of
certificate and identification mark use the
designation according to "Catalog of Parts and
Mounting Assemblies".
2.12 The "FACTORY-MANUFACTURER" area (12, 13, 14) is
filled in with the names (full or short) of factory-
manufacturers of the helicopter, engine, device,
unit respectively. If unit or device doesn't have
certificate or there is no possibility to find out
its manufacturer, write down "N/A" (Not available)
2.13 The "DATE OF PRODUCING" area (15, 16, 17) is filled
in with the date of producing of the helicopter,
engine, device, unit relatively (HH.MM.YY). For
engine or device the date that is written down in
its certificate (label) or log book is used, but not
the date of producing of the helicopter. If only
month and year of producing are noted in log book or
certificate (label) the day is not noted (make
blanks).
2.14 The "DATE OF PRODUCING" area (18, 19, 20) is filled
in with full factory (serial) numbers of the

020.90.00
Page 11
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
helicopter, engine, device, unit contained in
marking or from certificates (labels). If unit or
device doesn't have certificate, use its serial
number from marking. If helicopter component doesn't
have serial number (without marking and
certificate), write down "N/A" (Not available).
2.15 The "STATE REGISTRATION NUMBER" area (21) is filled
in with full helicopter number, assigned during the
registration in the national air administration.
2.16 The "OPERATING TIME FROM THE TIME OF COMING INTO
SERVICE" area (22, 23, 24) is filled in with the
operating time in flight hours for the helicopter,
engine, device and joint. The operating time for
engine, device or joint is noted according to
records in their certificates (labels) or logbooks,
but not according to the helicopter operating time
because they may mismatch. Operating time in
landings or cycles is noted only for devices for
which such values are recorded.
2.17 The "OPERATING TIME FROM THE LAST REPAIR" area (25,
26, 27) is filled in with the same data as for areas
22, 23, 24 operating time of the helicopter, engine,
and device after the last overhaul repair (area 27
is used for devices with defined overhaul repair).
2.18 The "SYSTEM/SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION" area (28) is
filled in with the description of system or
subsystem, which according to the Maintenance Guide
defected device, unit, joint or article belongs to.
2.19 The "DEVICE, UNIT, INSTRUMENT, JOINT, ARTICLE
DESCRIPTION" area (29) is filled in with the
description of defected device, unit, instrument,
joint or article. For certificated articles the
description from their certificates (logbooks,
labels) is noted, and for articles that don't have

020.90.00
Page 12
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

certificates - description from the section of the

Maintenance Guide that contains specification of the
device or description from "Catalog of Parts and
Mounting Assemblies" or "The Album of Electrical
Circuits".
2.20 The "ADDRESS" area (30) is filled in with the
number of section, electrical diagram and position
number on the electrical diagram according to "The
Album of Electrical Circuits" for all devices that
appertain to aeronautical and avionics equipment. In
case of absence of certificate and identification
mark use the designation according to "Catalog of
Parts and Mounting Assemblies".
2.21 The "EXTERNAL SYMPTOM" area (31) is filled in with
the description of external symptoms indicated that
condition the helicopter or its part is
inappropriate.
External symptom is the information about initial
signs that helped to find the defect and describe
the deviation from operational condition. External
symptom should be described as characteristic or
feature of the article that disaccord standard.
Some defects may have external indications match
together with their essence, i.e. character of the
defect is understood right after detection, for
example, cracks, corrosion, deformation,
destruction, etc.
2.22 The "ESSENCE" area (32) is filled in with
description of the defect essence (character) -
specific changes in quality.
The essence is the information that describes facts,
defined during the search of failure and correction
of the defect. The defect essence is determined
after performing the analysis of the article by

020.90.00
Page 13
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
visual examination, cleaning, measurement, partial
disassembling, etc. It may be hard to differentiate
the essence from the external symptom. Keep in mind
that the external symptom monitors the indications
that permitted to detect the defect, and the essence
(character) shows the real defect. The essence
(character) should always be described in relation
to defected device, joint or article.
If fatigue damage appeared, note its character in
the area: complete destruction of the article
(element) or finite crack, and note length of the
crack in mm.
If airframe corrosion detected note kind of the
corrosion in the area: pit, layer, frottage, stress,
surface corrosion, and specify dimensions of the
defect: height in mm (after removing the corrosion),
square in mm2, crack length in mm if corrosion
formation occurred.
If accident-caused damage is detected note its
character in the area: indent, nick, through hole,
abruption, etc. Also note dimensions of the defect:
length in mm, height in mm and square in mm2.
2.23 The "SEARCH (TIME)", "CORRECTION (TIME)" area (33,
35) is filled in with time and decimal parts of an
hour (ratio 0.25 is recommended) of search and
correction of the defect relatively, excluding time-
out caused by organizational reasons: waiting for
spare parts, materials, technicians or maintenance
means, and other nonproductive time gaps (rest time,
dinner break, etc.).
2.24 The "SEARCH (MAN-HOURS)", "CORRECTION (MAN-HOURS)"
area (34, 36) is filled in with labor costs in man-
hours and decimal parts of man-hours (ratio 0.25 is
recommended) of search and correction of the defect
relatively, excluding time-out caused by

020.90.00
Page 14
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
organizational reasons (see the previous item).
2.25 The "PLACE OF OPERATION" area (37) is filled in
with the name of operation (basing) place of the
helicopter when the defect was detected with
orientation to the nearest population center or
administrative center and country.
2.26 The areas from 38 to 48 are filled in JSC «Mil
Moscow Helicopter Plant».
2.27 The "ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND COMMENTS" area (45)
is filled in with the information about specifics
and complexities connected with appearance,
consequence, search and correction of the defect,
insufficiency or absence of information in the
maintenance documentation about search and
correction the defect, and other information that
the Operator want to transmit to JSC «Mil Moscow
Helicopter Plant» and ULAN_UDE AVIATION PLANT JSC.
In this area the Operator may note the detected
helicopter design defects and recommendations on
their correction, recommended methods of search and
correction, and possible measures on avoiding
occurrence of such defects.
2.28 The "THE OPERATOR" area (46) is filled in with the
name of Air Company, air enterprise or organization
which conduct flight and (or) technical operation of
the helicopter.
3 FREQUENT MISTAKES MADE DURING FILLING IN FRC
3.1 When filling in the FRC avoid the following
mistakes:
3.1.1 External symptom or essence (character) of the
defect is described incorrectly. Descriptions of
external symptom or essence of the defect are
mixed up. Term "no external symptom" is used when
description of the defect essence exists. The name

020.90.00
Page 15
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
and designation of the article in descriptions of
essence and external symptom repeat.
3.1.2 In the description of external symptom or essence
term "change" is used relative to a characteristic
or parameter of an article. Use accurate terms
such as "increase" or "decrease", etc. If the
parameter was changed the given value should be
noted in comparison with standard value.
3.1.3 Address of the defect (place of failure or damage)
is noted incorrectly. Description of the place of
failure should be given in such a way that allows
defining what element failed and the place of
failure.
3.1.4 Operating time of an article is taken from the
helicopter logbook, but the article was replaced
during the time of operation or the article was
removed from another helicopter and installed to
this helicopter again. Note only real operating
time of the article according to its certificate
(label).
3.1.5 Nonmanufacturing costs were considered during
performing the assessment of time and men-hours
used for search and correction of the defect. Note
only direct costs for performing works and don't
consider the whole helicopter standing time.
3.1.6 The value of time of search and correction of the
defect exceeds the value of labour intensity.The
value of time of search and correction of the
defect may be less or equal the value of labour
intensity, labour intensity is a used time
multiplied to the quantity of workers.
3.1.7 The FRC is filled in with a pencil or a pan with
pale ink (red, green, light blue, etc.). Fill in
FRC only by dark ink: dark blue, violet or black.

020.90.00
Page 16
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Helicopter of Failure Record Card

(front side)
Failure Record Card
1.Date - - 2.Reason 3.Detected 4.Consequence

5.Method of 6.Search Methof 7.Correction 8.Incident

detection of Place of
Failure

Designation (modification) Helicopter Engine Device, unit

9. 10. 11.
Factory-manufacturer 12. 13. 14.
Release date 15. 16. 17.
Factory (serial) 18. 19. 20.
No.

State registration 21. leave blank leave blank

22. 23. 24.
Operating time from the time
of coming into service hours hours h, landings,
cycles
25. 26. 27.
Operating time from the last
repair hours hours h, landings,
cycles
28. System/subsystem
description
29. Device, unit, 30. Address:
instrument, joint, article No. section.,
description circuit, el.
No. section.,
fig., pos.
31. External symptom
32. Essence
Search (time, man-hours)
37. Place of operation
Filled in JSC «Mil Moscow Helicopter Plant»
38.Speciality code 39.System, subsystem, - -
article code

40. External 41. 42. 43. 44.

symptom code Essence FG(ФГ) KO Development
code code code code

Figure 1(Card 1 of 2)

020.90.00
Page 17
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Helicopter of Failure Record Card (back side)

2. Reason: 50 - during regular 2 - ground check 2 - ground check
1 - cockpit failure 25 and 50-hours equipment equipment
2 - maintenance operations 3 - visually, 3- visually
personnel Failure 60 - during aurally, by 4 - by logical
3 - design- periodic depot smell, manually, by analysis
manufacturing level maintenance sense of overloads, 5 - ringing out
trouble 70 - during special 6 - test replacement
vibrations
4 - other reasons check 4 - control by 7 - airborne flight
5 - not defined 80 - during other sensory information
types of works organs for recording device
3. Detection time:
operation
10 -on take off 4. Consequence: 7. Correction method
characteristics
11 -on drifting up 1 - flight accident 1 - premature
5 - by comparing
12 -on cruise 2 - compulsory removal of engine
readings of
flight landing 2 - replacement of
different onboard
13 - during descent 3 -flight mission device or unit
check equipment
14 - during falldown 3 - replacement of
6 - airborne flight
approach 4 - departure delay information joint, article or
15 -whilst landing 6 -flight canceled element
recording
16 - during 7 - no consequences device 4 - routing repair
hovering 9 - other 5 - adjustment,
19 - unknown consequences 6. Search method of tuning
20 - during place of failure 6 - other methods
preflight 5. Method of 1 - onboard and
servicing detection: built-in diagnosis 8. Incident
30 - during turna- 1 - onboard and equipment 1 -yes
round servicing built-in diagnosis 0 -no
40 – during equipment
deservicing

45. Additional information and comments

46. Helicopter Operator

(Name of air company, air facility or organization)

Filled Checked
in by (signature, name of by (signature, name of
the authorized the authorized
person) person)
Figure 1 (Card 2 of 2)

020.90.00
Page 18
March 31/11
 Mi-171Sh
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Data reporting form of operating time of the helicopter

INFORMATION ABOUT OPERATING TIME OF THE HELICOPTER
On ____________ 200___ y.

(NAME OF AIR COMPANY, AIR FACILITY OR ORGANIZATION)

Helicopte Operating Operating time

Factory State time for
r type from coming
(serial) registrati expired
(designat into service,
number on number period,
ion) flight hours
i
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Prepared by:
(signature, name of the authorized person)

Figure 2

020.90.00
Page 19/20
March 31/11